中考英语考点聚焦（打包12套）

考点聚焦
一、要点梳理
必考词汇
◆1.
open
open作动词，表示“开”这个动作，这个开可以表示很多意思，比如开门，打开书本,打开箱子，睁开眼睛等。
open可作形容词，表示“开着”的一种状态，在这里open是形容词，用作宾语补足语。例如：The
door
is
open.门开着。
『常用搭配』
be
open
to…对……开放的‖in
the
open
(air)露天，在户外‖open
up打开；开业
【链接中考】
（山东省滨州市）
1.
The
shop
______
at
8:00
a.m.
and
it
______
for
ten
hours
every
day.
A.
opens;
is
open
B.
is
opened;
opens
C.
is
open;
has
opened
D.
opened;
opens
【答案】A
(江苏省宿迁市)
2.
You
can’t
sneeze
and
keep
your
eyes
______
at
the
same
time.
A.
open
B.
opens
C.
opened
D.
opening
【答案】A
◆2.
match
match作动词，意为“和…相配；和…相称”。例如：
The
tie
matches
your
suit.
那条领带跟你的西装很相配。
This
ribbon
does
not
match
with
my
hat.
这条丝带和我的帽子不相配。
『辨析活用』
match
/
fit
/
suit
match表品质、颜色、设计等方面匹配，即“与……相配”；fit作及物动词：适合，配上，合身，使人适应；作不及物动词，表吻合，合身；suit表适合，常强调颜色、式样等适合某人，而fit则强调大小合身。
【链接中考】
（湖北省武汉市）
—
Why
don’t
you
choose
the
red
tie
—
For
me,
it
doesn’t
_______
my
shirt
very
well.
A.
fix
B.
accept
C.
compare
D.
match
【答案】D
◆3.
practise
practise用作及物动词时后面可接名词、动名词，不能接不定式。practise的基本意思是“练习”、“训练”，也可用来表示“实行”和“开业从事于”。例如：
They’re
practising
singing
the
new
song.
他们正在练习唱那首新歌。
We
practised
pronouncing
the
sound
again
and
again.
我们一遍又一遍地练习发这个音。
『辨析活用』
practise的名词是
practice，两词发音一样，practice为不可数名词。Practice
makes
perfect.
是一句谚语，意思是“熟能生巧”。put
the
idea
into
practice表示“把思想付诸实践”。
这两个词实际上是一样的可以通用practice
和practise
两种拼写都正确,
前者用于美国英语中,
后者用于英国英语中。
【链接中考】
（广西省梧州市）
English
is
very
important,
so
I
practice
______
it
very
hard.
A.
speaks
B.
to
speak
C.
speaking
D.
speak
【答案】C
◆4.
can
can意为“能；会”，是一个情态动词，表示说话人的语气或情态，没有人称和数的变化，在句子中不能单独作谓语，只能和紧挨着的动词原形一起构成复合谓语。
◇can的基本用法：
⑴
表示能力（如体力和脑力方面），意为“能；会”等。例如：
Can
you
play
the
piano
你会弹钢琴吗？
⑵
表示请求或允许，多用在口语中，意为“可以；能”等。用于疑问句中用来提出要求，用于否定句表示不允许。例如：
Can
I
help
you
我能帮助你吗？
You
can’t
play
basketball.
你不能玩篮球。
Can
you... “请你……好吗？”表示说话人的请求；Can
I...？“我可以……吗？”用来征求对方是否允许自己做某事。如在句末加上
please一词就显得更有礼貌了。例如：
Can
you
help
me,
please
请你帮助我好吗？
⑶
表示可能。例如：
He
can
be
at
home
now.
他现在可能在家。
The
moon
can’t
always
be
full.
月亮不可能常圆。
⑷
表示怀疑。在表达此意时，只能用于一般疑问句中，带有感彩。例如：
Can
it
be
true
那会是真的吗？
◇can的句式变化：
⑴
在变否定句时，直接在我后加上“not”,可缩写成can’t或cannot,
但不能写成cann’t。例如：
He
can
swim.
→
He
can’t
swim.
Emma
can
see
the
pen
on
the
desk.→
Emma
cannot
see
the
pen
on
the
desk.
⑵
在变一般疑问句时，把我直接移到主语前（原主语的首字母改成小写，第一人称应变为第二人称）即可。例如：
I
can
see
an
orange
on
the
table.
→
Can
you
see
an
orange
on
the
table
其回答可用Yes,
OK或Certainly等作肯定回答；用No或Sorry等作否定回答。例如：
—
Can
you
look
after
my
books,
please
你能照看一下我的书吗？
—
OK.
可以。
用Certainly回答。此时语气更为肯定。例如：
—
Can
I
see
your
guitar
我能看看你的吉它吗？
—
Certainly.
当然可以。
『辨析活用』
can与may都可以表示“许可”。在征求对方意见时用may较多。例如：May
I
go
now
现在我可以走吗？在询问客观上是否可以时，can则当仁不让。例如：Can
we
take
the
books
out
我们能把这些书拿出去吗？在两者都可以用时，may显得客气一些。例如：May
I
take
this
seat
比Can
I
take
this
seat
稍婉转一点。在陈述句中用我较多。例如：You
can
sit
here.
你可以坐在这里。can可以表示能力，而may则无此用法。
【链接中考】
（山西省）
1.
—
______
your
American
friend
eat
with
chopsticks
—
Yes,
but
he
can’t
use
them
well.
A.
Can
B.
Should
C.
Must
【答案】A
（辽宁省沈阳市）
2.
Trees
______
fight
air
pollution.
They
are
natural
air
conditioners.
A.
should
B.
must
C.
need
D.
can
【答案】D
（山东省莱芜市）
3.
—
Listen!
Is
it
Linda
singing
in
the
next
room
—
No,
it
______
be
her.
She
is
still
in
Shanghai.
A.
can’t
B.
couldn’t
C.
may
not
D.
might
not
【答案】A
常考短语
◆1.in
front
of
in
front
of介词短语，意为“在……前面”。例如：
There
is
a
tall
tree
in
front
of
out
classroom.我们教室的前面有一棵大树。
『辨析活用』
in
front
of
与in
the
front
of的用法区别
◇in
front
of表示“在某一空间外的前面”。例如：
When
we
stood
in
front
of
the
building,
the
bell
rang
and
our
teacher
asked
us
to
come
into
the
classroom.当我们站在大楼前的时候，铃响了，老师叫我们进教室。
◇in
the
front
of表示“在某一空间的前面”。例如：
In
order
to
listen
to
the
teacher
clearly,
he
sat
in
the
front
of
the
classroom.
为了听清楚老师的话，他坐在教室的最前面。
【链接中考】
(海南省)
There
is
a
tall
tree
in
front
of
the
house.
A.
behind
B.
before
C.
beside
【答案】B
经典句型
◆1.
There
are
46
students
in
my
class.
我们班里有46个学生。
这是there
be句型结构，表示“某处有某物（或某人）”，是表示存在意义的“有”，主语是紧接其后的名词，而不是后面的地点。例如：
There
is
a
dictionary
in
my
bag.
我书包里有一本英语词典。
使用there
be结构时要注意三点：
⑴
there
be结构中的be必须和后面的主语保持一致。例如：There
are
two
CDs
in
the
box.
那个盒子里有两张光盘。
⑵
如果there
be结构中有几个名词（既有单数也有复数）作主语，be只和它最靠近的在数方面保持一致。例如：There
are
two
balls
and
a
cat
under
the
table.
桌子底下有两个球和一只猫。
⑶
不可数名词在there
be结构中作主语，be要用单数形式。例如：There
isn’t
any
milk
in
the
bottle.
那个瓶子里没有牛奶了。
【链接中考】
（福建省福州市）
1.
—
Leo,
_______
no
milk
or
eggs
in
the
fridge.
—
Oh,
I’ll
go
and
buy
some
right
away.
A.
it
is
B.
there
is
C.
there
are
【答案】B
（青海省，宁夏）
2.
—
Have
you
got
some
water
to
drink
—
Here
you
are.
There
______
still
some
in
the
bottle.
A.
are
B.
has
C.
is
D.
have
【答案】C
◆2.
Where’s
the
library
阅览室在哪里？
⑴
where用作疑问副词,
意为“在(往、从)哪里,
在什么地方”。用来询问处所。例如：
Where
did
you
get
the
computer
(form)
你从哪儿弄到这台电脑的
Where
did
you
study
medicine
你从哪儿学的医
⑵
where用作连接副词,
引导宾语从句。例如：
I
wonder
where
she
lives.
我想知道她住在哪里。
⑶
where用作关系副词，引导定语从句。例如：
England
is
one
of
the
few
countries
where
people
drive
on
the
left.
英国是少数沿左侧开车的国家之一。
【链接中考】
(海南省)
1.
—
Mum,
______
is
my
camera
—
Look,
it’s
on
your
desk.
A.
what
B.
where
C.
how
【答案】B
（湖北省宜昌市）
2.
—
Does
anyone
know
______
—
I
hear
that
he
was
born
in
Sweden.
A.
what
he
is
B.
when
hewas
born
C.
where
he
comes
from
D.
which
country
is
he
from
【答案】C
（广东省）
3.
I
still
remember
the
park
we
first
met.
A.
that
B.
which
C.
where
D.
when
【答案】C
◆3.
How
many
people
are
there
in
your
family
你家有几口人？
how
many用来修饰可数名词的复数，它的句式是：How
many+复数名词+一般疑问句＋
对there
be句型中主语的数量，如：some,
five,
only
one等提问时，如果主语是可数名词，不管主语是单数还是复数一般都用复数形式提问，因为问话人不知道具体的数量是多少，而且many只能接可数名词复数形式，所以be一定要用are.即用How
many+可数名词复数+are
there+地点/时间状语 的句型结构。例如：
There
is
a
book
on
the
desk.
(用how
many改为特殊疑问句)
How
many
books
are
there
on
the
desk
There
are
seven
days
in
a
week.
(对划线部分进行提问)
How
many
days
are
there
in
a
week
『辨析活用』
how
much用来修饰不可数名词，表示数量，也可单独使用。
⑴
how
much用来询问事物的数量，后接不可数名词。例如：
How
much
milk
is
there
in
the
glass
玻璃杯里有多少牛奶？
⑵
how
much用来询问事物的重量。例如：
－How
much
does
the
pig
weigh
这头猪多重？
－Eighty
kilos.
八十公斤。
⑶
how
much
意为“多少钱”时，可单独使用，也可构成词组how
much
money，但英语中常省略money，用来询问某物的价钱、价格。例如：
－How
much
is
the
eraser 这块橡皮擦多少钱？
－Ninety
two
fen.九角二分。）
⑷
how
much用来询问数字计算的结果，相当于what。例如：
How
much
is
three
plus
one 三加一等于多少？
【链接中考】
（黑龙江省鸡西市）
1.
—
How
many
______
can
you
see
in
the
picture
—
Only
one.
A.
dog
B.
sheep
C.
child
【答案】B
（江苏省扬州市）
2.
—______TV
do
you
watch
every
day
—
About
two
hours.
A.
How
much
B.
How
many
C.
How
long
D.
How
often
【答案】A
二、知识全练
第一部分
基础知识运用
一、词汇。（共20分，每小题1分）
A)
根据括号中所给汉语或首字母写出单词，使句子意思完整正确。
1.
The
blue
shirt
and
gray
tie
are
a
good
______(匹配).
2.
My
uncle
is
______(二十九)
years
old,
but
he
has
no
work.
3.
Her
brother
is
a
student
of
Qinghua
______(大学).
4.
My
parents
work
in
a
______(宾馆),
they
are
very
busy.
5.
I
want
to
buy
a
______(词典)
for
my
sister.
6.
The
old
man
is
______(八十)
years
old.
He
gets
up
early
every
morning.
7.
Look!
The
old
man
is
my
______(外祖父).
8.
They
______(有)
nothing
to
eat.
9.
Let’s
go
and
say
“Happy
______(生日)
to
you!”
10.I’m
thirsty(渴).
I
want
something
to
______(喝).
B)根据句意，用括号中所给的单词填空。
hospital,
England,
photo,
first,
one,
him,
library,
healthy,
vegetable,
many
11.
Jim
is
English
boy.
He’s
from
______.
12.
______
we
have
breakfast,
then
we
walk
to
school.
13.
My
mother
is
a
nurse.
She
works
in
a
______.
14.
This
is
a
______
of
my
family.
15.
There
a
______
and
a
lab
in
our
school.
16.
I
haven’t
a
tomato,
can
you
give
me
______
17.
There’re
______
people
in
the
street
on
Sundays.
18.
He
is
new
here.
I
don’t
know
______.
19.
My
favorite
______
is
carrot.
10.I
don’t
think
hamburger
is
______
food.
二、选择填空（共15分，每小题1分）。
1.
—
Tina,
could
you
please
play
_____
piano
for
us
—
With
pleasure.
A.
a
B.
an
C.
the
D.
/
2.
—
Do
you
like
having
______
—
Yes,
I
like
them
very
much.
A.
fruit
B.
juice
C.
oranges
D.
milk
3.
—
Tom,
is
there
______
fruit
in
the
bridge
—
Let
me
see.
Oh,
there
are
______
bananas
in
it,
Mum.
A.
any;
any
B.
some;
any
C.
any;
some
D.
some;
some
4.
I’ve
got
four
grandparents.
Tony’s
______
got
four
grandparents.
A.
also
B.
too
C.
so
D.
and
5.
—
Has
Betty
got
any
aunts
______
uncles
—
She
has
got
one
aunt.
A.
and
B.
or
C.
but
D.
so
6.
—
Where
is
the
garden
—
It’s
______
the
classroom.
A.
next
B.
in
front
of
C.
in
D.
at
7.
My
father
has
got
a
sister,
______
he
hasn’t
got
a
brother.
A.
and
B.
or
C.
but
D.
so
8.
—
______
are
the
classrooms
—
They
are
behind
the
offices.
A.
What
B.
How
C.
Where
D.
What
color
9.
—
Have
you
got
any
sisters
—
No,
______.
A.
I
have
B.
I
got
C.
I
haven’t
D.
I
have
got
not
10.
—
______
—
My
name
is
Yangling.
A.
How
old
are
you
B.
Nice
to
meet
you
C.
What’s
your
name
D.
How
are
you
11.
—
Can
you
play
table
tennis
—
______.
But
I
can
play
football.
A.
Yes,
I
can
B.
No,
I
can’t
C.
I
can’t
play
it
D.
I
can
play
it
12.—
How
many
people
______
in
your
family
—
There
are
five.
A.
there
are
B.
are
there
C.
is
there
D.
there
is
13.
—
Is
there
a
hospital
behind
your
school
—
______.
It’s
in
front
of
our
school.
A.
Yes,
there
is
B.
No,
there
isn’t
C.
Yes,
there
are
D.
No,
there
aren’t
14.
—
Nice
to
meet
you,
Jim.
—
_____.
A.
This
is
Tom.
B.
I’m
Ok.
C.
Hello!
D.
Nice
to
meet
you,
too
15.—
Where
are
you
from
—
______.
A.
My
name
is
Li
Yang
B.
I’m
Li
Yang
C.
I’m
thirteen
D.
I’m
from
Taiwan.
三、按要求改写下列句子，每空一词。（共5分，每小题1分）。
1.
I’m
from
England.(对划线部分提问)
______
are
you
______
2.
I
can
speak
Chinese.(改为否定句)
I
______
______
Chinese.
3.
There’s
a
ball
under
the
desk.
(对划线部分提问)
______
______
under
the
desk
4.
Sara
has
got
two
brothers.
(改为一般疑问句)
______
______
______
two
brothers
5.
We’ve
got
some
oranges
and
apples.
(改为否定句)
We
______
______
______
oranges
______
apples.
四、根据汉语完成下列句子，每空一词。（共10分，每小题2分）。
1.你有姑姑和叔叔吗？
　Have
you
______
______
______
______
uncles
2.戴安娜在中国与她爸爸妈妈一起。
　Diana
is
______
______
______
her
mum
______
dad.
3.Helen不会打篮球，但是她能弹钢琴。
　Helen
_____
______
basketball,
but
she
can
play
______
______.
4.我们有一些胡萝卜，而没有甜瓜。
　We’ve
got
some
carrots,
______
we
______
______
______
melons.
5.为了健康，吃一些蔬菜，不吃糖果和汉堡包。
　To
be
healthy,
______
______
______.
______
candy
or
hamburgers.
五、完成对话。（共10分，每小题1分）。
根据对话内容，在下面横线上写出对话中所缺的单词。
Jack:
What
(1)______do
you
like
Helen:
I
like
bananas.
(2)______
you
Jack:
My
(3)_____
food
is
hamburgers.
Helen:
But
it
is
not
(4)______
food.
Jack:
I
know.
(5)______
I
don’t
eat
very
often.
Helen:
What
food
do
(6)______
dislike
Jack:
I
don’t
like
(7)______.
Helen:
Apples
I
am
different,
I
don’t
like
(8)______.
Jack:
Why
Cakes
(9)______
delicious.
Helen:
(10)______
are
too
sweet.
第二部分
综合能力提升
六、完形填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
School
Newsletter
Our
school
is
not
only
about
studying.
We
also
ask
1
to
join
in
school
activities
in
their
free
time.
Every
week
there
is
a
Movie
Night
of
popular
Chinese
and
English
language
films.
2
the
movie,
there
are
discussion
groups
where
the
students
can
share
their
3
about
the
movie.
Every
two
weeks,
4
Wednesday,
is
Cooking
Night.
Students
come
and
cook
delicious
Chinese
dishes.
The
5
Thursday
of
each
month
is
Entertainment(娱乐)
Night;
students
come
to
sing
karaoke.
Sometimes
there
are
karaoke
competitions,
where
young
people
can
come
and
show
off
their
6
talents.
They
are
open
to
7
,
and
are
lots
of
fun.
There
have
8
been
a
few
short
courses,
on
subjects
such
as
Chinese
Calligraphy(书法),
the
Great
Wall,
and
the
History
of
China.
These
are
open
to
all
members
of
the
public.
Every
year,
we
have
an
event
9
China
Night.
It
was
our
10
and
biggest
event
this
year.
The
event
included
traditional
Chinese
singing
and
dancing.
1.
A.
teachers
B.
students
C.
parents
D.
friends
2.
A.
Before
B.
During
C.
After
D.
Until
3.
A.
movies
B.
time
C.
ideas
D.
dishes
4.
A.
at
B.
on
C.
in
D.
with
5.
A.
one
B.
first
C.
once
D.
only
6.
A.
sing
B.
sings
C.
singing
D.
to
sing
7.
A.
everyone
B.
someone
C.
anyone
D.
no
one
8.
A.
yet
B.
also
C.
too
D.
still
9.
A.
call
B.
calls
C.
calling
D.
called
10.
A.
exciting
B.
more
exciting
C.
most
exciting
D.
least
exciting
七、阅读理解（共10分，每小题1分）。
A
Sunny
English
ClubFor
students16:00
–
18:00
Every
Saturday200
Yuan
a
month9
Zhou
Yu
StreetTel:
3785290Foreign
teachers,
English
songs
and
films
and
more!
Health
Centre9:00—17:3016
Yong
Le
StreetTel:
3801451Free
examinations
for
those
over
70Give
you
good
advice
to
keep
healthy!
Tony’s
PizzaDinner
Special:
$
7.50Pasta
with
garlic,Spinach,
and
olives
Outdoor
Tables·Italian
WineOpen
every
day
from
12
noon
to
10
p.m.305
North
St·555-8999
THE
EGG
PLACECome
join
us
for
breakfast
or
lunch25%
OFFfrom
6-8
a.m.Try
our
cinnamon
rolls!1-225
and
Parker
RD
根据图表内容，选择最佳答案。
1.
You
will
pay
______
if
you
want
to
stay
in
the
English
club
for
half
a
year.
A.
300
yuan
B.
600
yuan
C.
1200
yuan
D.
2400
yuan
2.
One
can
get
free
examinations(检查)
in
Health
Center
if
he
is
______.
A.
9
B.
17
C.
67
D.
73
3.
If
your
breakfast
is
$
4
in
The
Egg
Place,
how
much
do
you
pay
A.
$
3
B.
$
4
C.
$
2.5
D.
$
1
4.
What
is
a
special
food
The
Egg
Place
wants
you
to
buy
A.
Sushi
B.
Spinach
C.
Olives
D.
Cinnamon
rolls
5.
How
long
is
Tony’s
Pizza
open
every
day
A.
12
hours
B.
10
hours
C.
6
hours
D.
2
hours
B
My
favourite
park
There
are
many
parks
in
the
world.
Most
of
them
parks
are
very
beautiful.
I
go
to
some
famous
parks
with
my
father
and
mother.
I
like
them
very
much.
But
my
favourite
park
is
a
small
one
near
my
home.
It’s
not
very
big
but
it’s
nice.
There
are
many
trees
and
flowers
in
it.
Some
of
the
trees
are
fruit
trees.
There
are
apple
trees,
pear
trees
and
orange
trees.
When
there
are
fruits
in
the
trees,
we
can
pick(摘)
them.
They
are
very
delicious.
I
like
oranges
best.
When
autumn
comes,
I
go
to
the
park
to
pick
some
oranges
every
day.
I
don’t
pick
all
of
them.
I
know
some
other
people
like
them,
too.
In
the
morning,
I
like
reading
under
the
tree.
The
air
is
fresh
and
the
park
is
very
quiet.
Some
people
do
morning
exercises
here.
Some
run,
some
dance
and
some
do
yoga(瑜珈).
The
best
time
of
the
year
here
is
winter.
When
it
snows,
everything
here
becomes
white.
We
can
play
with
the
snow.
We
make
snowmen
and
have
a
snowball
fight(打雪仗).
I
like
this
park
best,
because
it
gives
me
much
happiness.
根据短文内容，选择最佳答案。
6.
The
writer’s
favourite
park
is
____.
A.
big
B.
small
C.
far
from
the
writer’s
home
D.
near
the
writer’s
school
7.
The
writer’s
favourite
fruit
is
____.
A.
apples
B.
pears
C.
oranges
D.
bananas
8.
The
writer
goes
to
the
park
every
day
in
____.
A.
spring
B.
summer
C.
autumn
D.
winter
9.
In
the
morning,
it
is
very
____
in
the
park.
A.
hot
B.
cold
C.
quiet
D.
noisy
10.
Which
of
the
following
sentences
is
TRUE
A.
The
writer
doesn’t
like
any
other
parks.
B.
The
writer’s
favourite
park
is
not
interesting.
C.
Children
don’t
play
in
the
park
in
winter.
D.
The
writer
doesn’t
pick
all
the
oranges
on
the
trees.
八、书面表达（15分）
假如你们班在下星期要举办以How
to
keep
healthy为题的演讲比赛，你准备写一篇80词左右的演讲稿。
内容包括：1.
多运动；
2.
科学合理的饮食；
3.
保证充足的睡眠；
4.
保持快乐的心情。
How
to
keep
healthy
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
第三部分
课标新题探究
九、短文填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
阅读短文，从方框中选择适当的词并用其正确形式填空，使短文意思通顺、完整。请将答案写在短文后相应题号的横线上。每空限填一词，每词限用一次。方框中有来两个词是多余的。
begin,
happy,
success,
cry,
shy,
thousand,
good,
because,
use,
hurt,
make,
own
You
have
seen
him
all
over
the
world,
and
there
are
1
of
his
fans.
When
you
feel
sad,
see
his
warm
smile
and
you’ll
be
2
.
It
is
Doraemon,
a
cat
robot
from
the
22nd
century.
Secret
1:
Why
does
Doraemon
always
help
Da
Xiong
Doraemon
helps
Da
Xiong
3
he
is
the
great-great-great-great
grandfather
of
Doraemon’s
4
in
the
22nd
century.
Doraemon
wants
to
help
him
become
a
5
man
in
the
21st
century
so
that
Doraemon’s
owner
can
have
a
6
life
in
the
next
century.
To
help
him
get
the
job
done,
Doraemon
has
a
magic
pocket
filled
with
7
tools.
Secret
2:
Why
does
Doraemon
have
blue
skin
It
is
a
long
story.
In
the
8
,
Doraemon’s
skin
was
yellow.
One
day,
he
lost
his
ears
by
accident
and
his
girlfriend
laughed
at
him.
Doraemon
felt
9
and
cried
for
a
long
time.
When
he
stopped
10
,
he
found
that
his
yellow
skin
had
turned
blue.
1.
________
2.
________
3.
________
4.
________
5.
________
6.
________
7.
________
8.
________
9.
________
10.
________
十、任务阅读（共10分，每小题1分）。
阅读下面短文，根据短文内容，补全表格中所缺的信息。
Let’s
go
hiking!
Most
people
enjoy
hiking.
Hiking
is
not
only
a
healthy
but
also
a
relaxing
activity.
The
reason
why
people
go
hiking
is
different
from
person
to
person.
Here
are
some
of
the
most
popular
reasons
for
people
to
hike:
First
of
all,
hiking
is
very
good
exercise
which
will
improve
people’s
body.
It’s
good
exercise
that
doesn’t
hurt
your
body.
Secondly，hiking
is
simple
and
cheap.
All
you
need
to
do
is
to
wear
a
pair
of
hiking
boots
and
your
smile
to
start.
Finally,
hiking
is
the
best
way
to
get
away
from
your
everyday
life.
You
could
hike
alone
or
go
with
your
friends.
After
hiking,
you
will
have
a
clear
mind
and
then
return
to
work
with
confidence.
So
why
not
plan
your
hiking
route
right
away
The
reasons
why
1
is
2
by
people
General
reason
It’s
3
and
4
.
Reason
1
It’s
good
5
that
can
improve
your
6
.
Reason
2
It’s
simple
and
cheap
because
buying
a
pair
of
hiking
7
and
wearing
your
8
are
enough.
Reason
3
It’s
the
best
way
to
get
away
from
9
10
and
return
with
clear
mind
and
confidence(信心).
【答案】
八、One
possible
version:
How
to
keep
health
Hello,
boys
and
girls!
Here
is
my
advice
about
how
to
keep
healthy.
As
middle
school
students,
firstly,
we’d
better
do
more
exercise,
such
as
playing
ball
games,
running,
and
swimming.
Secondly,
we
should
pay
attention
to
what
we
eat.
We
should
have
a
balanced
diet.
We
should
eat
more
fruits
and
vegetables.
Thirdly,
we
need
enough
sleep.
Finally,
keep
ourselves
happy
because
smiling
will
make
us
younger
and
healthier.
九、1.thousands
2.happy
3.because
4.owner
5.successful
6.better
7.useful
8.beginning
9.hurt
10.crying
十1.hiking
2.popular／enjoyed
3.healthy
4.relaxing
5.exercise
6.body
7.boots
8.smile
9.everyday
10.life
PAGE
1考点聚焦
一、要点梳理
必考词汇
◆1.
should
⑴
should
作为助动词
shall
的过去式，可以在间接引语中与第一人称主语搭配，表示过去将来时间。例如：
A
week
ago,
I
told
him
that
I
should
go
to
Beijing
the
next
day.一个星期以前，我告诉他我第二天就去北京。
⑵
should
作为情态动词，通常用来表示现在或将来的责任或义务，译作“应该”、“应当”，这时它可以和
ought
to,
be
supposed
to
互换使用。例如：
You
should
complete
your
test
in
time.
你们应该按时做完你们的实验。
You
should
(=
ought
to)
tell
your
mother
about
it
at
once.
你应该立即把此事告诉你妈妈。
【链接中考】
（江苏省苏州市）
—
I
don’t
care
what
my
teachers
think.
—
Well.
You
_______.
A.
could
B.
would
C.
should
D.
might
【答案】C
◆2.
hold
hold用作动词有下列意义：
⑴拿,
抱,
握住。例如：
Hold
the
baby
a
minute,
please.
请把孩子抱一下。
⑵
包含;
容纳。例如：
The
box
can
hold
all
my
clothes.
这箱子能装下我的全部衣服。
⑶
举行,
进行。例如：
They
will
hold
a
meeting
to
discuss
this
problem
tomorrow.
他们明天将开会讨论这个问题。
『常用搭配』
hold
on
意为“（电话用语）别挂断，等一下
〈口〉别挂电话”。例如：
He
asked
me
to
hold
on
while
he
left
the
telephone
to
find
a
pencil.
他让我别挂电话,
他去找一枝铅笔。
在打电话时如果要找那人需要时间，一般说：Hold
on
a
moment,
hold
the
line或Just
a
moment,
please。例如：
—
May
I
speak
Mr.
Wang
请王先生接电话好吗？
—
Hold
on
a
moment,
please.
He
is
coming.
请稍等，他就来。
【链接中考】
（广西省定西市）
1.
—
Where
______
the
2010
World
EXPO
______
—
In
Shanghai.
A.
does,
hold
B.
has,
held
C.
will,
hold
D.
is,
held
【答案】D
（贵州省铜仁市）
2.
—
Hello!
May
I
speak
to
Mary,
please
—
______.
I’ll
go
and
get
her.
A.
Speaking
B.
Hold
on,
please
C.
I
don’t
think
so
D.
Hurry
up,
pleas
【答案】B
◆3.
if和whether
if和whether通用，都表示“是否”的意思。一般来说，后者比较正式，在口语中前者常用来代替后者。但两者有时具有不同的暗示。用whether时，正反两面的选择意义较强，问话人并不在意回答是肯定还是否定；而用if时，则比较强调单方面，即正面，问话人希望得到肯定的回答。在引导宾语从句时，要注意以下几点：
⑴
表示“是否”时，两词都能引导宾语从句。例如：
I
wonder
if/whether
you
can
examine
him
now.
⑵
宾语从句移置句首时，用whether，不用if。例如：
Whether
it
is
true
or
not,
I
can’t
say.
⑶
宾语从句为否定形式时，通常用if，而不用whether。例如：
I
asked
Tom
if
Mary
wouldn’t
come.
⑷
作discuss等词的宾语，用whether不用if。例如：
We
discussed
whether
we
should
buy
the
gift
for
him．
⑸
与不定式连用时，只能用whether。例如：
He
can’t
decide
whether
to
accept
or
refuse.
⑹
当用or提出两种选择时，whether更常用,
尤其是在正式文体中。例如：
　　Let
me
know
whether
you
can
come
or
not.
告诉我你来还是不来。
【链接中考】
(四川省内江市)
1.
I
don’t
know
if
it
______
tomorrow.
If
it
______,
we
won’t
go
on
a
picnic.
A.
rains;
rains
B.
will
rain;
rains
C.
will
rain;
will
rain
【答案】B
（福建省福州市）
2.
—
I’m
not
sure
_______
there
are
living
things
on
other
planets
or
not.
—
Even
scientists
aren’t
sure
about
it.
A.
whether
B.
where
C.
why
【答案】A
◆4.
everybody
everyone=everybody
everyone每人，everybody每人，大家，人人。
⑴
复合不定代词只相当于名词，在句中用作主语、宾语和表语。例如：
Is
everyone/everybody
here
人都到了吗
⑵
复合不定代词被形容词所修饰时，形容词须放在它们的后面。例如：
I
need
somebody
strong
to
help
me.
我需要一个体格强壮的人帮助我。
⑶
everyone表示每个××，可以指人，也可以指物
；everybody表示每个人，只可以指人。everyone和everybody
的区别是everyone比起everybody
更加强调社会意义上的人或物，而everybody强调的是人本身的身体everyone和everybody一样是不定代词，表示第三人称单数，后面的谓语动词也必须是单数形式。是“人人”、“大家”、“每个人”之意。例如：
Good
morning,
everyone
/
everybody!
大家好！
Everyone
/
Everybody
knows
how
to
do
it
well
if
he
wants
to
try.
每个人/
任何人想要试一试的话，都知道怎么做好这件事。
【链接中考】
（湖北省十堰市）
—
The
exam
was
very
easy,
wasn’t
it
—
Yes,
but
I
don’t
think
______
would
pass
it.
A.
somebody
B.
anybody
C.
everybody
D.
nobody
【答案】C
◆4.
lend
lend表示的是把自己的东西借给别人，即我们通常所说的“借出去”。例如：
Thank
you
for
lending
me
your
bike.
谢谢你把自行车借给我。
He
often
lends
money
to
his
brother.
他经常借钱给他弟弟。
『辨析活用』
◇borrow与lend都是“借”，borrow是“（主语）借进”；lend是“（主语）借出”。borrow常与from连用，即borrow
sth.
from
sb.(some
place)；lend常与to搭配，即lend
sth.
to
sb.，也可以说lend
sb.
sth.
例如：
You
may
borrow
the
book
from
the
library.
你可以从图书馆借这本书。
I
have
lent
my
bike
to
Jim.我把自行车借给吉姆了。
◇borrow和lend都是非延续性动词，不和表示一段时间的状语连用。如果要和一段时间的状语连用，表示借多长时间，要用延续性动词keep或have。
　　You
may
keep
this
book
for
one
month. 这本书你可以借一个月。
【链接中考】
（江苏省宿迁市）
—
Would
you
please
______
your
storybook
______
me
—
Sure,
But
you
must
return
it
to
me
before
Wednesday.
A.
borrow;
to
B.
keep;
for
C.
lend;
to
D.
buy;
for
【答案】C
◆5.
refuse
refuse用作动词，意为“拒绝；回绝”。例如：
We
asked
him
to
come,
but
he
refused.
我们叫他来,
可是他拒绝了。
I
think
he
won’t
refuse
me.
我想他不会拒绝我的。
I
wouldn’t
refuse
help
to
an
old
friend.
我不会拒绝给予老朋友帮助。
【链接中考】
（山西省）
David
______
his
friend’s
invitation
to
the
picnic
in
order
to
stay
at
home
and
have
a
good
rest
A.
expected
B.
refused
C.
received
【答案】B
◆6.
such
such是形容词，意为“如此；这样”。无比较级和最高级,
遇不定冠词
a(n)
时,
要放在该冠词之前；遇
all,
no,
one,
few,
several,
some,
any
等时则放在其后。例如：
Don’t
be
in
such
a
hurry.
不要如此匆忙。
There’s
no
such
thing
at
all.
根本没有这种事。
『常用搭配』
⑴
and
such
等等…之类
The
ladies
took
only
tea
and
coffee
and
such
drinks.
女士们只喝茶、咖啡以及诸如此类的饮料。
⑵such
as例如，诸如……之类
Some
countries,
such
as
Austria,
have
no
seacoast.
一些国家，例如奥地利没有海岸线。
⑶such
...
as
to,
such
...
that…表示惊叹,
或加强语气。意为“这样,
那样;
非常的”。
We
are
not
such
fools
as
to
believe
him.我们不是那样的蠢人,
竟会相信他。
She
had
such
a
fright
that
she
fainted.
她吓得昏了过去。
『辨析活用』such和so
so用作副词来修饰形容词或副词，such用作形容词修饰名词。两者都含有“如此，这么，这样”等意思，但二者用法有一定的区别：
⑴
so＋形容词（副词）
　　The
book
is
so
interesting.
这本书如此的有趣。
⑵
so＋形容词＋a(an)＋单数可数名词＝such
a(an)＋形容词＋单数可数名词。
She
is
so
good
a
doctor.＝She
is
such
a
good
doctor.
她是个如此好的医生。
⑶
such＋形容词＋复数名词（或不可数名词）
I’ve
never
seen
such
fine
drawings.
我从来没看到过这么好的画。
⑷
so＋many(little,
few,
much)＋名词。（名词前有many,
little,
few,
much时，只能用so而不能用much）
I’ve
so
many
falls
that
I’m
black
and
blue
all
over.
我摔了如此多的跤，以至于全身青一块紫一块。
⑸
such和so分别与that构成结果状语从句。
①such
a(an)＋形容词＋单数名词＋that…
②such＋形容词＋复数名词＋that…
③so＋形容词（副词）＋that…
这三个句型都译作“如此……以至于……”。
It
was
such
a
cold
day
that
we
didn’t
go
out.
天气太冷，我们没有出去。
It
was
so
cold
that
we
didn’t
go
out.
天气太冷，我们没有出去。
⑹such…that…与so…that…可以互换。
This
is
such
an
interesting
book
that
I
have
read
it
twice.
＝This
is
so
interesting
a
book
that
I
have
read
it
twice.这本书是如此的有趣，以至于我读了两遍。
【链接中考】
(江苏省宿迁市)
1.
This
is
_______
difficult
problem
that
few
students
can
work
it
out.
A.
so
B.
so
a
C.
such
D.
such
a
【答案】D
（黑龙江省哈尔滨市）
2.
The
FIFA
World
Cup
is
_______
fantastic
that
a
lot
of
people
in
the
world
are
crazy
(疯狂的)
about
it.
A.
such
B.
so
C.
very
【答案】B
常考短语
◆1.
be
interested
in
interested是形容词。有被动意味，意为“感兴趣的、对……感兴趣”，主语通常是人，且多用于be/get/feel/become
interested
in结构中。例如：
He
is
interested
in
playing
football.
他对踢足球感兴趣。
『辨析活用』
◇interest用作不可数名词时意为“兴趣、趣味”；用作动词时意为“使（人）发生兴趣”，其主语多为事物。
American
Football
doesn’t
interest
me
at
all.
美式足球一点也提不起我的兴趣。
◇interesting是形容词，有主动意味，意为“令人有趣的”。作表语时，主语通常是
物。作定语时，既可修饰人，也可修饰物。
That’s
an
interesting
storybook
for
children.
那是一本有趣的儿童故事书。
【链接中考】
（江苏省镇江市）
Mr.
Brown
always
makes
his
class
_______
and
keeps
his
students
_______
in
class.
A.
alive;
interesting
B.
lively;
interesting
C.
alive;
interested
D.
lively;
interested
【答案】D
◆2.
come
out
come
out动词短语，意为“出版;
发表”。例如：
When
will
the
dictionary
come
out
那本字典什么时候出版
That
year
they
came
out
with
another
article.
那一年他们又发表了一篇文章。
【链接中考】
（湖北省荆门市）
Another
new
fiction
by
HanHan
is
being
printed
and
it
will
soon
▲
.
A.
come
out
B.
set
out
C.
sell
out
D.
work
out
【答案】A
◆3.
as
a
result
as
a
result
意为“因此，结果是”，在句子中一般用逗号与其后面的分句隔开。
例如：
As
a
result,
he
had
to
leave.
结果他只得离开。
【拓展】as
a
result
of
sth.
意为“由于……的原因”，其后跟名词后名词性短语，但不跟句子。
例如：
As
a
result
of
automobile
pollution,
the
air
quality
in
most
major
cities
has
been
lowered.
汽车污染的后果是各主要城市的空气质量有所降低。
【链接中考】
（山东省）
A
“Workaholic”
works
too
much
and
usually
forgets
to
have
meals
and
go
to
bed.
______,
he
doesn’t
have
good
health.
A.
As
a
matter
of
fact
B.
As
a
whole
C.
As
a
result
D.
As
a
rule
【答案】C
◆4.
turn
off
turn
off
表示“关掉(收音机，电灯，水龙头等)”；其反义词组为turn
on，表示“打开(收音机，电灯，水龙头等)”。例如：
Turn
off
the
light
before
you
go
out.
出去时请关灯。
Please
turn
on
the
radio
(the
music,
the
water).
请把收音机(音乐，自来水)打开。
注意：有时它们也用作不及物动词，其后不接宾语。比较：
I
can’t
turn
off
the
tap.
我无法把龙头关上。
The
tap
won’t
turn
off.
这龙头关不上。
【链接中考】
（新疆省阜康市）
Don’t
______
the
light,
I
______
a
report.
A.
turned
off;
have
read
B.
turn
off;
am
reading
C.
turned
on;
have
read
D.
turned
on;
am
reading
【答案】B
◆5.
at
least
at
least是副词，意为“至少
”。例如：
It’ll
cost
at
least
500
dollars.
这东西至少要花
500
元。
Cut
the
grass
at
least
once
a
week
in
summer.
夏天至少每周割草一次。
⑴
用于对否定情况补充肯定的评论，意为“起码”。例如：
She
may
be
slow
but
at
least
she’s
honest.
她虽然迟钝，但起码还很诚实。
⑵
用以减轻前面所说的话的肯定性，意为“至少”。例如：
They
seldom
complained—officially
at
least.
他们很少抱怨
至少不在正式场合抱怨。
It
works,
at
least
I
think
it
does.
它行，反正我认为它行。
『常用搭配』
at
(the)
least
至少；at
the
least
至少；at
the
(very)
least
（用于数量之后）至少，最少
【链接中考】
（江苏省镇江市）
The
Gulf
of
Mexico（墨西哥湾）
is
being
polluted
seriously.
That
has
affected
_______
several
hundred
kinds
of
sea
animals
there.
A.
at
least
B.
at
once
C.
at
birth
D.
at
times
【答案】A
经典句型
◆1.
He
spent
four
weeks
on
a
summer
camp.
spend作“花费”讲，既可用作“花钱”，也可用作“花时间”。人作主语。用在表示“为某事而花钱”时，后接介词on。即：spend
some
money
on
sth.
例如：
　　She
spent
five
dollars
on
the
dictionary.她买那本词典花了五美元。
◇表示“花时间做某事”时，可接on＋名词或in＋动词ing。形式，in可省去。即spend
some
time
on
sth.或spend
some
time
(in)
doing
sth.
【链接中考】
（四川达州）
1.
—
Your
watch
is
so
beautiful.
It
must
be
expensive.
—
Not
at
all.
I
only
￥20
on
it.
A.
cost
B.
spent
C.
paid
D.
took
【答案】B
（四川省自贡市）
2.
They
spent
all
night
_______
the
work.
A.
doing
B.
did
C.
to
do
【答案】A
◆2.
Why
not
　　Why
not... 是Why
don’t
you... 的简略形式，意为“为什么不……呢？”，用来间接提出建议。Why
not后接动词原形。例如：
　　①—
Why
not
go
to
the
park
on
foot
It’s
quite
near.为什么不步行去公园？公园很近。
　　　—
All
right！好的！
　　②Why
not
ask
Mr.
Wu
help
us
为什么不请吴老师帮助我们呢？
【链接中考】
（湖北省宜昌市）
1.
—
A
new
3D
movie
is
on.
Shall
we
go
and
see
it
this
weekend
—
________!
What’s
it
A.
I
must
be
going
now
B.
You
are
right
C.
Why
not
D.
My
pleasure
【答案】C
（四川达州）
2.
Why
not
an
English
club
to
practice
English
A.
to
join;
to
speak
B.
join;
speaking
C.
join;
to
speak
D.
to
join;
speaking
【答案】B
◆3.
I
remember
sitting
close
to
the
radio
in
the
living
room,
…
⑴
remember
to
do
sth.
记住要做某事。例如：
Remember
to
post
the
letter
for
me.记住给我邮这封信。
⑵
remember
doing
sth.
记得做过某事。例如：
I
remember
seeing
him
once.
我记得见过他一次。
（山东省）
—
You
aren’t
a
stranger,
are
you
—
______,
don’t
you
remember
______
me
at
the
school
gate
ten
minutes
ago
A.
Yes;
to
see
B.
No;
seeing
C.
No;
saw
D.
Yes;
seeing
【答案】B
◆4.
If
I
play
well,
I’ll
play
the
solo.
这是含有if引导条件状语从句的复合句。if从句可放在句首，也可放在句尾。在下列三种情况下，if引导的条件状语从句要用一般现在时表示将来。
⑴
主句中有will,
shall,
won’t等将来谓语。例如：
We
won’t
go
shopping
if
it
rains
tomorrow.
如果明天下雨，我们就不去买东西。　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　　
⑵主句中有may,
can,
must等情态动词。例如：
If
you
want
to
be
a
college
student,
you
must
study
hard.如果你想成为大学生，就必须努力学习。
⑶主句是祈使句。例如：
Please
come
to
see
me
if
you
have
time.如果有时间，请过来看我。
【链接中考】
(年上海市)
1.
We
will
have
no
water
to
drink
_______we
don’t
protect
the
earth.
A.
until
B.
before
C.
though
D.
if
【答案】D
(四川省内江市)
2.
I
don’t
know
if
it
______
tomorrow.
If
it
______,
we
won’t
go
on
a
picnic.
A.
rains;
rains
B.
will
rain;
rains
C.
will
rain;
will
rain
【答案】B
二、知识全练
第一部分
基础知识运用
一、词汇。（共20分，每小题1分）
A)根据括号中所给的汉语写出单词，使句子意思完整正确。
1.
The
old
man
has
a
large
______(收集)
of
stamps.
2.
My
sister
likes
playing
beach
______(排球).
3.
He
has
great
______(技巧)
in
drawing.
You
had
better
learn
from
him.
4.
The
______(结果)
of
the
game
was
five－nothing.
5.
True
______(友谊)
is
worth
more
than
money.
6.
The
gardens
are
open
to
the
______(公众).
7.
Some
of
my
______(亲戚)
live
in
America.
8.
______(人人)
wanted
to
watch
the
match.
9.
Read
the
______(介绍)
on
the
pocket
before
you
take
the
medicine.
10.
There
is
a
______(机会)
that
I
will
see
him
these
days.
B)选用方框中所给词（组）的适当形式填空。
in,
fact,
be
interested
in,
take
up,
tidy
up,
sailing,
all
the
time,
far
away,
as
well
as,
right
now
11.You
would
better
________
before
the
guests
arrive.
12.
She
lives
in
the
mountain
village
happily
________.
13.
She
________
music
when
she
was
six
years
old.
14.
It’s
hard
________
when
there
is
no
wind.
15.
Harry
has
knowledge
________
experience.
16.
Too
many
activities
________
too
much
of
our
time
for
study.
17.
Are
you
busy
________
I
want
to
ask
some
questions.
18.
________,
I
am
not
interested
in
play
football.
19.
________,
what
happened
to
him
yesterday
20.It’s
very
________
from
here.
You
had
better
take
a
bus.
二、选择填空（共15分，每小题1分）。
1.
This
book
is
very
_____
and
I
am
_____
in
it.
A.
interest,
interest
B.
interesting,
interested
C.
interested,
interesting
D.
interested,
interested
2.
Too
many
activities
______
too
much
of
our
time
for
study.
A.
tidy
up
B.
clean
up
C.
take
up
D.
look
up
3.
—
Peter,
_______
do
you
visit
your
grandparents
—
Twice
a
month.
A.
how
long
B.
how
soon
C.
how
often
D.
How
far
4.
I
don’t
know
______
Tom
will
go
or
not.
A.
whether
B.
how
C.
if
D.
where
5.
—
Excuse
me,
are
you
waiting
for
the
bus
—
Yes.
I
am.
But
the
bus
is
so
late.
_____,
how
can
I
get
to
the
No.
1
Middle
School
A.
In
the
way
B.
On
the
way
C.
By
the
way
D.
Along
the
way
6.
—
If
______
calls,
ask
him
to
wait.
—
OK.
A.
anyone
B.
someone
C.
any
one
D.
none
7.
—
Do
you
like
the
music
The
Moonlight
Sonata
—
Yes,
it
______
really
beautiful.
A.
feels
B.
sounds
C.
listens
D.
tastes
8.
—
Would
you
like
to
have
a
try
—
Yes,
very
much.
It
______
to
be
exciting.
A.
is
looking
B.
will
look
C.
seems
D.
look
like
9.
—
______!
The
traffic
is
moving
fast!
—
OK.
Thanks.
A.
Look
down
B.
Look
out
C.
Watch
D.
See
10.
I’d
like
to
watch
the
NBA
game.
Would
you
please
_____
the
TV
A.
turn
off
B.
turn
down
C.
turn
on
D.
turn
over
11.—
Bob,
may
I
______
your
MP4
—
Sure,
but
you’d
better
not
______
it
to
others.
A.
lend;
lend
B.
lend;
borrow
C.
borrow;
lend
D.
borrow;
borrow
12.—
Do
you
know
______
—
Yes,
he
came
here
on
a
train.
A.
when
he
came
here
B.
if
he
will
come
here
C.
why
he
came
here
D.
how
he
came
here
13.Do
you
know
if
the
snow
______
later
If
the
snow
_____,
we
will
make
a
snowman
and
play
with
show
balls.
A.
will
stop,
will
stop
B.
will
stop,
stops
C.
stops,
will
stop
D.
stops;
stop
14.
Most
of
the
young
people
enjoy
______
Jay
Chou’s
songs.
A.
sing
B.
sang
C.
singing
D.
to
sing
15.—
May
I
speak
to
Mr.
Brown,
please
—
______.
He’s
coming.
A.
Hold
up
B.
Hold
out
C.
Hold
the
moment
D.
Hold
the
line
三、按照下面的汉语意思用英语完成句子，每空词数不限。（共10分，每小题2分）。
1.雪下得很大，结果他来晚了。
　It
snowed
heavily,
and
____________
he
came
late.
2.不要为他担心，一切都会好的。
Don’t
____________!
Everything
will
be
all
right.
3.大多数电视台在午夜12点停止播出。
　Most
television
stations
____________
at
12:00
pm.
4.狗咬了他的腿。
　The
dog
_________________.
5.如果你现在存钱的话，你不久就能买小汽车了。
If
you
save
now,
you
will
_______________
a
car
soon.
四、完成对话。（共10分，每小题1分）。
根据下面对话中的情景，在每个空白处填入适当的语句，使对话恢复完整。
A:
Hello!
May
I
speak
to
Miss.
Gao,
please
B:
(1)___________________.
It’s
a
bad
line.
Please
speak
loudly.
A:
I
said,
“May
I
speak
to
Miss.
Gao,
please ”
B:
Hold
on,
I’m
sorry.
(2)__________________
at
the
moment.
Can
I
help
you
B:
(3)_____________________.
A:
Please
tell
her
our
family
is
thinking
of
taking
a
trip
to
Xi’an
and
I
want
to
ask
her
some
questions
about
the
trip.
B:
OK!
I’ll
(4)____________________
on
her
desk.
Thank
you
very
much.
A:
(5)_________________________.
Goodbye.
B:
Bye-bye.
第二部分
综合能力提升
五、完形填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
Life
is
not
easy,
so
I’d
like
to
say
“When
anything
happens
,believe
in
yourself.”
When
I
was
a
young
boy
,
I
was
1
shy
to
talk
to
anyone.
My
classmates
often
2
me.
I
was
sad
but
could
do
nothing,
Later,
3
happened,
and
it
changed
my
life.
It
was
an
English
speech
contest.
My
mother
asked
me
to
4
it
.What
a
terrible
idea!
It
meant
I
had
to
speak
before
all
the
teachers
and
students
of
my
school.
“Come
on,
boy.
Believe
in
yourself.
You
are
sure
to
5
the
contest.”
Then
mother
and
I
talked
about
many
different
topics.
At
last
I
chose
the
topic
“Believe
in
yourself.”
I
tried
my
best
to
remember
all
the
speech
and
practiced
it
over
100
6
.With
my
mother’s
great
love,
I
did
7
in
the
contest.
I
could
hardly
believe
my
ears
when
the
news
came
that
I
had
won
the
first
place,
I
heard
the
cheers
8
the
teachers
and
the
students.
Those
classmates
9
once
looked
down
on(看不起)
me
,now
all
said
“Congratulations!”
to
me.
My
mother
hugged
me
and
cried
excitedly.
Since
then,
everything
has
changed
for
me.
When
I
do
anything,
I
try
to
tell
10
to
be
sure
and
I
will
find
myself.
This
is
not
only
for
a
person
but
also
for
a
country.
1.A.
too
B.
so
C.
quite
D.
very
2.A.
made
faces
at
B.
looked
after
C.
caught
up
with
D.
laughed
at
3.A.nothing
B.
something
C.
everything
D.
anything
4.A.
take
part
in
B.
join
C.
get
D.
make
5.A.
lose
B.
win
C.
pass
D.
beat
6.A.
words
B.
topics
C.
times
D.
sentences
7.A.
well
B.
good
C.
bad
D.
interested
8.A.
for
B.
at
C.
from
D.
to
9.A.
when
B.
what
C.
which
D.
who
10.A.
someone
B.
me
C.
everything
D.
myself
六、阅读理解（共10分，每小题1分）。
A
Everyone
worries.
But
how
do
you
deal
with
your
worries
Whether
your
worries
are
big
or
small,
you
can
take
these
three
steps
to
deal
with
your
worries:
◆Try
to
find
out
what
you’re
worried
about
Sometimes,
you
will
know
what
you’re
worried
about.
Other
times,
you
might
not.
Try
to
find
it
out
first;
if
you
can’t,
you
can
ask
for
help.
◆Think
of
ways
to
make
it
better
There
is
always
something
you
can
do
to
help
you
feel
less
worried.
Sitting
there
worrying
is
no
fun
and
it
won’t
solve
your
problem.
Grades
at
school
are
often
a
top
worry
for
kids.
If
you’re
worried
about
grades,
ask
yourself
these
questions:
◇Why
are
grades
important
What
do
grades
mean
to
me
◇How
do
I
get
ready
for
class
Do
I
go
over
my
notes
even
when
there
isn’t
a
test
◇Do
I
have
a
good
place
to
do
my
homework
◇Have
I
tried
different
ways
of
studying
If
your
worry
is
about
a
fight
you
had
with
a
friend,
you
might
write
down
all
the
things
you
could
do－write
a
note
to
him
or
her,
invite
him
or
her
to
a
basketball
game,
say
sorry
to
him
or
her
etc.
Once
you
have
a
list
of
things
you
could
do,
you
can
choose
the
one
that
gets
your
friend
back.
◆Ask
for
help
When
you’re
worried,
it
can
help
to
find
someone
to
talk
to.
You
can
ask
your
parents,
friends,
or
teachers
for
help.
根据短文内容，选择最佳答案。
1.
How
many
steps
of
dealing
with
your
worries
are
mentioned
in
the
passage
A.
Two.
B.
Three.
C.
Four.
D.
Seven.
2.
When
you
don’t
know
what
you’re
worried
about,
______.
A.
you
should
try
to
find
it
out
B.
you
can’t
ask
for
help
C.
you
don’t
need
to
think
of
ways
D.
you
can
sit
there
worrying
3.
If
you’re
worried
about
grades,
you
can
ask
yourself
these
questions
except
“______”.
A.
Why
are
grades
important
B.
What
do,
grades
mean
to
me
C.
How
do
I
get
ready
for
class
D.
Why
don’t
my
friends
like
me
4.
According
to
the
passage,
what
will
you
do
if
you
have
a
fight
with
your
friend
A.
Make
a
new
friend.
B.
Don’t
talk
to
him
or
her
any
more
C.
Have
another
fight
with
him
or
her.
D.
Invite
him
or
her
to
a
basketball
game.
5.
The
passage
mainly
tells
us
______.
A.
who
is
often
worried
B.
when
people
are
worried
C.
how
to
deal
with
our
worried
D.
what
kind
of
worries
people
have
B
Here
is
an
interesting
way
to
write
a
“secret
letter”.
You
do
it
with
the
help
of
watermarks.
If
you
collect
stamps,
you
know
what
a
watermark
is.
On
every
stamp
there
is
a
mark.
But
you
can
not
see
it.
You
can
see
it
only
when
you
put
the
stamp
in
the
water.
The
mark
is
called
“watermark”.
The
mark
shows
that
you
have
a
real
stamp.
People
make
watermarks
on
stamps
by
applying
pressure.
In
this
way,
the
watermark
can
be
shown
clearly
in
because
of
the
reflection(反射)
of
the
light.
It
is
easy
to
make
watermarks
and
use
them
to
write
a
“secret
letter”.
You
put
a
piece
of
paper
in
water,
then
take
it
out
quickly
and
put
it
on
a
piece
of
glass.
Put
a
dry
piece
of
paper
on
the
top
of
it.
Now
you
may
write
on
the
dry
piece.
You
must
use
a
hard
pencil
to
apply
pressure.
When
you
raise
the
dry
piece,
you
will
find
that
you
can
see
everything
you
have
written
on
the
wet
piece.
When
your
wet
paper
becomes
dry,
you
will
not
see
anything.
But
the
words
will
be
seen
again
if
you
put
the
piece
of
paper
in
water
and
take
it
out
quickly.
Now,
Please
try
it
and
see
how
it
works.
根据短文内容，选择最佳答案。
6.
The
word
“watermark”
in
this
passage
means
_____
in
Chinese.
A.水迹　
B.水纹　　　
C.
水彩　　
D.
水印
7.
If
a
stamp
is
not
a
real
one,
we
can’t
see
the
watermark
on
______.
A.
when
we
put
it
on
a
piece
of
glass
B.
when
we
put
it
in
water
C.
when
we
put
a
he
piece
of
paper
on
it
D.
when
we
apply
pressure
on
it
8.
We
can
try
to
write
a
“secret
letter”
because
_____.
A.
it
is
easy
to
make
watermarks
B.
it
is
easy
to
get
some
pieces
of
paper
C.
we
can
use
a
hard
pencil
to
do
it
D.
people
can’t
see
anything
on
wet
paper
9.
We
must
put
a
“secret
letter”
in
water
to
see
the
words
because
the
watermarks
_____.
A.
reflect
more
light
than
the
words
on
dry
paper
B.
are
easy
to
see
through
in
clear
water
C.
were
made
carefully
in
clear
water
D.
reflect
light
in
a
different
way
than
they
are
wet
10.
According
to
the
passage,
how
many
things
at
least
shall
we
use
to
write
a
“secret
letter”
A.
Three.
B.
Four.
C.
Six.
D.
Seven.
七、书面表达（15分）
下面是Li
Mei同学发给她的英国笔友Emily的一封e-mail。假设你是Emily，请根据Li
Hong的e-mail和所给信息提示及要求给她回信。
信息提示：⑴保持心情愉快，别轻易发怒　⑵乐于助人　⑶学会与人合作
要求：1.在以上信息提示基础上，至少再为Li
Hong提供2条建议。
2.把握要点，不逐字翻译，适当发挥。
3.词数在80词左右。（不包含已给词）
Dear
Emily,I’m
so
sad.
This
morning
I
quarreled
with
one
of
my
classmates
again.
But
in
fact,
I
really
want
to
get
on
well
with
them.
I
don’t
know
how
to
do
it.
Could
you
help Best
WishesYours,Li
Mei
Dear
Li
Mei,I’m
glad
to
hear
from
you.
I
think
some
of
us
have
the
same
trouble
like
you.
Perhaps
you
may
do
like
this:
________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________I
hope
what
I
said
can
help
you.
Best
wishes.
Yours,
Emily
第三部分
课标新题探究
八、短文填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
根据短信内容，在方框内选出适当的单词填空，使其通顺、完整。
why,
because,
play,
bring,
many,
neither,
boot,
realize,
excite,
not
see,
have
There
is
nothing
else
like
winter
during
the
year.
Of
course,
some
people
will
say
winter
is
not
fun
1
it
is
“so
cold”.
But
they
are
wrong!!
There
are
many
great
things
in
winter
that
we
2
in
spring,
summer,
or
autumn.
If
you
just
think
a
moment,
you
3
that
winter
is
the
best
season
of
the
year.
Here
are
the
top
5
reasons
4
winter
is
so
fun:
◇Winter
is
beautiful.
What
other
season
shows
you
nature’s
beauty
with
snow
Snow
is
both
beautiful
and
fun
5
with.
You
can
go
ice-skating
or
sledding.
You
can
build
a
snowman
or
a
snow
fort.
You
can
make
snow
angels
or
have
snowball
fights
...
◇You
can
have
fun
both
indoors
and
outdoors.
Unlike
in
the
hot
summer,
when
you
always
want
to
be
indoors,
you
can
play
6
inside
and
outside.
◇You
get
to
wear
cool
clothes.
Winter
is
the
best
time
of
year
to
be
super
comfortable.
You
wear
7
to
be
warm!
You
get
to
wear
cool
things
that
you
don’t
usually
wear
in
other
seasons
－like
gloves,
scarves,
8
,
hats
and
down
jackets.
◇Winter
means
holidays.
You
can
celebrate
Christmas,
New
Year’s
Day,
and
Spring
Festival!
You
also
have
a
long
winter
vacation
from
school!
Nothing
could
be
9
and
fun
than
having
all
of
them
in
a
single
season.
◇You
get
to
be
with
family.
Winter
is
fun
because
it
definitely
10
you
closer
with
family!
1.
________
2.
________
3.
________
4.
________
5.
________
6.
________
7.
________
8.
________
9.
________
10.
________
九、任务阅读（共10分，每小题1分）。
THE
DAILY
NEWSWireless(无线电报)
Crosses
Atlantic
Ocean(大西洋)
(CORNWELL,
ENGLAND,
December
12,
1901)—Marconi
sent
a
radio
signal
today.
He
sent
it
across
the
Atlantic
Ocean.
He
was
the
first
to
do
this.
The
signal
started
from
England.
It
went
all
the
way
to
Newfoundland,
Canada.
It
just
passed
through
the
air.
It
didn’t
need
any
wires
to
carry
it.
It
was
a
wireless
signal.
Marconi
invents
things.
He
has
worked
on
wireless
signals
for
a
long
time.
Years
ago
he
got
a
patent(专利证书)
in
England.
It
was
for
his
wireless
signal.
The
patent
said
he
owned
this
idea.
That
meant
no
one
else
could
use
it.
They
couldn’t
copy
or
sell
it.In
1897
Marconi
started
his
own
work
in
London,
England.
Two
years
passed.
Then
he
sent
a
signal
across
the
English
Channel.
He
kept
working
after
that.
He
kept
making
it
better.Today
his
signal
made
it
across
the
Atlantic.
It
traveled
over
2,000
miles!
The
navy(海军)
may
want
to
use
it
some
day.
Maybe
others
will
want
to,
too.
What
other
uses
will
it
have
What
else
will
Marconi
invent
It
will
be
fun
to
see.
根据短文内容，完成下面的表格。
1.
Who
______
the
first
radio
signal
across
the
Atlantic.
2.
What
He
got
a
patent
for
his
______
______.
3.
When
The
first
radio
signal
was
sent
across
the
Atlantic
______
______.
4.
Where
The
signal
was
sent
______
________
from
England.
5.
Why
He
got
a
patent
so
_______
______
could
copy,
use
or
sell
his
idea.
【答案】
七、One
possible
version:
First
of
all,
you
should
keep
happy
and
then
you
may
not
get
angry
with
your
classmates
easily.
You
should
be
friendly
to
greet
with
them
when
you
meet.
Take
an
active
part
in
games
with
them
if
you
are
free.
Help
your
classmates
when
they
are
in
trouble.
Don’t
laugh
at
them
or
play
jokes
on
them
when
they
make
mistakes.
Don’t
disturb
then,
when
they
are
working
or
resting.
Of
course,
it
is
very
necessary
to
learn
to
work
together
in
our
study.
I
am
sure
if
you
are
kind,
friendly
and
helpful,
you’ll
get
on
well
with
them.
八、1.because
2.can’t
see
3.will
realize
4.why
5.to
play
6.both
7.more
8.boots
9.more
exciting
九、1.Marconi,
sent
2.wireless
signal
3.in
1901
4.to
Canada
5.no
one
PAGE
19考点聚焦
一、要点梳理
必考词汇
◆1.
enjoy
　　⑴
喜欢；享受；欣赏
　　He
enjoys
listening
to
the
popular
music.
他喜欢听流行音乐。
⑵
享受……的乐趣
Did
you
enjoy
yourself
at
the
party
last
night
你昨晚在宴会上晚得开心吗
『辨析活用』like,
love和enjoy
◇like意为“喜欢，爱好”，指感到满意，产生兴趣等。
Tom
likes
flying
kites.
Tom喜欢放风筝。
like作介词时，其意思为“像……”。
Kate’s
hat
looks
like
a
cat.
Kate帽子看上去像只猫。
◇love意为“喜欢，爱好”，着重强调强烈的感情，亲密的依恋。常用于祖国、亲人或异性等方面；用于物时，指非常喜爱，近乎嗜好的程度。
She
doesn’t
love
you,
and
she
loves
only
your
money.她不爱你，只是爱你的钱。
love喜欢的程度比like深，这两个词的宾语除用名词外，都可用不定式或动名词。
Children
often
love
to
play
this
game.
孩子们常常喜欢玩这个游戏。
◇enjoy作“喜欢”讲时，后面只能接动名词，不能接动词不定式作宾语。
Are
you
enjoying
living
here
你喜欢住在这里吗？
enjoy后接反身代词时，意思是“过得快活”。相当于have
a
good
time。
They
enjoyed
themselves
very
much
at
the
party.
他们在聚会上玩得很开心。
【链接中考】
（台湾省）
1.
Lucy:
Does
Aunt
Tara
enjoy
______
Mark:
Yes.
She
has
three
dogs,
two
rabbits,
four
birds,
and
some
fish
in
her
house.
(A)
collecting
dolls
(B)
keeping
pets
(C)
visiting
the
zoo
(D)
working
on
the
farm
【答案】B
(江苏省盐城市)
2.
—
How
was
your
visit
to
the
World
Park
in
Beijing
—
Wonderful!
We
enjoyed
______
very
much.
A.
itself
B.
myself
C.
yourselves
D.
ourselves
【答案】D
◆2.
arrive
arrive是动词，意为“到达”，是比较正式的用语，用作不及物动词，后面要接介词in或at，构成及物性的短语动词，然后才能接名词作宾语。arrive
in后面接表示国家、大城市等大地方的名词作宾语。例如：
When
did
they
arrive
in
London？他们是什么时候到达伦敦的？
arrive
at后面常接表示较小地方的名词，如车站、学校、村庄饭店、邮局、机场等。
例如：When
does
the
train
arrive
at
the
station？火车什么时候到站？
『辨析活用』arrive,
get和reach
三者都有“到达”之意，但它们在用法上有所不同：
◇get
to在表示“到达”之意时，是非正式用语，在口语中可代替arrive
at/in或reach。
get
to中的to是介词，其后一般接表示地点的名词。例如：
What
time
does
this
plane
get
to
New
York？这架飞机什么时间到达纽约？
◇reach表示“到达”之意时，是正式用语，作及物动词用，其后可直接接名词或代词作宾语。例如：
They
reached
the
top
of
the
mountain.他们到达了山顶。
表达到某一年龄、数量或高度时，一般用
reach。例如：
He
will
reach
fifty
next
year.他明年就五十岁了。
【链接中考】
（四川省巴中市）
______
the
afternoon
of
April
30th,many
foreign
visitors
arrived
______
Shanghai.
A.
In;
at
B.
On;
in
C.
On;
to
【答案】B
◆3.
until
◇prep.
⑴
直到……为止（与持续性动词连用，表示动作、状态的继续）
I
shall
wait
until
Monday.
我将等到星期一。
［注意］until与till可替换，until比较正式，且句首较常用until。
⑵
直到……才；在……之前（用于否定句，常与瞬间动词连用）
They
didn’t
leave
here
until
the
next
day.
他们直到第二天才离开这里。
◇conj.
⑴
直到……为止（表示动作状态的继续）
We’ll
wait
for
you
until
you
come
back.我们将一直等到你回来。
⑵
直到……才（用于否定句）
I
didn’t
go
to
bed
until
my
father
got
home.
直到爸爸到家我才睡觉。
【链接中考】
(江苏省盐城市)
1.
Many
students
didn’t
realize
the
importance
of
study
______
they
left
school.
A.
when
B.
until
C.
as
D.
after
【答案】B
（黑龙江省鸡西市）
2.
Usually,
we
don’t
know
how
important
something
is
______
we
lose
it.
A.
or
B.
until
C.
as
soon
as
【答案】B
常考短语
◆1.
put
on
put
on意为“穿上；戴上”，相当于及物动词，以衣物作宾语，着重于穿、戴的动作。例如：
It’s
very
cold
today.
Please
put
on
your
coat.
今天很冷，请穿上你的外套。
『辨析活用』wear,
have
on,
dress和put
on
◇wear
和have
on
穿着；戴着。相当于及物动词，有衣物作宾语，着重于穿、戴的状态。have
on不用于进行时态。
He
always
wears/has
on
black
shoes.她一直穿着黑鞋。
She
is
wearing/has
on
a
red
coat她穿着红大衣。
◇dress
穿；戴。可用作及物动词，以人作宾语，即dress
sb.（给某人穿衣）；也可用作不及物动词。既可强调动作，又可表示状态，表示状态时常用be
dressed
in
结构。此外dress还可用作名词。
Mary
is
dressing
her
daughter.玛丽正给她女儿穿衣服。
She
usually
dresses
well.她总是穿得很好。
He
is
dressed
in
a
black
jacket.他穿着黑上衣。
【链接中考】
（河北省）
1.
Sally,
_____
your
sunglasses.
The
sun
is
so
bright.
A.
put
on
B.
put
up
C.
put
away
D.
put
down
【答案】A
（陕西省）
2.
It’s
too
bright
and
sunny.
Why
not
_____your
sun
glasses
A.
break
B.
clean
C.
make
D.
wear
【答案】D
◆2.
look
at
look
at是由动词look
与介词at组成的词组，相当于及物动词，后面可以带宾语，侧重“看”的动作。例如：
Look
at
the
blackboard,
please.请看黑板。
『辨析活用』look,
look
at,
see和
watch
look,
look
at,
see,
watch
都有“看”的意思，但用法不同。
◇look为不及物动词，后面不能带宾语，常单独使用，以引起对方注意。例如：
Look!
That’s
an
English
car.
看！那是一辆英国的小汽车。
◇see为及物动词，意思是“看见”，侧重“看”的结果。例如：
Can
I
see
your
new
pen
我可以看看你的新钢笔吗？
◇watch是及物动词，意思是“观看、注视”，用来指注视移动着的物体，如看电视、看球赛、看戏等。
They
are
watching
TV.他们正在看电视
【链接中考】
（天津市）
—
Would
you
like
to
go
and
see
Avatar
with
me
tonight
—
Thank
you
very
much,
but
I
______
it
already.
A.
see
B.
will
see
C.
have
seen
D.
am
seeing
【答案】C
◆3.
look
forward
to
look
forward
to的意思是“盼望”。这里的“to”不是动词不定式的标志，而是一个介词。其后要接名词或动名词。例如：
I’m
looking
forward
to
your
visit
next
week.
我在盼望着你下周光临。
We
look
forward
to
seeing
you
again.
我们期待着与你再次相见。
【链接中考】
（黑龙江省哈尔滨市）
1.
Every
one
of
you
is
looking
forward
______
getting
a
good
result.
Better
think
carefully
before
writing
down
your
answers.
Wish
you
success!
A.
on
B.
in
C.
to
【答案】C
(江苏省盐城市)
2.
We
are
all
looking
forward
to
______
more
than
HK
$6,500
for
the
Oxfarm.
A.
raise
B.
raising
C.
be
raised
D.
being
raised
【答案】B
◆4.
be
good
at
be
good
at
表示“擅长于某一学科知识或技能”，也可表示“在……方面做得好。”
be
good
at
后面接名词、代词、动词的-ing
形式，相当于
do
well
in。例如：
Mike
is
good
at
swimming.
迈克擅长于游泳。
I
am
good
at
English.
我擅长英语。
『辨析活用』
be
good
at意思接近于do
well
in.“在（某方面）出色；擅长……”。be
good
at
强调一种笼统情况，而do
well
in可表示一种情况，也可指在具体的一次活动中表现出色。例如：
Mary
is
good
at
maths.
=
Mary
does
well
in
maths.
玛丽数学很好（指情况）。=
玛丽数学学得很好。
Tom
did
well
in
that
English
test.汤姆在那次英语考试中考得很好。(不宜用be
good
at.指具体一次)
【链接中考】
（浙江省卷）
Zhou
Yang
is
skating.
She
won
a
gold
medal
at
the
2010
Olympic
Winter
Games.
A.
good
at
B.
weak
in
C.
tired
of
D.
angry
with
【答案】A
经典句型
◆1.
We’re
on
a
school
trip
and
we’re
having
a
good
time.
have
a
good
time
玩得高兴，过得愉快，相当于enjoy
oneself。常用来对别人提出祝愿。例如：
We
had
a
very
good
time
at
the
evening
party.
我们在晚会上玩得很愉快。
I
hope
you
will
like
it
and
have
a
good
time.
希望你们会有一段美好的时光，玩得开心点。
【链接中考】
（浙江省湖州市）
—
I’ll
go
on
a
picnic
with
my
classmates
tomorrow.
—
________.
A.
Thank
you
B.
It
doesn’t
matter
C.
Have
a
good
time
D.
The
same
to
you
【答案】C
◆2.
What
are
you
going
to
do
at
the
weekend
这是“be
going
to+动词原形”句型结构，意为“打算、准备、要”，常表示按计划或安排将要发生的动作。有时也可以表示推测将要或肯定要发生的动作。例如：
We
are
going
to
have
a
class
meeting
this
afternoon.
今天下午我们打算开班会。
在运用be
going
to结构时要注意以下两个方面：
◇注意用现在进行时替代be
going
to结构的情况：表示位置移动的动词如go,
come,
leave,
fly,
start,
arrive等常常用现在进行时表示按计划或安排近期将要进行的动作，而不用be
going
to结构。例如：
We
are
going
to
the
supermarket
tomorrow
afternoon.
明天下午我们打算去超市。
◇当There
be与be
going
to结构连用表示“……将有……”这种状态时，常用There
is
/
are
going
to
be…表示，其中的be不能换成have。例如：
There
is
going
to
be
a
basketball
match
this
afternoon
in
our
school.
今天下午我们学校将有一场篮球赛。
【链接中考】
（四川省成都市）
1.
—
How
long
______
in
Chengdu
—
For
just
the
weekend
to
come.
I’ll
be
back
next
Monday
morning.
A.
are
you
staying
B.
did
you
stay
C.
have
you
stayed
【答案】A
（贵州省铜仁市）
2.
—
Jack
is
busy
packing
luggage.（行李
）
—
Yes.
He
______
for
America
on
vacation.
A.
leaves
B.
left
C.
is
leaving
D.
has
been
away
【答案】C
（山东省莱芜市）
3.
______
a
big
party
in
our
school
in
two
weeks.
A.
It
is
B.
It
will
be
C.
There
was
D.
There
is
going
to
be
【答案】D
◆3.What’s
the
population
of
Shanghai
询问“某地有多少人口”要用“What… ”或“How
large… ”提问，不用how
many或how
much等词语。回答用“It’s
about…”形式。例如：
What’s
the
population
of
Germany
(＝How
large
is
the
population
of
Germany？)德国的人口是多少？
—
What
is
the
population
of
Canada
加拿大的人口有多少
—
It’s
about
29
million.大约有二千九百万。
【链接中考】
（广西南宁）
—
______
the
population
of
Hong
Kong
—
Seven
million
people.
A.
How
is
B.
How
much
is
C.
What
are
D.
What
is
【答案】D
二、知识全练
第一部分
基础知识运用
一、词汇。（共15分，每小题1分）
A)根据括号中所给汉语写出单词，使句子意思完整正确。
1.
It
may
rain,
but
we
shall
go
______(无论如何).
2.
Please
give
my
______(问候)
to
your
parents.
3.
My
parents
did
their
best
to
keep
up
the
family
______(传统).
4.
There
are
______(很少)
people
in
the
streets
today.
5.
The
officials(官员)
came
to
the
party
with
their
______(妻子).
6.
The
house
is
small,
but
it’s
very
______(舒适).
7.
______(春天)
is
coming.
The
weather
is
getting
warm.
8.
Can
you
answer
this
______(问题)
in
English
9.
John
is
______(大约)
the
same
age
as
Tom.
10.
There
are
many
______(游客)
to
the
White
House
every
year.
B)根据句意，用方框内所给单词或短语填空。
sweep
away,
no
one,
work,
decorations,
go
shopping
11.
I
have
to
bring
my
________
home
today.
12.
They
are
putting
up
________
for
the
festival.
13.
The
wind
________
the
leaves(树叶).
14.
I
often
________
with
my
mother
on
Sundays.
15.
The
house
is
empty.
_______
lives
there.
二、选择填空（共15分，每小题1分）。
1.
Li
Ping
has
a
good
______
in
a
TV
station.
A.
job
B.
work
C.
working
D.
works
2.
This
book
is
very
_____
and
I
am
_____
in
it.
A.
interest,
interest
B.
interesting,
interested
C.
interested,
interesting
D.
interested,
interested
3.
Let’s
go
by
plane.
It’s
______
than
by
train.
A.
faster
B.
fastest
C.
slower
D.
slowest
4.
—You
look
sad,
Kate.
—Yeah.
I
have
made
_______
mistakes
in
my
report.
A.
a
little
B.
little
C.
a
few
D.
few
5.
—
Do
you
like
the
film
—
No,
it’s
______.
It
makes
me
want
to
sleep.
A.
boring
B.
interesting
C.
sleepy
D.
noisy
6.
—
Who
is
the
first
one
to
______
to
school
in
your
class
—
Zhou
Tao.
A.
reach
B.
get
C.
arrive
D.
take
7.
Tony
_____
English
and
he
speaks
it
very
well.
A.
looks
at
B.
is
good
at
C.
get
ready
for
D.
at
work
8.
—
Look!
Here
comes
our
school
bus.
—
No
hurry.
Don’t
get
on
it
______it
stopped.
A.
until
B.
after
C.
before
D.
when
9.
—
_______
is
the
population
of
your
city

—
About
two
million.
A.
How
B
What
C.
How
many
D.
How
much
10.
My
friend,
Helen,
is
coming
to
visit
us.
I’m
looking
forward
______
him.
A.
meet
B.
meeting
C.
to
meet
D.
to
meeting
11.—
Where
is
your
mother,
Helen
—
She
______
the
flowers
in
the
garden.
A.
waters
B.
watered
C.
is
watering
D.
water
12.
She
can’t
speak
any
Japanese,
______
she
is
in
trouble
in
Japan.
A.
or
B.
so
C.
but
D.
and
13.—
There
will
be
a
meeting
this
afternoon.
Don’t
forget
it!
—
OK,
I
______.
A.
won’t
B.
don’t
C.
will
D.
do
14.
—
Andy,
it’s
time
for
supper.
—
Oh,
Mum.
I’m
______.
A.
come
B.
coming
C.
come
to
D.
to
come
15.—
______
in
Beijing
in
autumn
—
It’s
funny
and
cool.
A.
What’s
the
weather
like
B.
How’s
the
weather
like
C.
What
like
the
weather
D.
How
like
the
weather
三、按要求改写下列句子，每空一词。（共5分，每小题1分）。
1.We’ll
take
the
different
routes.（改为一般疑问句）
　______
______
take
the
different
routs
2.We
are
going
to
the
zoo
by
bike.（对划线部分提问）
　______
______
you
going
to
the
zoo
3.They
are
going
to
have
a
meeting
this
Sunday.（对划线部分提问）
______
are
they
going
to
______
this
Sunday
4.
My
sister
usually
comes
to
school
by
bus.(改为be
going
to结构)
My
sister
______
______
to
school
by
bus.
5.
I
believe
it.
You
won’t
leave
the
city
next
week.(合并为一句)
I
______
believe
you
______
leave
the
city
next
week.
四、根据汉语完成下列句子，每空一词。（共10分，每小题2分）。
1.看这张照片，是纽约。
　______
______
the
picture.
It’s
a
photo
of
New
York.
2.我们一直在为考试做准备。
　We
are
______
______
______
the
exam.
3.我听说泰国是个观光的好地方。
　I
hear
that
Thailand
is
a
good
place
______
______
______.
4.我把照片用电子邮件发给你。
　I
______
______
the
photos
to
you
______
______.
5.我认为骑自行车兜风比跑步放松。
　I
think
cycling
is
______
______
______
______.
五、完成对话。（共10分，每小题1分）。
A)从对话后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项，其中一项为多余选项。
M－Millie
A－Andy
M:
How
was
your
trip
to
London
A:
It
was
great.
(1)_______
M:
Tell
me
something
about
it.
Where
is
London
A:
It’s
in
the
south
of
England
and
it’s
over
the
Thames
River(泰晤士河).
M:
How
do
you
like
the
people
there
A:
(2)_______
M:
(3)_______
A:
Yes.
People
often
visit
the
London
Museum,
the
National
Gallery(国家美术馆),
the
Science
Museum
and
so
on.
M:
Wonderful!
But
my
English
is
bad.
(4)_______
Do
you
believe
me
A:
(5)_______
A.
Are
there
some
interesting
places B.
London
is
one
of
the
most
interesting
places.C.
Try
your
best
to
study.D.
They
are
friendly
and
helpful,
but
often
in
a
hurry(匆忙).E.
I
like
the
people
there
very
much.F.
I
think
I
ought
to
study
English
harder.G.
I
should
not
learn
English
any
more.
B)根据对话情景，在每个空白处填上一个适当的句子，使对话的意义连贯、完整。
A:
Hi,
Tim.
It’s
Saturday
tomorrow.
(6)_________________
B:
I’m
going
to
watch
a
football
match.
It’s
between
Korea
and
China.
A:
That’s
great.
(7)_______________
B:
At
three
o’clock
in
the
afternoon.
I
have
two
tickets.
(8)_________________
A:
I’m
afraid
not.
We’re
going
to
have
a
basketball
match
tomorrow
afternoon.
B:
I
see.
(9)_________________
A:
A
team
from
No.
45
Middle
School.
B:
(10)__________________
A:
At
the
Children’s
Palace.
B:
I
think
that
is
going
to
be
fun.
Wish
your
team
have
good
luck!
A:
I
hope
so.
Thank
you.
第二部分
综合能力提升
六、完形填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
My
best
friend
I
have
a
good
friend
at
school.
Her
name
is
Liu
Wei.
She’s
fifteen
years
old.
She
is
a
beautiful
girl
1
a
pair
of
bright
eyes
and
long
black
hair.
In
some
ways
we
look
the
same,
2
some
students
say
we
are
twins.
In
our
class,
all
her
subjects
are
not
good.
But
she
works
hard
all
the
time.
Now
she
is
doing
3
than
before.
I
hope
she
can
make
great
progress
(取得很大的进步).
I
often
go
to
her
house.
4
many
kinds
of
books
and
magazines
on
her
bookshelf.
She
likes
5
.
Her
Chinese
is
6
of
all
in
our
class.
She
often
helps
me
with
Chinese.
Liu
Wei
is
an
active
girl.
She’s
a
little
7
than
me.
She
likes
ball
games
very
much.
She
is
8
badminton.
But
I’m
9
better
than
her
at
ping-pong.
We
often
play
games
together
after
class.
Liu
Wei
lives
in
a
happy
family.
Her
parents
10
teachers.
She
is
a
good
child
at
home.
She
often
helps
her
parents
with
their
housework.
Her
father
and
mother
love
her
very
much.
This
is
my
best
friend—Liu
Wei.
1.
A.
and
B.
with
C.
have
D.
has
2.
A.
because
B.
so
C.
however
D.
but
3.
A.
good
B.
well
C.
better
D.
best
4.
A.
There
have
B.
There
has
C.
There
is
D.
There
are
5.
A.
read
B.
reading
C.
reads
D.
to
reading
6.
A.
the
best
B.
best
C.
better
D.
good
7.
A.
outgoing
B.
much
outgoing
C.
more
outgoing
D.
outgoing
8.
A.
good
at
B.
well
at
C.
good
in
D.
bad
at
9.
A.
much
B.
more
C.
many
D.
lot
10.
A.
both
are
B.
are
both
C.
are
all
D.
all
are
七、阅读理解（共10分，每小题1分）。
A
Different
countries
have
different
customs(风俗).
Take
New
Year
for
example,
at
12
o’clock
in
Spain,
you
must
eat
2
grapes,
one
for
each
chime(钟声)
of
the
clock.
This
will
bring
you
good
luck
for
the
year.
Below,
let’s
have
a
look
at
some
interesting
things
in
three
different
countries:
Greece
◇If
you
give
someone
a
present,
you
must
try
to
put
some
coins
in
it.
The
means
more
money
will
come.
◇You
mustn’t
pass
someone
a
knife.
You
should
put
it
down
and
let
the
other
person
pick
it
up.
◇If
you
pass
it
somebody,
you
will
get
into
a
fight(吵架)
with
that
person.
The
UK
◇If
you
see
a
black
cat,
then
you’ll
get
good
luck.
You
can
often
see
black
cats
on
birthday
cards
and
“Good
Luck”
cards.
◇If
you
see
a
leaf
falling
in
autumn,
you
must
try
to
catch
it.
You
will
have
a
lucky
year
for
every
leaf
you
catch.
◇You
mustn’t
open
your
umbrella
inside
the
house
or
put
new
shoes
on
a
table.
Thailand
◇It’s
good
luck
to
dream
about
a
snake
holding
you.
◇Kids
can’t
eat
chicken’s
feet.
If
they
do,
it
may
give
them
bad
handwriting!
◇During
a
meal,
you
should
never
start
eating
before
people
who
are
older
than
you.
根据短文内容，选择最佳答案。
1.
People
in
______
eat
12
grapes
for
good
luck
in
the
new
year.
A.
the
UK
B.
Greece
C.
Spain
D.
The
USA
2.
What
should
you
put
in
it
if
you
give
someone
a
present
in
Greece
A.
Some
candles.
B.
Some
coins.
C.
Some
toys.
D.
Some
food.
3.
If
you
pass
someone
a
knife
in
Greece,
you
may
______
with
that
person.
A.
have
a
fight
B.
make
friends
C.
make
peace
D.
put
down
4.
Which
one
is
the
best
choice(选择)
if
you
want
to
send
a
card
to
your
English
friend
Good
LuckA
Good
LuckB
Good
LuckC
Good
LuckD
5.
According
to(根据)
the
passage
you
shouldn’t
______.
A.
open
your
umbrella
outside
the
house
in
the
UK
B.
catch
the
falling
leaves
in
autumn
in
the
UK
C.
let
the
other
person
pick
up
the
knife.
D.
start
to
eat
before
the
older
than
you
during
a
meal
in
Thailand
B
The
following
diagram
shows(图表显示)
the
library
attendance
in
a
school
from
September
to
January.
根据图表内容，选择最佳答案。
6.
The
diagram
shows
the
students’
______
attendance.
A.
library
B.
theatre
C.
lab
D.
school
7.
About
______
the
students
went
to
the
library
in
September.
A.
25
B.
150
C
225
D.
375
8.
There
are
the
most
students
going
to
the
library
in
______.
A.
October
B.
February
C.
March
D.
June
9.
The
______
number
of
students
go
to
the
library
in
September
and
July.
A.
big
B.
biggest
C.
small
D.
smallest
10.
Which
of
the
following
sentences
is
RIGHT
A.
There
are
more
students
in
November
than
in
December.
B.
There
are
more
students
in
December
than
in
January.
C.
There
are
more
students
in
March
than
in
April.
D.
There
are
more
students
in
May,
than
in
June.
八、书面表达（15分）
Bitty第一次在中国过中秋节。请根据所给图画提示，写一篇日记。日记的格式和第一句话已给出。
要求：1.条理清楚，书写规范，语句通顺；
2.字数；80词左右。
Oct.8,
Monday
　　　　
Clear
Today
is
the
Chinese
Mid-autumn
Festival.
______________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
第三部分
课标新题探究
九、短文填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
根据短文内容及所给首字母提示写出单词补全段文。
THAILAND
You
won’t
find
a
m
1
beautiful
holiday
destination(目的地)
than
Thailand.
F
2
the
famous
beaches
of
Phuket
to
the
lively
c
3
Bangkok,
this
country
is
full
of
history
and
has
lots
to
offer
the
holidaymaker(度假者).
　　◆Beaches
Patong
is
famous
for
its
long
sandy
b
4
and
water
sports.
The
bay(海湾)
is
4
k
5
long
with
pure
white
sand
and
is
lined
with
hotels,
holiday
homes,
shops
and
restaurants.
If
you
are
looking
for
a
lively
h
6
,
look
no
further.
◇Koh
Phi
Phi
The
two
beautiful
i
7
of
Phi
Phi
Don
and
Phi
Phi
Ley
are
important
parts
of
any
visit
to
Thailand.
Go
for
the
scenery
and
the
water
s
8
,
such
as
diving.
◇Shopping
If
you
like
s
9
,
you
will
be
in
heaven
in
Phuket!
From
open
air
markets,
street
sellers
and
small
shops
to
Western
type
department
stores
and
designer
shops,
e
10
is
here
for
you.
Typical
local
buys
are
clothes,
jewellery(珠宝),
and
leather
handbags.
Bangkok
has
all
the
shops
you
would
expect
from
a
busy
modern
capital
city.
阅读小贴士Thailand　泰国　　Phuket　普吉岛Bangkok
曼谷　　Koh
Phi
Phi
　PP岛，位于普吉岛东南边的喀比省内
1.
________
2.
________
3.
________
4.
________
5.
________
6.
________
7.
________
8.
________
9.
________
10.
________
十、任务阅读（共10分，每小题1分）。
Last
week
I
had
a
pretty
good
vacation
with
my
family.
We
had
great
fun
playing
in
different
places.
On
Monday,
the
weather
was
sunny
and
hot.
We
went
to
White
Beach
and
swam
in
the
water.
On
Tuesday,
it
was
cloudy
and
humid.
We
visited
two
museums
in
Central
Park.
We
saw
a
lot
of
old
things.
On
Wednesday
and
Thursday,
it
was
rainy
and
windy.
We
walked
in
the
city.
We
bought
some
interesting
things
and
ate
some
delicious
food.
On
Friday,
the
weather
was
cool.
We
went
hiking
in
the
mountains.
We
were
very
tired
but
felt
very
happy.
I
really
enjoyed
my
vacation.
根据短文内容完成下列表格。
When
Where
What
was
the
weather
like
What
did
they
do
Monday
White
Beach
_______(1)
Swam
in
the
water
Tuesday
______(2)
cloudy
and
humid
_______(3)
Wednesday
and
Thursday
city
_______(4)
Bought
some
interesting
things
and
ate
some
delicious
food
Friday
mountains
cool
______(5)
【答案】
一、1.anyway
2.greeting
3.tradition
4.few
5.wives
6.comtable
7.Spring
8.question
9.about
10.visitors
11.work
12.decorations
13.sweeps
away
14.go
shopping
15.No
one
二、1-5
ABACA
6-10
BBABD
11-15
CBABA
三、1.Shall
we／Will
you
2.How
are
3.What,
do
4.is
coming
5.don’t,
will
四、1.Look
at
2.getting
ready
for
3.to
go
sightseeing
4.will
send;
by
email
5.more
relaxing
than
running
五、1-5
BDAFC
6.What
are
you
going
to
do
7.What
time
is
it
going
to
be
8.Would
you
like
to
go
with
me
9.Who
are
you
going
to
play
with
10.Where
are
you
going
to
have
the
match
六、1-5
BBCDB
6-10
ACAAB
七、1-5
CBABD
6-10
AADDB
PAGE
16考点聚焦
一、要点梳理
必考词汇
◆1.
towards
towards是介词，意为“往，向；朝……方向”。例如：
They
drove
toward
the
beach.
他们驾车朝海滩开去。
I
saw
her
walking
towards
the
bank.
我看到她朝银行走去。
【拓展】
介词to
⑴
(表示时间)到,
直到,
在…到来之前,
离…
He
wrote
from
morning
to
night.
他从早到晚写东西。
⑵
(表示方向)朝,
往,
通向
He
turned
to
his
companion
before
he
replied.
他转身朝向他的伙伴然后回答。
⑶
(表示状态)紧贴着,
紧靠着,
对着
The
two
lovers
danced
cheek
to
cheek.
那对情侣脸贴着脸跳舞。
⑷
(表示对象)对,
对于,
对…来说
What
will
Doris
say
to
it
对此事多丽丝将怎么说呢
⑸
(表示方位)在…方向[方位],
处于…顺序
Scotland
is
to
the
north
of
England.
苏格兰在英格兰之北。
【链接中考】
（吉林省通化市，VI，5）
在下列各句的空白处填入一个适当的词，使句子意思完整、语法正确。
26.When
I
saw
him,
he
was
walking
________his
school.
【答案】26.towards
◆2.
though
⑴
though和although两都可用来引导让步状语从句，表示汉语的“虽然……但是……”。但不能说although
/
though...but...。如：不能说：Although
/
Though
he
is
very
old,
but
he
is
still
quite
strong.
句中的but
应去掉。
⑵
although是较为正式的用语，引导的从句多位于主句前，though多用于非正式文体中，引导的从句位于主句前后都可。例如：
He
often
helps
me
with
my
English
(al)though
he
is
quite
busy.
尽管他相当忙，但是还常常帮我学英语。
It’s
quite
pleasant
today,
though
the
wind
is
rather
cool.
尽管风有点凉,
今天天气还是很不错的。
⑶
though可与别的词结合使用，如even
though,
as
though等；although则无这种搭配功能。例如：
I’ll
go
and
help
them
even
though
I
stop
my
work.
即使我停下自己的活不干，我也要去帮助他们。
⑷
though还可作并列连词，相当于and
yet（然而，可是），它引导的分句常对另一分句起补充说明作用；although则无这种用法。例如：
I
wouldn’t
like
to
go
to
the
evening,
though
they
will
invite
me
to.
我不想去参加晚会，可是他们要请我去。
【链接中考】
(江苏省宿迁市)
1.
______
they
are
twin
brothers,
they
don’t
look
like
each
other.
A.
Though
B.
Since
C.
However
D.
When
【答案】A
（吉林省通化市）
2.
—
What
is
our
head
teacher
like,
do
you
know
—
Oh,
he
is
very
kind
______
he
looks
very
serious.
A.
because
B.
though
C.
if
D.
when
【答案】B
◆3.
neither
⑴
neither用作形容词，意为“两者都不……”，修饰单数名词。
Neither
girl
is
from
Japan.
这两个女孩都不是来自日本。
●neither后接单数名词，谓语动词用单数形式。
⑵
neither用作代词，意为“两者都不……”，用作主语时，常被视作单数。
Neither
of
the
two
boys
has
passed
the
math
exam.
两个男孩子中没有一个数学考试及格的。
●neither用作代词时，可以和of连用，neither
of后接复数名词或代词，谓语动词用单数形式。
⑶
neither用作连词，常与nor连用，构成neither…nor…结构，意为“既不……，也不……”。运用时neither，nor后须接同类的词或短语。当它们连接主语时，谓语动词须与nor后的名词一致。
Neither
you
nor
I
am
wrong.
你和我都没错。
⑷
neither用作副词。表示“（两者）都不，也不”。neither置于句首时，须用倒装句。
He
isn’t
a
worker,
neither
am
I.
他不是工人，我也不是。
【拓展】
Neither
do
I.
我也不。（Neither开头的否定式倒装句）
　　　So
do
I.
我也是如此。（So开头的肯定式倒装句）
You
don’t
like
this
book.
Neither
do
I.
你不喜欢这本书,
我也不喜欢。
I
can
speak
English
well.
So
can
I.
他能讲一口好英语，我也能（讲）。
【链接中考】
（湖北省荆门市）
1.
—
Which
of
the
two
T-shirts
do
you
prefer
—
▲
is
OK.
I
don’t
like
their
styles.
A.
Either
B.
Neither
C.
Both
D.
All
【答案】B
（四川省自贡市）
2.
—
Would
you
like
to
go
to
the
concert
with
me
tonight
—
I’d
love
to,
but
_______
of
us
couple
has
tickets.
Do
you
have
some
A.
both
B.
neither
C.
none
【答案】B
◆4.
suppose
◇
suppose做及物动词，意为“想，认为，猜想，料想”，用法如下：
　　⑴
suppose后接that引导的宾语从句，that可以省略，例如：
　　I
suppose
we’ll
go
there
next
week.
我猜想我们下周将去那儿。
　　⑵
suppose+名词/代词+不定式，例如：
　　I
supposed
her
to
have
already
left
for
home.
我认为她已经动身回家了。
　　⑶
suppose+名词/代词+名词（宾语补足语），例如：
　　I
never
supposed
him
a
hero.
我从来没有认为他是一个英雄。
　
⑷
suppose做插入语，例如：
　　You
don’t
mind
my
smoking,
I
suppose.
我想你不会介意我抽烟。
◇
suppose作“假定，设想”讲，有时表示自己有一定根据的猜想，有时仅表述自己的意见。例如：
　　Suppose
it
rained,
we
would
still
go.
假如下雨的话，我们还是要去。
『常用句型』
be
supposed
to
do
sth.
be
supposed
to
do
sth.意思是“应该做某事、被期望做某事”，在否定句中be
not
supposed
to
do
sth.
表示命令和禁止，意思是“不准做某事”。例如：
We
are
supposed
to
be
here
at
six.
我们应该6点到达这里。
We
are
not
supposed
to
play
football
on
Sundays.不准我们在星期日踢足球。
【拓展】suppose和guess
都可以表示“料想，猜想”，但用法不尽相同。
◇suppose着重以试探的方法提出建议或意见，使之被人接受。主要用于口语，表示主
语根据自己的知识或经验来“猜想”，也可表示无把握的“料想”。例如：
I
suppose
you
are
right.
我想你说得对。
◇guess指缺乏任何依据的资料而凭主观想像的武断。例如：
Just
guess
what
is
in
the
bag.猜猜看包里面是什么东西
【链接中考】
（湖北省黄冈市）
1.
The
students
ought
to
wear
school
uniforms
when
they’re
at
school.
A.
are
supposed
to
B.
are
allowed
to
C.
would
like
to
D.
love
to
【答案】A
（甘肃省兰州市）
2.
—
May
we
leave
the
classroom
now
—
No,
you
______.
You
______
to
leave
until
the
bell
rings.
A.
mustn’t,
are
allowed
B.
don’t
have
to,
are
supposed
C.
needn’t,
aren’t
allowed
D.
can’t,
aren’t
supposed
【答案】D
◆5.
succeed
succeed动词，意为“成功，办成”。例如：
At
last
he
succeeded
in
solving
the
problem.他终于把那个问题解决了。
He
has
succeeded
at
his
plan.
他的计划大功告成了。
◇反义词:
fail
『辨析活用』succeed,
success和successful
⑴
succeed
表示“成功”，是不及物动词，因此不能用于被动语态。succeed
后通常不接不定式，而接
in
doing
sth。又如：
He
succeeded
in
getting
the
job.
他谋到了那份工作。
She
succeeded
in
(passing)
the
exam.
她考试及格了。
⑵
success
表示抽象意义的“成功”，是不可数的；表示具体意
义的“成功的人或事”,
则是可数的。比较：
His
new
book
was
a
great
success.他新出版的书获得了巨大成功。
He
has
had
great
success
in
business.他事业上很成功。
⑶
successful是形容词，意为“成功的；如愿以偿的；达到目的；有成就的”。例如：
She
is
a
successful
businesswoman.
她是一位很成功的女实业家。
The
meeting
was
successful.
会议开得很成功。
He
was
successful
in
his
studies.
他在学业上很成功。
【链接中考】
（甘肃省兰州市，八，5）
A)
读句子，根据汉语提示补全单词。
90.
So
far,
we’ve
______(成功)
in
saving
thousands
of
people
in
danger.
【答案】90.succeeded
（湖北省宜昌市）
—
All of us are proud of
the progress he’s made during the
past
few years.
—
Yes, we’re sure he will be
even
_______.
A.
successful
B.
more
successful
C.
most
successful
D.
successfully
常考短语
◆1.
either…or…
either…or…“或者……或者”，“不是……就是……”。用来连接两个并列的成分，可以连接两个介词短语、或连接两个动词，或连接两个名词。当连接两个主语时，谓语的动词形式要和靠近的主语保持一致，either…or…的否定形式是neither…nor…。
Either
Lily
or
Lucy
may
go
with
you
because
one
of
them
must
stay
at
home.
要么莉莉，要么玛丽跟你去，因为她们必须有一个留在家里。
【链接中考】
（山东烟台市）
1.
Mr.
Black
comes
from
America,
and
he
has
studied
Chinese
in
China
for
5
years.
So
you
can
talk
with
him
_______.
A.
either
in
English
or
in
Chinese　　
B.
not
in
Chinese
but
in
English
C.
just
in
English,
not
in
Chinese　　
D.
neither
in
Chinese
nor
in
English
（山东德州市）
2.
Either
Eve
or
Herb
_________
been
invited
by
Lucy’s
parents
already.
A.
have
B.
has
C.
was
D.
were
【答案】B
◆2.
in
order
to
in
order
to后面直接跟动词原形，意思是“为了...,
以便...”。例如：
In
order
to
earn
enough
money,
he
worked
late
into
the
night.
为了赚到足够的钱,
他工作到深夜。
We
started
early
in
order
to
arrive
before
dark.
为了在天黑前到达,我们很早就动身了。
『辨析活用』in
order
to和so
as
to
⑴
in
order
to和so
as
to意为“为的是，为了”。它们的英语功能也是一样的，都可以用来引导目的状语。它们的不同之处就在于so
as
to
不能用于句子的开头。
⑵
in
order
to一般用in
order
that加从句来替换；而so
as
to一般用so
that加从句来替换。in
order
that可以在句首，so
that和so
as
to
一样不能在句首。
⑶
当这两个短语后的不定式动词的逻辑主语和句子的主语一致时，“in
order
to
,
so
as
to
+不定式”可以简化为“不定式”
In
order
to
get
to
school
on
time,
he
got
up
earlier.这个句子可以表达为下列几种方式：
In
order
that
he
could
get
to
school
on
time,
....
He
got
up
earlier
in
order
to
get
to
school
on
time.
He
got
up
earlier
in
order
that
he
could
get
to
school
on
time.
He
got
up
earlier
so
as
to
get
to
school
on
time.
He
got
up
earlier
so
that
he
could
get
to
school
on
time.
To
get
to
school
on
time,
he
got
up
earlier.（这种不定式有时可以表示目的以外的状语）
【链接中考】
（新疆省阜康市）
1.
He
ran
very
fast
______
he
could
catch
up
with
others.
A.
in
order
that
B.
in
order
to
C.
so
as
to
D.
in
order
【答案】A
(乐山市)
2.
In
order_______
the
world
a
friendly
place.
We
must
show
a
friendly
face.
A.
makes
B.
making
C.
to
make
D.
make
【答案】C
经典句型
◆1.
If
I
pass
my
exams
next
year,
I’ll
stay
here
until
I’m
18.
◇
until用作介词
⑴
直到……为止（与持续性动词连用，表示动作、状态的继续）
I
shall
wait
until
Monday.
我将等到星期一。
【注意】until与till可替换，until比较正式，且句首较常用until。
⑵
直到……才；在……之前（用于否定句，常与瞬间动词连用）
They
didn’t
leave
here
until
the
next
day.
他们直到第二天才离开这里。
◇until用作连词
⑴
直到……为止（表示动作状态的继续）
We’ll
wait
for
you
until
you
come
back.我们将一直等到你回来。
⑵
直到……才（用于否定句）
I
didn’t
go
to
bed
until
my
father
got
home.
直到爸爸到家我才睡觉。
【链接中考】
（天津市）
We
won’t
start
the
meeting
______our
teacher
arrives.
A.
though
B.
until
C.
while
D.
or
【答案】B
◆2.
…
but
no
one
is
learning
Chinese…yet!
no
one用来指人，不能接短语，当它作主语时，谓语动词用单数。例如：
No
one
lived
here.
没有人住在这里。
『辨析活用』
◇
none不仅指人也可指物，其后常接of短语，构成“none
of+名词/代词”结构，当名词或代词为复数时，谓语动词用单复数均可。例如：
I
met
many
people,
but
there
was
none
I
know.
我遇到许多人，但没有一人认识。（指人，并是单数。）
◇
回答how
many／how
much引起的问句用none；回答who引起的问句用no
one。
none这个代词既可代表人又可代表物，而且既可用作复数又可用作单数；no
one这个复合代词只能代表人不能代表物，而且只能作单数使用不能作复数使用。
【链接中考】
（山东省滨州市，八，5）
将下列汉语句子译成英语，英语句子译成地道的汉语。
93.没有人知道将来会发生什么事。
______________________________________
【答案】93.
No
one
knows
what
will
happen
in
the
future.
◆3.
Today
it’s
normal
for
married
women
to
go
out
to
work,
…
It’s…
for
sb.
to
do
sth.是一个很常用的句型，意思是“对某人来说做某事……”。It是形式主语，动词不定式短语to
…是真正的主语。
◇如果作主语用的不定式短语太长，则通常采用本句型。将引导词it置于句首，而将真正的主语置于句尾，以避免“头重脚轻”的现象。
◇用不定式复合结构作真正的主语时，介词for后面的宾语可看作是后面动词不定式的逻辑主语
。例如：
It
is
important
for
us
to
learn
English
well.对于我们来说学好英语很重要。
◇在本句型中，不定式复合结构通常是“for
sb.
to
do
sth.”但也有用“of
sb.
to
do
sth.”，此时则表示对某人做某事的称赞或责备。例如：
It’s
kind
of
you
to
invite
me
to
the
party.你太好了邀请我参加这个晚会。
【链接中考】
（湖南省娄底市）
1.
—
It’s
very
important
______
us
to
make
a
plan
before
a
new
term.
—
Yes.
You
must
try
to
make
it
carefully.
A.
of
B.
for C.
to
【答案】B
(江苏省宿迁市)
2.
It’s
nice
______
Andy
______
me
with
my
English
study.
A.
at;
to
help
B.
of;
to
help
C.
with;
help
D.
of;
help
【答案】B
◆4.
We
weren’t
very
rich,
but
we
were
happy.
but一词在英语教材中复现率极高，用法也颇为复杂，现总结如下：
表示转折的并列连词有but（但是）
⑴
用作连词，表示转折，意为“但是”，“可是”，“而且”。例如：
English
may
be
hard,
but
it
is
the
most
important
of
all.
英语虽然很难，但却是最重要的。
⑵
用作副词，意为
“仅仅”“只是”，(=only)，例如：
You
have
but
choices—follow
me
or
refuse
me.
你只有两个选择，要么听我的，要么拒绝我。
⑶
用作介词，意为“除了”（多和不定代词连用）。例如：
They
are
all
wrong
but
her/she.除了她以外，他们都错了。
You
can
find
that
kind
of
thing
nowhere
but
in
England.
这种东西只能在英国找到。
【固定搭配】
not…but
“不是…而是…”
not
only…but
also
“不但…而且…”
cannot
help
but
“不得不”，后接动词原形
【链接中考】
(年上海市)
1.
Money
is
important,
_______
it
can’t
buy
everything.
A.
for
B.
but
C.
or
D.
so
【答案】B
（北京市）
2.
—
Would
you
like
to
go
to
the
concert
with
me
—
I’d
love
to,
______
I’m
afraid
I
have
no
time.
A.
so
B.
or
C.
and
D.
but
【答案】D
◆5.
Many
people
even
prefer
them
to
cheaper
clothes.
prefer作及物动词使用，通常意思是“更喜欢，宁愿”。
⑴
prefer+名词/
动名词/
不定式。例如：
I
prefer
some
apples.
/
I
prefer
having(to
have)
some
apples.我更喜欢吃苹果。
⑵
prefer
somebody
to
do
something
宁愿某人做某事。例如：
My
daddy
prefers
me
not
to
swim
in
that
river
because
it’s
too
dangerous.
我爸爸宁愿我不要去那条河里游泳因为那太危险了。
⑶
prefer
A
to
B
在A和B中更喜欢A。例如：
I
prefer
green
tea
to
coffee.
绿茶和咖啡比较起来我更喜欢绿茶。
I
prefer
cooking
myself
to
eating
out.
我宁愿自己做饭也不愿出去吃。
【注意】这个用法中肯定的是前者，A和B必须在形式上保持一致，即要么都是名词，要么都是动名词。没有使用不定式的用法。
⑷
prefer
to
do
something
rather
than
...
这个用法类似于用法⑶，不过rather
than后面可以是不定式、名词、动名词或动词原形。
例如：
I
prefer
to
stay
at
home
rather
than
go
out
in
the
heavy
rain.
我宁愿呆在家里也不想冒这么大的雨出去。
【注意】这里rather
than后面可以用going
out或to
go
out都可以。而且rather
than也可以放在句子开头：Rather
than
go
out
in
the
heavy
rain,
I
prefer
to
stay
at
home.
⑸
宾语从句prefer
that
宾语从句中常用虚拟语气。例如：
I
prefer
that
we
should
gather
more
information
on
that
issue.
我觉得关于那个事情我们最好收集更多信息。
【链接中考】
（四川省巴中市）
1.
They
preferred
______
rather
than
______
a
bike.
A.
to
walk;
to
ride
B.
walking;
riding
C.
to
walk;
ride
【答案】C
（山东省泰安市）
2.
—
How
about
going
shopping
this
weekend,
Peter
—
Sorry.
I
prefer
______
rather
than
______.
A.
to
stay
at
home,
go
out
B.
to
go
out,
stay
at
home
C.
staying
at
home,
go
out
D.
going
out,
stay
at
home
【答案】A
◆6.
Can
I
help
you
这是口语中一句极为常用的句子（也说What
can
I
do
for
you 或May
I
help
you 等），广泛用于商店、饭店、旅馆、邮局、办事处等场所，作为对顾客的招呼语。其本义是：要我帮忙吗？我可以帮你吗？我能替你做点什么吗？但具体含义要视场合而定。
例如：
①—
Can
I
help
you？你要买点什么？
—
Thank
you.
I
want
some
bananas,
please.
谢谢，我买点香蕉。
②—
What
can
I
do
for
you,
madam？夫人，你要买点什么？
—
I’m
looking
for
a
dress
for
my
daughter.
我想想为女儿买件连衣裙。
③—
Can
I
help
yon,
sir？先生，要吃点什么吗？
—
Just
a
cup
of
tea
and
two
eggs，
please.
只要一杯茶和两只鸡蛋。
④—
What
can
I
do
for
you？你要邮寄什么？
—
I’d
like
to
send
this
parcel
to
Beijing.
我要把这个包寄到北京去。
⑤—
Good
evening，sir.
Welcome
to
the
Friendship
Hotel.
What
can
I
do
for
you？
晚上好，先生。欢迎到友谊宾馆来，要住宿吗？
—
Thanks.
Have
you
got
a
single
room
tonight？
谢谢，今晚有单人房间吗？
【链接中考】
（重庆市课改实验区）
—
_______
—
Yes,
I
want
to
buy
some
flowers
for
my
mom.
A.
Can
I
help
you
B.
Can
you
help
me
C.
Are
you
OK
D.
Do
you
like
it
【答案】A
◆7.
I
saw
a
baby
bear
playing
with
some
sticks
and
stones.
◇“see
sb.
doing
sth.”表示看到某人正在做某事，强调“看见某人正在做某事”。
在这个句型中doing是现在分词，在句子中作宾语sb.的补足语，和宾语一起构成复合宾语，一般表示正在进行的动作或者和谓语动词的动作同时发生。例如：
Can’t
you
see
them
playing
football
难到你没看见他们在踢足球吗
◇
能用于这种句型的动词还有feel，hear，watch，notice等
。这类动词后的宾语补足语也可以是不带to的动词不定式。例如：
A
woman
saw
it
happen
when
she
was
walking
past.一位妇女经过的时候,看到了事情发生的过程。
◇
用现在分词作宾补和用不带to的不定式作宾补，在意思上也常有区别：前者表示正在进行的部分动作，而后者则表示已经完成的全部动作。试比较：
I
saw
the
train
coming
into
the
station.我看见火车正在进站。
I
saw
the
train
come
into
the
station.我看见了火车进站。
【链接中考】
（四川省成都市）
1.
—
Where’s
your
brother
now,
Bob
—
I
saw
him
______
in
the
street
a
moment
ago
and
I
told
him
_______.
A.
playing;
don’t
do
so
B.
playing;
not
to
so
C.
play;
to
do
so
【答案】B
(浙江绍兴市)
2.
—
Is
Jack
in
the
library
—
Maybe.
I
saw
him
______
out
with
some
books
just
now.

A.
going
B.
go
C.
to
go
D.
went
【答案】B
◆8.
…why
we
shouldn’t
keep
all
the
lights
in
our
house
on
all
night.
⑴
keep用作及物动词，意为“保存；保留；保持；照顾；养活”。例如：
I’ll
keep
a
seat
for
you.我给你留个座位。
Can
you
keep
a
secret
你能保守秘密吗？
She
kept
her
sister
for
a
week
while
her
sister
was
ill.她妹妹有病时，她照看她了一个星期。
⑵
keep+宾语+补足语
“keep+宾语+补足语”意为“使……保持某种(状态、位置或动作等)”。其中宾语补足语通常由形容词、副词、介词短语、现在分词和过去分词等充当。例如：
We
should
keep
our
classroom
clean
and
tidy.(形容词)我们应保持教室整洁干净。
You’d
better
keep
the
child
away
from
the
fire.(副词)你最好让孩子离火远一点。
The
bad
weather
keeps
us
inside
the
house.(介词短语)坏天气使我们不能出门。
Don’t
keep
me
waiting
for
long.(现在分词)别让我等太久。
⑶
keep＋表语
“keep＋表语”意为“保持，继续(处于某种状态)”。其中表语可用形容词、副词、介词短语等充当。例如：
You
must
look
after
yourself
and
keep
healthy.(形容词)你必须照顾好自己，保持身体健康。
Traffic
in
Britain
keeps
to
the
left.(介词短语)英国的交通是靠左边行驶的。
⑷与介词或副词搭配，构成动词短语：
①
keep
away意为“(使)离开；(使)不接近”，其后常接介词from。
Would
you
keep
your
dog
away
from
my
boy,
please
请把狗拉得离我孩子远点好吗？
②
keep
back意为“阻止；留在后面”。
She
sat
down
quietly,
but
she
couldn’t
keep
back
her
tears.
她静静地坐下来，却忍不住流下了眼泪。
③
keep
together意为“在一起；动作协调”。如：
Keep
together,
please.请聚在一起。
④
keep
up意为“持续；使不低落”。
The
noise
kept
up
all
night.噪音整夜持续着。
⑤
keep
up
with意为“跟上；和……来往”。
I'm
trying
my
best
to
keep
up
with
the
others
in
class.我正在设法赶上班里的其他人。
⑸含keep的常用句型：
①
keep
doing
sth.
意为“继续干某事”，表示不间断地持续干某事，keep后不能接不定式或表示静止状态的v-ing形式，而必须接延续性的动词。
Keep
passing
the
ball
to
each
other,
and
you’ll
be
OK.坚持互相传球，你们就行。
②
keep
on
doing
sth.
意为“持续做某事”。
The
pupil
kept
on
asking
me
the
same
question.这个学生不断地问我同一个问题。
③
keep...from
doing
sth.意为“阻止/防止……做某事”。
The
heavy
snow
kept
us
from
going
out.大雪使我们不能出去。
【链接中考】
(江苏省宿迁市)
1.
You
can’t
sneeze
and
keep
your
eyes
______
at
the
same
time.
A.
open
B.
opens
C.
opened
D.
opening
【答案】A
（四川省成都市）
2.
Medicine
is
dangerous
for
children,
so
it
should
be
kept
away
______
them.
A.
by
B.
to
C.
from
【答案】C
（台湾省）
3.
I
put
the
fish
in
the
ice
box
to
keep
it
　　　.
(A)
fresh
(B)
full
(C)
new
(D)
young
【答案】A
（江苏省镇江市）
4.
Mr.
Brown
always
makes
his
class
_______
and
keeps
his
students
_______
in
class.
A.
alive;
interesting
B.
lively;
interesting
C.
alive;
interested
D.
lively;
interested
【答案】D
二、知识全练
第一部分
基础知识运用
一、词汇。（共15分，每小题1分）
A)根据括号中所给的汉语写出单词，使句子意思完整正确。
1.
Can
you
tell
me
the
______(起飞)
time
2.
He
stood
within
five
______(步)
of
me
and
didn’t
say
anything.
3.
His
mother
was
worried
about
the
______(安全)
of
him.
4.
At
times
he
would
be
______(缺席的)
for
a
couple
of
days.
5.
His
father
is
a
______(地理)
teacher
in
this
school.
6.
John
is
going
to
study
______(医学),
but
her
parents
want
her
to
be
a
teacher.
7.
We
shall
come
tomorrow
if
nothing
______(阻止).
8.
His
great
height
______(适合)
him
to
play
basketball.
9.
As
everybody
knows,
Switzerland
is
a
______(和平的)
country.
10.
He
made
the
______(建议)
that
we
would
have
a
picnic
next
Sunday.
B)从方框里选出适当的词语，并用其正确形式填空。
get
off,
fall
off,
fall
asleep,
show
off,
have
on
11.
The
soft
music
caused
us
to
__________.
12.
Mary
__________
her
new
dress
and
looks
very
beautiful.
13.
When
you
are
learning
to
ride
a
bicycle,
you
often
__________.
14.
Don’t
________
until
the
bus
stops.
15.
Everyone
doesn’t
like
him
because
he
likes
to
show
off
his
abilities.
二、选择填空（共15分，每小题1分）。
1.
—
How
nice
the
music
sounds!
—
It
does!
The
peaceful
music
will
make
you
feel
_______.
A.
excited
B.
bored
C.
moved
D.
relaxed
2.
—
How
does
your
mother
go
to
the
supermarket
—
______.
A.
By
bus
B.
In
boat
C.
On
bus
D.
By
her
bike
3.
—
Can
you
see
Jim
—
He
was
driving
______
the
hospital.
A.
for
B.
up
C.
to
D.
towards
4.
—
Which
do
you
like
better,
skating
or
skiing
—
______
of
them.
I
like
running.
A.
All
B.
Both
C.
Either
D.
Neither
5.
—
Why
was
Mrs.
Smith
angry
with
Jack
—
Because
he
worked
______
than
the
others.
A.
more
carefully
B.
worse
C.
better
D.
more
clearly
6.
—
Excuse
me.
Where
is
the
Hualian
Hotel
—
Take
a
No.
5
bus
and
_____
at
the
second
stop.
A.
get
on
B.
get
up
C.
get
off
D.
get
to
7.
—
Would
you
like
______
—
No,
thank
you.
I'm
full.
A.
something
B.
anything
C.
some
more
D.
a
little
8.
—
I
think
English
is
_____
than
math.
—
Why
do
you
think
_____
A.
much
easier;
that
B.
much
more
easy;
so
C.
much
easier;
so
D.
more
easier;
that
9.
—
I
like
the
party
so
much,
but
I
_____
go
home.
It’s
too
late.
—
What
a
pity!
A.
mustn’t
B.
have
to
C.
may
D.
can’t
10.—
What
are
you
going
to
do
this
weekend
—
I’m
not
sure.
______
I
will
go
fishing
with
my
parents.
A.
I
know
B.
Of
course
C.
Maybe
D.
May
be
11.—
Did
you
have
breakfast
this
morning
—
No.
I
got
up
late
and
went
to
school
_____
breakfast.
A.
for
B.
in
C.
without
D.
after
12.None
of
the
shoes
in
the
shop
fit
me
well.
They
are
____
too
big
____
too
small.
A.
both;
and
B.
either;
or
C.
neither;
nor
D.
not
only;
but
also
13.－Our
family
are
traveling
to
Germany
for
the
Beer
Festival.
－______
A.
Congratulations!
B.
See
you
later!
C.
Have
a
great
time!
D.
Take
care!
14.—
I
don’t
think
teenagers
should
drive
cars.
—
______.
They
aren’t
serious
enough.
A.
I
agree
B.
I
don’t
agree
C.
I
think
D.
I
don’t
think
15.—
Shall
we
go
skating
tomorrow
—
_______.
A.
You’re
all
right
B.
It’s
very
kind
of
you
C.
You
are
right
D.
That’s
a
good
idea
三、根据汉语完成下列句子，每空一词。（共10分，每小题2分）。
1.我猜想他们会预防疾病的。
I
________
they
will
_____________________.
2.我的大姐三年前结的婚。
My
___________
sister
_________________
three
years
ago.
3.我们应该早点出发，以便准时到达那里。
　We
should
__________________________.
4.要想成为一名成功歌手，贝蒂还有很长的路要走。
　Betty
has
still
_____________________
before
she
becomes
a
successful
singer.
5.请尽快回信。
　Please
______________________________.
四、完成对话。（共15分，每小题1分）。
A)根据对话内容，从方框中选择恰当的句子补全对话，其中两项为多余选项。
A:
You
are
so
excited
about
leaving
for
Japan
tomorrow,
Dan!
B:
Yeah,
I
am.
But
I’m
a
little
nervous,
too.
A:
1
B:
Well,
for
one
thing,
I
don’t
know
how
to
use
chopsticks
very
well,
and
I
don’t
know
how
to
behave
at
the
dinner
table.
A:
Oh,
I
see.
2
B:
Really
That
would
be
great!
A:
Let
me
see.
One
difference
is
that
sometimes
it’s
polite
to
make
noise
when
you’re
eating,
especially
when
you’re
eating
noodles.
3
B:
Really
4
But
in
the
United
States
you
can’t
do
that.
A:
Yeah,
I
know.
OK,
so
here
are
some
chopstick
rules:
it’s
rude
to
stick
your
chopsticks
into
your
food.
5
B:
OK.
I
won’t.
A:
And
also,
this
isn’t
about
table
manner
exactly,
but
you
should
know
that
it’s
rude
to
eat
or
drink
while
walking
down
the
street.
B:
Yes.
I
will
remember
all
the
things
you’ve
told
me.
Thanks
for
helping.
A:
You’re
welcome.
A.
And
you
shouldn’t
point
at
anyone
with
your
chopsticks.B.
Nervous
about
what C.
I’ll
go
with
you.D.
It
shows
that
you
like
the
food.E.
I’d
like
to
give
you
some
advice.F.
That’s
interesting.G.
That’s
too
bad.
B)在对话的空格中填上适当的单词，使对话完整正确，一空一词。
(Liu
Peng
is
from
a
poor
village
in
China.
He
has
an
eye
problem.
He
is
now
talking
to
a
doctor
of
the
Flying
Eye
Hospital)
Doctor:
Good
morning,
young
man!
What’s
your
name,
please!
Liu:
My
name’s
Liu
Peng.
I’m
ten
years
old
now.
I
come
here
to
see
my
eyes.
6
the
way,
what
is
the
Flying
Eye
Hospital
Doctor:
We
doctors
in
this
hospital
fly
to
different
poor
places.
People
7
eye
problems
can
come
to
us.
Liu:
8
do
you
do
exactly
Doctor:
We
give
medicine
to
the
poor
or
do
operations
on
them.
Liu:
I
started
to
have
problems
with
my
eyes
when
I
was
seven.
Now,
I
can’t
see
things
9
.
Can
you
help
me
Doctor:
Yes,
of
course.
We’ll
try
our
10
.
Liu:
My
parents
don’t
have
enough
11
for
the
medicine
or
the
operation.
Doctor:
Don’t
12
.
We
get
donation
from
all
over
the
world.
That
means
you
don’t
have
to
13
.
Liu:
I
really
want
to
be
14
to
see
my
parents
and
you
clearly.
Doctor:
We’ll
bring
you
new
hope
and
15
.
第二部分
综合能力提升
五、完形填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
Mrs.
Li
and
Grandma
were
going
to
Los
Angeles,
USA
that
Sunday
to
see
Uncle
Mike.
He
1
in
Los
Angeles
for
six
years.
Mrs.
Li
and
Grandma
had
never
been
to
another
country.
They
planned
to
stay
in
Los
Angeles
for
two
weeks.
They
would
not
come
back
2
the
end
of
the
month.
They
had
bought
their
air
tickets
already.
They
had
done
a
lot
of
things,
but
not
3
.
They
had
not
packed
their
suitcases
4
.
Grandma
had
bought
Uncle
Mike
many
presents.
She
had
bought
5
T-shirts
and
several
paintings.
She
had
also
bought
some
tea
and
dried
mushrooms.
“Have
you
got
enough
space
in
your
suitcase ”
asked
Mrs.
Li.
“Yes,
because
I’ve
only
got
a
small
amount
of
tea,
not
6
.”
said
Grandma.
“How
about
the
dried
mushrooms
How
many
packets
have
you
got ”
asked
Mrs.
Li.
“I’ve
got
7
packets,
not
too
many.
Don’t
worry,
my
dear”
replied
Grandma.
“But
I
can’t
help
8
.
I
haven’t
got
enough
room
in
my
suitcase.”
Said
Mrs.
Li.
“If
so,
you
can
put
some
of
your
things
in
my
suitcase.
My
suitcase
is
larger
than
9
.”
said
Grandma.
Then
Mrs.
Li
put
part
of
her
things
into
Grandma’s
suitcase
and
they
left
10
.
1.
A.
lived
B.
have
lived
C.
had
lived
D.
live
2.
A.
by
B.
at
C.
in
D.
until
3.
A.
everything
B.
anything
C.
nothing
D.
all
thing
4.
A.
ever
B.
never
C.
already
D.
yet
5.
A.
a
lot
of
B.
lot
of
C.
a
lot
D.
lot
6.
A.
many
too
B.
too
man
C.
much
too
D.
too
much
7.
A.
a
little
B.
a
lot
of
C.
a
few
D.
a
bit
8.
A.
to
worry
B.
worrying
C.
worry
D.
worried
9.
A.
you
B.
your
C.
yours
D.
it
10.
A.
happy
B.
happily
C.
unhappy
D.
unhappily
七、阅读理解（共10分，每小题1分）。
A
At
school
many
things
happen
to
us.
We
may
feel
excited
when
we
have
success
in
a
school
play.
We
may
feel
sorry
if
we
lose
an
important
game.
We
want
to
keep
the
memory
for
the
rest
of
our
lives.
How
to
keep
the
memory
Our
English
teacher,
Miss
Wang,
has
taught
us
a
good
way
of
remembering
things
to
make
our
own
yearbook.
What
is
a
yearbook
A
yearbook
is
a
kind
of
book
which
is
used
to
keep
the
memory
of
exciting
moments.
It’s
usually
made
at
the
end
of
the
year.
Last
December,
we
began
to
make
our
yearbook.
First
we
chose
the
persons
who
had
done
something
special,
then
some
students
interviewed
them,
some
wrote
down
their
stories,
others
took
photos
of
them.
Everyone
in
our
class
had
something
to
do.
Finally
our
teacher
helped
us
to
put
the
things
together.
We
had
our
first
yearbook.
All
of
us
put
a
lot
of
love
into
making
the
yearbook.
It
is
so
wonderful
that
not
only
the
students
but
also
our
parents
and
teachers
will
remember
the
special
time
for
ever.
根据短文内容，选择最佳答案。
1.
When
we
have
success
in
a
school
play,
we
may
feel
______
A.
sorry
B.
angry
C.
excited
D.
interested
2.
Miss
Wang’s
good
way
of
remembering
things
is
to
______
A.
buy
a
new
book
B.
write
down
stories
C.
take
a
lot
of
photos
D.
make
a
yearbook
3.
A
yearbook
is
made
to
______
A.
take
notes
B.
keep
the
memory
C.
do
our
homework
D.
remember
English
words
4.
Usually
a
yearbook
is
made
in
______
A.
January
B.
February
C.
May
D.
December
5.
We
made
our
first
yearbook
______
A.
without
any
help
B.
without
putting
our
love
into
it
C.
with
the
help
of
our
teacher
D.
with
the
help
of
our
parents
B
Adults:
￡5.00Students:
￡4.00Children(under12):
￡3.00Family(2adults
&
2
Children):
￡13.00
How
Brave
Are
you Join
us
for
an
evening
for
humour,
history
and
horror
in
the
streets
of
Old
Glasgow.Daily,
April－OctoberWalking
Tours
of
GlasgowHistoric
Glasgow
2:00
PMGruesome
Glasgow
7:00
PMGhosts
and
Ghouls
9:00
PMAll
tours
from
George
Square.Each
tour
lasts
90
minutes.◇Tel/
Fax:
(0516)
7776
0009◇E-mail:
info@mercat-tours.co.uk◇Web:
http://www.mercat-tours.co.uk
根据图表内容，选择最佳答案。
6.
If
Jimmy
wants
to
visit
Old
Glasgow,
he
should
start
from
______.
A.
Historic
Glasgow
B.
George
Square
C.
Ghosts
and
Ghouls
D.
Gruesome
Glasgow
7.
How
long
does
the
tour
of
Gruesome
Glasgow
last
A.
Half
an
hour.
B.
Two
hours.
C.
One
hour
and
a
half.
D.
Only
one
hour.
8.
Mr.
Smith
with
his
wife
and
two
children,
one
11
and
the
other
9,
will
have
a
tour
of
Historic
Glasgow.
How
much
will
he
pay
at
least
A.￡12.
B.￡13.
C.￡16.
D.￡17.
9.
From
the
ad,
visitors
can
NOT
find
the
______
of
Old
Glasgow.
A.
address
B.
web
address
C.
E-mail
address
D.
phone
number
10.
If
a
student
wants
to
have
a
tour
of
Ghosts
and
Ghouls,
he
______.
A.
will
have
to
pay
￡5
B.
can
have
the
tour
by
bike
C.
can
have
the
tour
in
May
D.
had
better
go
there
at
10:00
AM
八、书面表达（15分）
生活多姿多彩，变化无处不在。请你根据亲身经历，以“Changes
in
My
Life”为题写出人们生活的变化，见证社会的发展。
要求：1.写出典型例子，见证所发生的变化；
　　　2.词数：80左右，题目已给出。
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
第三部分
课标新题探究
九、短文填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
根据短信内容，在方框内选出适当的单词填空，使其通顺、完整。
cool,
three,
with,
interest,
because,
name,
one,
someone,
beautiful,
late,
as,
like
The
coolest
girl
The
class
president
of
my
high
school
class
was
a
girl
1
Sarah.
She
was
made
class
president
2
everyone
knew
her
and
everyone
liked
her.
I
also
liked
Sarah.
I
think
she
is
3
of
the
coolest
people
I
have
known.
Several
things
made
Sarah
cool.
First,
Sarah
considered
everyone
4
a
friend－she
never
thought
she
was
better
than
5
else.
Because
she
showed
a
real
interest
in
others,
others
became
6
in
her.
Second,
she
had
a
great
sense
of
humor
and
laughed
often.
She
almost
always
had
a
smile
on
her
face.
7
,
Sarah
was
also
one
of
the
most
confident(自信的)
people
in
our
high
school.
Sometimes,
the
most
popular
girls
are
the
prettiest,
best-dressed
girls.
Sara
was
not
8
girl
in
my
high
school,
nor
the
best-dressed.
She
was
confident
not
because
she
was
good-looking,
but
because
she
was
happy
with
who
she
was.
She
was
9
than
the
girls
who
worried
too
much
about
the
way
they
looked.
She
was
real!
Reading
fashion
magazines,
buying
the
10
clothes,
and
wearing
a
lot
of
make-up
does
not
make
a
girl
cool.
A
cool
girl
is
comfortable
with
who
she
is.
1.
________
2.
________
3.
________
4.
________
5.
________
6.
________
7.
________
8.
________
9.
________
10.
________
十、任务阅读（共10分，每小题1分）。
Dear
Mum,
Dad
and
Rachel,
I’ve
finally
arrived
in
London!
We
flew
in
from
Italy
yesterday
morning
(Tuesday).
1
But
then
I
found
out
that
my
bags
had
missed
the
plane
in
Rome
and
so
they
had
to
put
them
on
a
later
flight.
2
And
then
caught
a
taxi
to
our
hotel.
It
is
beautiful
and
very
English－although
there
were
three
other
American
tourists
arriving
at
the
same
time－so
I
felt
like
I
hadn’t
left
home!
After
quickly
having
a
shower,
I
went
downstairs
and
had
an
English
“afternoon
tea”
with
biscuits,
cakes
and
sandwiches.
I
chose
from
a
huge
tea
menu－there
were
Earl
Grey,
Darjeeling,
Orange
Pekoe,
Lapsang
Souchong
and
many
others.
They
gave
me
a
strange
look
when
I
asked
for
a
cup
of
coffee!
3
I
saw
the
Natural
History
Museum
and
the
Science
Museum－they
were
fantastic!
Today
I
went
to
see
a
play－it
was
King
Lear
written
by
William
Shakespeare
around
1605.
It
was
at
the
Globe
Theatre,
which
is
supposed
to
be
just
like
the
theatre
they
had
in
the
17th
century,
when
Shakespeare
was
alive.
4
In
the
17th
century,
the
performances
were
all
during
the
day,
because
there
were
no
lights
inside.
I
really
liked
it
and
I
felt
much
more
interested
in
reading
Shakespeare’s
plays
after
that.
Then
we’re
going
on
to
Ireland!
I’m
leaving
for
home
next
Friday,
so
see
you
all
soon!
Love,
Jack
A)根据短文内容，从方框中选出适当的选项补全短文。
A.
I
spent
the
rest
of
the
day
visiting
museums.B.
Tomorrow
I’m
going
shopping,
to
get
you
all
some
presents.C.
And
at
first
I
thought
that
the
airline
had
lost
my
bags
because
I
had
to
wait
for
hours.D.
Most
of
it
is
an
open-air
theatre－so
you
need
to
have
good
weather!E.
We
took
the
special
airport
train
into
the
centre
of
London－it
takes
about
half
an
hour.
B)根据短文内容，回答下列问题。
6.How
did
Jack
arrive
in
London
____________________________________________
7.Which
country
is
Jack
from
____________________________________________
8.Why
did
Jack
feel
that
he
hadn’t
left
home
____________________________________________
9.What
is
Earl
Grey
____________________________________________
10.Is
the
Globe
Theatre
a
modern
theatre
or
an
old
one
____________________________________________
【答案】
Changes
in
My
Life
　　My
life
has
changed
a
lot
in
the
past
few
years.
I
used
to
ride
a
bike
to
school,
but
now
I
usually
take
my
mother’s
car.
I
used
to
watch
plays
and
news
on
TV,
but
now
I
can
also
watch
them
on
the
Internet.
We
used
to
buy
something
only
in
the
city,
but
now
there’s
a
supermarket
in
my
village.
We
can
buy
everything
there.
There’re
much
more
changes
in
my
life
now.
I
have
never
been
enjoying
it
like
this
before.
八、1.named
2.because
3.one
4.as
5.anyone
6.interested
7.Third
8.the
most
beautiful
9.cooler
10.latest
九、1-5
CEADB
6.By
plane.
7.America.
8.Because
there
were
three
other
Americans
in
the
same
hotel.
9.A
kind
of
tea.
10.It
is
an
old
one
PAGE
1考点聚焦
一、要点梳理
必考词汇
◆1.
among
among介词，意为“(表示位置)处在…中,
为…所环绕,
为…所环抱”，例如：
He
was
sitting
among
a
group
of
children,
telling
them
a
story.
他正坐在一群孩子中间讲故事。
『辨析活用』between和among
◇
between一般指“两者之间”，而among用于三个或三个以上的人或物之中，或笼统的一群人或一些物之中，表示“在……中间”。例如：
Between
the
door
and
the
windows
there
is
a
map.门和窗户的中间有一张地图。
The
young
people
lived
and
worked
among
the
workers.
那些年青人生活、工作在工人之中。
◇
between还可以用来指三个或三个以上的人或物的每两个之间。三个或三个以上的名词用and连接，前面用between，而不用among。例如：
There
does
not
seem
much
difference
between
the
three
of
them.
Switzerland
lies
between
France,
Germany,
Austria
and
Italy.瑞士位于法、德、奥、意之间。
◇
among可用来表示一个比较的范围，=one
of，常与最高级连用。例如：
She
is
the
tallest
among
her
classmates.
她在她同学之中是最高的。
【链接中考】
（福建省晋江市）
—
Peter,
can
you
tell
me
the
differences
_______
the
four
words
—
Sorry,
I
don’t
know.
A.
between
B.
among
C.
for
【答案】B
◆2.
although
although连词，意为“尽管，虽然”，可以引导让步状语从句。注意不能和but连用，但可以和yet,
still等连用。例如：
Although
it
was
very
late,
he
went
on
working.虽然很晚了，他还继续工作。
『辨析活用』
though与although意义相同，有时指假设的情况，不指事实，所引导的从句用虚拟语气；而although多指事实，所引导的从句用陈述语气。例如：
I
will
try
it,
though
I
may
fail.即使我可能失败,
我也要试一下。
Although
it
was
so
cold,
he
went
out
without
an
overcoat.天气虽然很冷,
他没有穿大衣就出去了。
【链接中考】
（山东省滨州市）
1.
_______
many
children
like
KFC,
I
think
they’d
better
try
not
to
eat
it
too
often.
A.
Because
B.
When
C.
Although
D.
If
【答案】C
（河南省）
2.
it’s
difficult
to
make
her
dream
come
true，she
never
gives
up
A
Though
B
Unless
C
Because
D
If
【答案】A
◆3.
except
except是介词，表示“除去，把……除外”，后面可以接名词、代词、动词、介词短语，或连词等引导的从句。but为except的同义词。例如：
We
all
agreed
except
him.我们都同意,
只有他不同意。
『辨析活用』besides;
except;
except
for
◇besides是介词，意为“除了……以外（还有），具有肯定和附加的涵义，即表示“在……之外，还另加……”，后接名词、动词-ing形式或代词。
Besides
English,
he
is
good
at
French.除了英语以外，他的法语也很好。
◇except只作介词，是“除……之外（不包括本身在内）”的意思，有否定和排除的涵义，表示从整体中除去一部分。
We
all
succeed
except
him.除了他以外，我们都获得了成功。
◇except
for有时可以与except互换，表示“除了……以外”，位于句首时只能用except
for。Except
for
George,
we
can
all
go.除乔治以外，我们都可以去。
【链接中考】
（湖北省襄樊市）
—
We’re
all
here
______
Lily.
Where’s
she
—
She’s
gone
to
the
library.
A.
beside
B.
besides
C.
except
D.
of
【答案】C
◆4.
hardly
hardly虽然是副词，但不是hard的副词形式。它的意思是“几乎不”，“简直不”，相当于一个否定词，前面多和can连用，意思上接近于almost
not。由于hardly本身已经表示否定，不应当再加否定词。例如：
My
legs
were
so
weak
I
could
hardly
stand.我的腿软得简直不能站立。
【拓展】
◇hard可用作形容词或副词。用作形容词时，hard意为“困难的；艰难的”。例如：
The
problem
is
so
hard
that
I
can’t
work
it
out.
这题太难了，我算不出来。
◇hard用作副词，意为“努力地”，“猛烈地”。
The
people
are
all
working
hard.人们都在努力工作。
The
little
girl
looked
at
me
and
cried
harder
and
harder.
那小女孩看了看我，哭得越来越厉害。
【链接中考】
（湖北省荆州市）
—
Do
you
think
yesterday’s
math
problem
was
difficult
—
Yes.
I
could
______
work
it
out.
A.
hardly
B.
easily
C.
finally
D.
nearly
【答案】A
◆5.
while
while意为“在……的同时”,“在……期间”,它只可指一段时间，而不可指一点时间。常用来表示发生某事的同时又发生另一件事。主要强调主句的动作和从句的动作同时发生。
While
we
were
talking,
he
came
in.我们谈话时,他进来了。
『辨析活用』when,
while和as
◇when意为“当……时刻”或“在从个时间段里”。
⑴
when引导的从句往往指当从句的动作在某个时间点或时间段发生时，主句的动作发生。因此。从句的动词既可是非延续性动词（发生在时间点）。也可以是延续性动词（发生在时间段内）。
He
was
talking
happily
when
we
got
there.
（get是非延续性动词）
当我们到那儿的时候，他正高兴地与人交谈着。
My
pen
dropped
on
the
ground
when
I
was
walking
in
the
park.
(walk是延续性动词)
当我走在公园里的时候，我的笔掉在了地上。
⑵
when还可以表示“就在那时，突然……”
I
was
just
falling
asleep
when
there
was
a
loud
knock
at
the
door.
就在我刚刚入睡的时候，突然听到一阵响亮的敲门声。
◇while意为“在……期间”．“当……时候”，“和……同时”。
⑴
while只用于时间段而不用于时间点，从句的动词只能用延续性动词而决不能用非延续性动词，也就是说，只有当when从句中是延续性动词时，它的用法才等同于while的这一用法。
Don’t
talk
while
you
are
doing
your
homework.
做作业的时候别讲话。
⑵
while常表示当主句的延续性动作正在发生时，从句的延续性动作也在同时发生。
While
the
doctors
were
carrying
the
man
to
the
hospital,
the
policemen
were
watching
the
traffic.
医生们将这个男人送往医院的同时，警察们在监督交通情况．
⑶
while还可以用于对比。
She
is
very
diligent,
while
he
is
very
lazy.
她很勤奋，而他却很懒。
◇as意为“正当……”“与……同时”。主句与从句中动词的用法与when相同，但当主句和从句都用延续性动词时，主句和从句的动词既可以都用进行时态，也可以一个用进行时态，一个不用。
As
we
walked
on,
we
talked
about
something
interesting
in
class.
当我们一起走的时候．我们谈论着班上一些有趣的事情。
【链接中考】
(河北省卷)
Peter
likes
reading
a
newspaper
he
is
having
breakfast.
A.
until
B.
while
C.
because
D.
though
【答案】B
常考短语
◆1.
as
soon
as
as
soon
as意为“一……就……”，引导时间状语从句，如果主句是一般将来时，则该从句用一般现在时；如果主句是一般现在时，则该从句也用一般现在时。例如：
　　I’ll
telephone
you
as
soon
as
I
get
there.我一到那儿，就给你打电话。
　　The
baby
stopped
crying
as
soon
as
he
saw
his
mother.一见到他妈妈，小婴儿就不哭了。
【链接中考】
（恩施市）
1.
He
will
come
here
right
away
______
he
hears
the
news.
A.
so
B.
as
soon
as
C.
because
D.
though
【答案】B
（北京市）
2.
Tom
will
call
me
as
soon
as
he
______
home.
A.
gets
B.
has
got
C.
got
D.
will
get
【答案】A
◆2.
depend
on
depend主要意思为“依靠”、“依赖”、“取决于”等，只用作不及物动词，通常与介词
on,
upon
连用，主要用法有：
⑴
depend
on
[upon]＋某人或某物。例如：
Whether
we’ll
go
camping
depends
on
the
weather.
我们是否去野营要看天气。
有时可在某人或某物后用介词
for。例如：
We
depend
on
the
radio
for
news.
我们靠收音机听新闻。
⑵
depend
on
[upon]＋某人或某物＋不定式或动名词。例如：
I’m
depending
on
you
to
do
the
work.
我指望你做这工作。
⑶
depend
on
[upon]＋从句。例如：
Our
success
depends
on
whether
everyone
works
hard
or
not.
我们的成功取决于每个人是否努力。
【链接中考】
（湖北省黄石市）
Whether
I’ll
go
to
Shanghai
______
the
result
of
the
examination.
A.
belongs
to
B.
cares
about
C.
depends
on
D.
Aims
at
【答案】C
经典句型
◆1.
I
told
her
not
to
worry.
tell
sb.
To
do
sth.意为“让某人干某事”，其否定形式为tell
sb.
not
to
do
sth.
含义相近的结构还有ask
sb.
(not)
to
do
sth.
例如：
His
mum
told
him
not
to
fight
at
school.
他妈妈让他不要再学校打架。
【链接中考】
（河南省）
Father
often
tells
me
______
too
much
time
on
computer
games.
A
don’t
spend
B
not
spend
C
not
to
spend
D
not
spending
【答案】C
◆2.
I’m
looking
forward
to
this!
look
forward
to作“盼望、期望”解，常用于表示愉快或满足的心情，期望或向往某事，例如：
Every
child
is
looking
forward
to
the
Spring
Festival.
We
are
looking
forward
to
seeing
each
other
soon.
注意：look
forward
to中to为介词，故接动词时应使用动名词。
【链接中考】
（黑龙江省哈尔滨市）
Every
one
of
you
is
looking
forward
______
getting
a
good
result.
Better
think
carefully
before
writing
down
your
answers.
Wish
you
success!
A.
on
B.
in
C.
to
【答案】C
（广西省定西市）
The
boy
is
looking
forward
to
a
good
time
after
the
exam.
A.
to
have
B.
has
C.
having
D.
have
【答案】C
◆3.
He
studied
medicine
so
that
he
could
become
a
doctor.
◇
so
that引导目的状语从句，其从句中的谓语动词通常和can,
may,
should等情态动词连用，而且主句和从句之间不使用逗号，意为“以便，为了，使能够”。例如：
They
got
up
early
so
that
they
could
catch
the
early
bus.
为了能赶上早班车，他们早早就起床了。
Say
slowly
so
that
I
can
understand
you.
说慢点，好让我听明白。
◇
so
that也可以用来引导结果状语从句，意为“因此，结果”，这时其从句中的谓语动词不与情态动词连用。这种结构和so…that…引导的结果在含义上有很大的区别。so
that句型所表示的结果往往同主句有因果关系，而so…that…句型所表示的结果往往表明so后面形容词或副词和程度。请比较：
He
didn’t
plan
his
time
well,
so
that
he
didn’t
finish
his
work
in
time.
他没有把时间计划好，结果没有按时完成这项工作。（没按时完成这项工作的原因是没计划好时间）
It’s
so
hot
that
I
can’t
sleep.
天气热得我不能入睡。（天气热到人不能入睡的程度。）
【链接中考】
（广东省）
The
teacher
speaks
very
loudly
all
the
students
can
hear
her.
A.
so
that
B.
because
C.
since
D.
when
【答案】A
◆4.
So
would
I!
这个句型中的so与代词“这样”、“这么”及连词“因此”、“所以”不同，在这个句型中,
so常用来代替上文中的形容词、名词或动名词，表示赞同。
　　“So＋be动词（助动词、情态动词）＋主语”结构用以承接前一句的内容，表示“（甲如此），乙也如此”。be动词、助动词、情态动词要和前一句的谓语动词保持一致。例如：
He
can
swim,
and
so
can
I.他会游泳，我也会。
【注意】“So＋谓语＋主语”与“So＋主语＋谓语”的区别
①当两个句子指的是两个人时，So后句子要倒装。例如：
He
is
a
student.
So
am
I.他是个学生。我也是。
②当两个句子指的是同一个人时，So后句子不倒装。例如:
—
Lucy
likes
dark
blue.露西喜欢深蓝色。
—
So
she
does.是的。(她是喜欢深蓝色)
【链接中考】
（山东省莱芜市）
1.
Yao
Ming
works
hard
on
his
English
and
_______.
A.
so
Liu
Xiang
does
B.
so
is
Liu
Xiang
C.
so
does
Liu
Xiang
D.
so
Liu
Xiang
is
【答案】C
（甘肃省兰州市）
2.
—
I
hear
Huang
Gang
made
an
English
speech
at
the
graduation
ceremony
yesterday.
—
______,
and
______.
A.
So
he
did,
so
did
I
B.
So
did
he,
so
I
did
C.
So
he
was,
so
was
I
D.
So
was
he,
so
I
was
【答案】A
（四川省眉山市）
3.
—
My
brother
and
I
will
go
to
the
library
tomorrow.
—
______.
Shall
we
go
together
A.
So
am
I
B.
So
do
I
C.
So
I
am
D.
So
will
I
【答案】D
◆5.
…although
it
would
take
so
long
that
you’d
need
to
come
back
immediately.
so…that…意为“如此……以致……”，引导表示结果的状浯从句。so是副词，用以修饰其后的形容词或副词，说明其程度的大小。
在“so…that…”句型中的that在口语中常可以省去，其意思不变。例如：
The
story
was
so
funny
it
made
everybody
1augh.这故事太滑稽了，把大家都逗笑了。
本句型中的“so＋adj.(adv.)可以提至句首，以加强语气，但要注意用倒装语序。例如：So
bright
was
the
moon
that
the
flowers
were
bright
as
by
day.
在如此明亮的月光下，花儿就像在白天一样鲜艳。
【拓展】so...that和such...that都是表示“如此……以致于”，引导结果状语从句。用法上要注意so＋形容词或副词；such十名词，that后面是一个完整的句子。
He
is
so
young
that
he
can’t
go
to
school.
He
is
such
a
young
boy
that
he
can’t
go
to
school.
●so…that与such…that的肯定形式可用enough
to改写，其否定形式则由too…to改写。
English
is
so
useful
that
we
must
learn
it
well.
→English
is
useful
enough
for
us
to
learn
it
well.
I’m
so
tired
that
I
can’t
go
any
farther.
→I’m
too
tired
to
go
any
farther.
【链接中考】
（青海省，宁夏）
1.
—Did
you
catch
what
the
teacher
said
—No.
She
spoke
so
fast
______
I
couldn’t
hear
her
very
clearly.
A.
which
B.
that
C.
when
D.
since
【答案】B
(江苏省宿迁市)
2.
This
is
_______
difficult
problem
that
few
students
can
work
it
out.
A.
so
B.
so
a
C.
such
D.
such
a
【答案】D
◆6.
From
most
teenagers
it
wouldn’t
be
a
holiday
at
all.
at
all用于否定句，意为：根本不、一点也不。例如：
It
wasn’t
difficult
at
all.
这一点也不难。
There
was
nothing
to
eat
at
all.
根本没什么可吃的。
注：在否定句中，at
all
可位于句末，也可跟在否定词后。例如：
He
isn’t
tired
at
all.
/
He’s
not
at
all
tired.
他一点也不累。
另外，在口语中单独说
not
at
all,
可用来回答感谢或道歉。例如：
—
Thank
you
very
much.
多谢你了。
—
Not
at
all.
不客气。
—
I’m
sorry
to
keep
you
waiting.
对不起，让你久等了。
—
Oh,
not
at
all.
噢，没关系。
【链接中考】
（江苏省镇江市）
1.
—
Jerry,
do
you
mind
my
pointing
out
your
mistakes
—
_______.
Your
advice
is
of
great
value
to
me.
A.
Not
at
all
B.
You’d
better
not
C.
Of
course
D.
It’s
my
pleasure
【答案】A
（四川省巴中市）
2.
—
Would
you
mind
my
taking
this
seat
—
______.
A.
Sorry,
I
can’t
B.
No,
not
at
all
C.
It’s
a
pleasure
【答案】B
二、知识全练
第一部分
基础知识运用
一、词汇。（共20分，每小题1分）
A)根据句意及所给首字母提示，在空格上填写正确的单词。
1.You
are
only
one
a______
many
who
need
help.
2.
She
can
do
everything
e______
cook.
3.
Let’s
help
the
blind
man
go
c______
the
street.
4.
He
told
a
lie
to
us.
He
didn’t
tell
us
the
w______
story.
5.
Don’t
worry
about
me.
I
can
take
care
of
m______.
6.
Spring
and
autumn
are
my
favorite
s______.
7.
You
are
too
tired
these
days.
You
need
a
v______.
8.
My
mother
was
cooking
w______
my
father
was
watching
TV.
9.
He
broke
his
p______
and
did
not
come
to
see
me.
10.
The
house
is
e______,
no
one
is
living
there.
B)根据句意，用所给单词的适当形式填空。
11.
After
a
long
walk,
I
felt
very
______
(sleep).
12.
She
looks
______(worry).
What’s
wrong
with
her
13.
The
little
boy
went
for
a
walk
and
got
______(lose).
14.
At
last,
he’s
a
real
______(win).
15.
We
enjoyed
______(we)
very
much
last
Sunday
16.
He
speaks
Chinese
very
well
though
he
is
a
______.(Canada)
17.
The
doctor
gave
him
a
______(medicine)
examination.
18.
Sally
was
ill,
the
doctor’s
______(treat)
cured
her.
19.
Your
mother
needs
an
______(operate)
on
her
stomach.
20.I’m
going
to
take
a
______(fly)
Number
CA933
to
Paris.
二、选择填空（共15分，每小题1分）。
1.
I
crossed
the
street
to
______
meeting
him,
but
he
saw
me
and
came
running
towards
me.
A.
become
B.
leave
C.
avoid
D.
bet
2.
He
put
the
______
of
his
money
into
the
bank
in
order
to
buy
a
new
house
in
the
future.
A.
whole
B.
all
C.
many
D.
much
3.
______
I
live
near
the
sea,
I
am
not
a
good
swimmer.
A.
But
B.
Although
C.
If
D.
So
4.
It’s
dangerous
to
______
the
street
when
the
traffic
light
is
red.
A.
across
B.
cross
C.
through
D.
along
5.
—
Can
you
follow
me
—
Sorry,
I
can
______
follow
you.
You
speak
too
fast.
A.
hardly
B.
nearly
C.
clearly
D.
already
6.She
can’t
speak
any
Japanese,
______
she
is
in
trouble
in
Japan.
A.
or
B.
so
C.
but
D.
and
7.
She
asked
her
mother
______
at
six
in
the
morning.
A.
to
wake
up
her
B.
to
wake
her
up
C.
waking
her
up
D.
woke
up
her
8.
—
There
is
nobody
here.
Let’s
play
football.
—
No,
we
can’t.
My
father
often
tells
me
______
in
the
street.
It’s
dangerous.
A.
to
play
B.
don’t
play
C.
not
to
play
D.
to
not
play
9.
—
Let’s
go
and
play
baseball,
Anna.
—
Sorry,
my
mother
is
ill.
I
have
to
stay
at
home
and
her.
A.
look
for
B.
take
care
C.
look
around
D.
take
care
of
10.The
boy
is
very
impolite.
He
went
away
without
______
good-bye
to
us.
A.
say
B.
says
C.
saying
D.
said
11.There
are
so
many
kinds
of
bikes
in
the
shop,
I
can’t
decide
_____.
A.
to
buy
what
B.
to
buy
which
C.
what
to
buy
D.
which
to
buy
12.—
I
hope
you
_____
my
party
next
weekend.
—
OK,
I
_____.
A.
to
come
in,
will
B.
come
to,
will
C.
can
come
to,
am
D.
can
come
to,
will
13.
He
learns
English
______
he
may
get
more
knowledge.
A.
because
of
B.
so
that
C.
even
though
D.
as
if
14.
—
I’d
like
to
have
a
good
rest
after
a
long
walk.
—
So
______.
A.
would
I
B.
I
would
C.
do
I
D.
I
do
15.—
Tom,
would
you
like
to
go
to
our
dinner
party
—
______.
A.
Yes,
I
would
B.
Yes,
I’d
love
to
C.
No,
I
wouldn’t
D.
Of
curse
三、选用方框中所给词（组）的适当形式填空。（共10分，每小题1分）。
In
the
end,
perfect,
as
soon
as,
rewrite,
face
to
face,
plenty
of,
in
my
opinion,
all
over,
count
down,
help…out
1.
They
were
standing
quarreling
__________.
2.
Do
you
want
to
stay
for
dinner
There’s
__________
food.
3.
__________,
we
must
get
there
before
six
o’clock
tomorrow
morning.
4.
The
article
is
too
long.
I
think
you
should
______
it.
5.
I
will
tell
him
about
it
__________
he
comes
back.
6.
She
looked
__________
for
the
lost
cat.
7.
________
she
got
very
angry,
so
she
left
the
meeting-room.
8.
The
people
begun
to
__________
to
welcome
the
New
Year’s
coming.
9.
The
weather
during
the
last
few
days
has
been
______.
10.
He
is
in
trouble
now.
We
should
______
him
______.
四、用括号中所给的连词，把两个简单句连成一个复合句。（共10分，每小题2分）。
1.
She
will
leave
for
Beijing.
She
receives
a
letter
from
her
son.
(as
soon
as)
_____________________________________________________
2.
The
boy
doesn’t
jump
into
the
water.
He
can’t
swim.
(because)
_____________________________________________________
3.
I
haven’t
heard
from
you.
You
left
Shanghai.
(since)
_____________________________________________________
4.
The
room
is
very
small.
It
could
hardly
hold
over
one
hundred
people.
(so…that)
_____________________________________________________
5.
We
don’t
know.
Is
it
going
to
rain
tomorrow
(if)
_____________________________________________________
五、完成对话。（共5分，每小题1分）。
从对话后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项，其中两项为多余选项。
A:
Weren’t
you
at
home
last
weekend
B:
No.
Why
A:
We
had
a
picnic
on
the
island.
(1)_____
B:
Sorry,
because
my
family
have
been
to
the
beach.
A:
Yeah
(2)______
B:
No.
I
heard
of
surfing.
It’s
a
popular
sport.
So
I
hoped
to
have
a
try.
A:
(3)______
B:
Not
at
all.
It
attracted
a
lot
of
people.
Some
were
good
at
it,
the
others
were
learning
it.
A:
(4)______
B:
Not
yet.
But
I
like
it
now.
I’ll
do
that
next
weekend.
(5)_____
A:
I’m
glad
to.
Let’s
try
to
be
good
suffers.
A.
Would
you
like
to
have
a
picnic
with
us B.
Would
you
like
to
go
there
with
me C.
Is
it
very
dangerous D.
Is
it
very
funny E.
To
go
swimming F.
Have
you
learned
surfing G.
Why
didn’t
you
answer
me
when
I
called
you
第二部分
综合能力提升
六、完形填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
Today
we
often
tell
the
story
of
movie
star
Marilyn
Monroe.
She
died
more
than
thirty
years
ago.
Yet
she
still
is
one
of
America’s
most
1
women.
Her
name
at
birth
was
Norma
Jean
Baker.
Her
life
as
a
child
was
like
a
bad
2
.
Her
mother
got
ill
and
she
lived
with
a
number
of
different
people,
and
often
was
treated
3
.
At
age
16,
Norma
Jean
4
a
sailor.
But
she
soon
ended
that
marriage.
She
changed
her
hair
color
from
brown
to
shining
gold.
And
she
5
her
name
to
Marilyn
Monroe.
She
wanted
to
be
an
actress,
and
she
6
.
She
appeared
in
a
number
of
Hollywood
movies.
Millions
of
people
went
to
see
them.
By
the
time
Norma
Jean
had
reached
the
age
of
26,
her
beautiful
face
and
body
made
her
the
most
famous
in
America.
But
success
and
fame
were
not
enough
to
make
her
happy.
The
7
of
her
childhood
days
stayed
with
her.
She
drank
8
wine
every
day.
On
August
4,1962,
Marilyn
Monroe
died
alone
in
her
home.
She
was
36
years
old.
Reports
said
drinking
too
much
wine
killed
her.
But
people
who
9
her
said
Marilyn
Monroe
never
10
her
past.
She
continued
to
suffer
from
the
early,
sad
life
of
a
little
girl
named
Norma
Jean.
1.
A.
clever
B.
famous
C.
important
D.
excellent
2.
A.
play
B.
story
C.
game
D.
dream
3.
A.
kindly
B.
badly
C.
seriously
D.
warmly
4.
A.
met
B.
knew
C
married
D.
got
along
with
5.
A.
changed
B.
gave
C.
called
D.
used
6.
A.
succeeded
B.
failed
C.
gave
up
D.
gave
in
7.
A.
trouble
B.
luck
C.
happiness
D.
tiredness
8.
A.
too
much
B.
red
C.
a
little
D.
some
9.
A.
had
met
B.
had
heard
of
C.
came
to
see
D.
knew
10.
A.
remembered
B.
forgot
C.
minded
D.
realized
七、阅读理解（共10分，每小题1分）。
A
Hong
Kong
Harbor
Cruise
By
Night
Enjoy
your
wonderful
dinner
on
the
ferry
and
see
the
fantastic
city
lights.
TIME:
7:00
pm
10:00
pm
daily
PRICE:
With
dinner
Without
dinner
Adult:
HK$300
HK$120
Child
under
12:HK$210
HK$84
START/STOP:
Kowloon
Public
Pier
(Near
Star
Ferry
Pier)
TICKET
OFFICE:
Star
Company
(123
Canton
Road
)
根据图表内容，选择最佳答案。
1.
Where
does
the
cruise
start
A.
Kowloon
Public
Pier.
B.
Near
Star
Company.
C.
On
the
ferry.
D.
New
York
City.
2.
If
Mr.
and
Mrs.
Brown
want
to
have
dinner
on
the
ferry,
how
much
will
they
pay
A.
HK$300.
B.
HK$600.
C.
HK$420.
D.
HK$800.
3.
Where
can
they
buy
the
tickets
A.
A
Kowloon
Public
Pier.
B.
Near
Star
Ferry
Pier.
C.
Star
Company.
D.
On
the
ship.
4.
What
can
they
see
on
the
ferry
A.
A
film.
B.
The
city
lights.
C.
Playing
sports.
D.
The
fish
in
the
sea.
5.
If
you
are
eleven
years
old
and
you
don’t
have
dinner
during
the
cruise,
how
much
will
you
pay
A.
HK$300.
B.
HK$120.
C.
HK$380
D.
HK$84.
B
A
land
of
dreams
America
has
many
beautiful
places
to
see
and
fun
things
to
do.
But
for
children,
the
most
exciting
place
is
Disneyland
Park.
Not
far
from
Hollywood,
California,
the
west
of
the
US,
Disneyland
Park
attracts(吸引)
many
children
from
all
over
the
world
every
year.
They
like
it
so
much
that
they
call
it
“the
happiest
place
on
earth”.
Walt
Disney,
the
maker
of
Mickey
Mouse,
opened
it
in
1955.
He
wanted
to
give
people
the
fairy(童话般的)
world
he
dreamed
of
when
he
was
a
small
child.
Disneyland
has
eight
“lands”
such
as
Fantasyland,
Main
Street,
Tomorrowland,
and
Adventureland.
Each
has
different
shows
and
special
things
to
do.
In
Fantasyland,
you
will
Fred
places
from
Disney
cartoons
like
“Sleeping
Beauty”
and
“Snow
White”.
Main
Street
looks
like
a
small
town
in
the
American
West
from
the
19th
century.
Tomorrowland
looks
like
the
world
of
file
future.
Here
you
can
join
characters
from
“Star
Wars”.
Many
children
enjoy
exciting
rides
ill
Adventureland.
You
can
fly
on
all
elephant,
climb
a
mountain
or
float
(漂流)
on
a
jungle
(丛林)
river.
Best
of
all,
you
can
go
to
Mickey’s
Toontown
to
meet
Mickey
Mouse
and
his
friends.
They
would
like
to
shake
hands
or
dance
with
you.
根据短文内容，判断下列句子正（T）误（F）。
6.
California
is
in
the
east
of
the
USA.
7.
Many
children
think
Disneyland
Park
is
“the
happiest
place
on
earth”.
8.
Mickey’s
Toontown
is
not
one
part
of
Disneyland
Park.
9.
You
can
join
characters
from
“Star
Wars”
in
Fantasyland.
10.
Disneyland
Park
in
the
USA
was
opened
by
Walt
Disney
himself
in
1955.
八、书面表达（15分）
请以“My
Summer
Holiday.”为题写一篇80词左右的短文。
内容要求：1、去年暑假你印象较深的经历；
2、今年暑假你的计划和安排；
3、你理想中的暑假生活是什么样子的。
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
第三部分
课标新题探究
九、短文填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
根据短文内容及首字母提示，填写所缺单词。
Many
Chinese
middle
school
students
dream
of
becoming
big
h
1
.
How
wonderful
it
is
to
be
a
hero,
liked
by
tons
of
people,
just
like
Yang
Liwei
or
Jackie
Chan!
However,
this
is
the
r
2
why
they
feel
bad:
they
think
they
are
not
brave
enough.
They
don’t
have
the
courage
to
t
3
to
new
friends,
do
the
things
they
like,
or
even
a
4
their
teacher’s
questions
b
5
they’re
afraid
people
will
laugh
at
them.
It’s
very
natural
for
young
people
to
be
shy,
especially
in
China.
If
you
are
too
shy,
it’s
OK.
Remember
to
be
y
6
.
You
don’t
have
to
do
everything
your
friends
do.
If
everyone
was
the
s__7__
as
everyone
else,
the
world
would
be
a
boring
p
8
to
live.
Go
to
your
classmates,
friends,
or
someone
you
f
9
comfortable
talking
to
about
your
life.
If
you
don’t
like
talking,
try
expressing
yourself
by
painting,
dancing,
writing,
p
10
a
musical
instrument(乐器),
or
playing
a
sport.
Remember
if
you’re
talking
to
new
friends
confidently,
you
are
a
hero!
1.
________
2.
________
3.
________
4.
________
5.
________
6.
________
7.
________
8.
________
9.
________
10.
________
十、任务阅读（共10分，每小题1分）。
Work
Hard,
Then
Play
Hard
Peter
and
Tom
are
good
students
and
good
friends.
Peter
is
a
good
athlete
on
the
basketball
court
and
he
can
make
moves
like
LeBron
James.
Tom
shines
in
the
classroom.
1
Well,
that
is,
he
used
to
get
good
marks
until
last
term.
　　
2
“School
is
easy.
If
I
don’t
have
to
‘work
hard’
at
my
studies,
I’ll
have
more
time
to
‘play
hard’
at
basketball
and
have
more
fun.”
Well,
it
seemed
like
a
good
idea
until
Tom
got
his
results
last
term:
all
his
marks
were
down
except
for
PE.
　　Tom
found
out
the
“hard
way”
that
school
becomes
more
difficult
year
after
year.
3
Each
year
you
must
learn
more
difficult
things.
　　Peter
was
both
happy
and
sad.
He
was
sad
because
his
friend
had
got
low
marks
but
he
was
also
happy
because
his
own
marks
had
improved.
4
He
knows
that
if
you
work
hard,
then
you
can
reward
yourself
by
playing
hard
at
the
things
you
like
to
do.
　　 “Luckily,”
Peter
said
to
Tom,
“
5
”
“Yes,”
said
Tom,
“but
last
term
wasn’t
all
bad.”
“Why ”
asked
Peter.
“Well,”
Tom
said,
“at
least
I
can
play
basketball
as
well
as
you!”
阅读短文，将短文中的句子还原，使短文通顺，符合逻辑。
A.
It
is
the
way
the
school
system
is
designed.
B.
He
seems
to
get
good
marks
very
easily.
C.
You
still
have
this
second
term
to
improve
your
marks.
D.
At
the
beginning
of
last
term,
an
idea
came
into
Tom’s
head:
E.
Peter
knows
that
he
has
to
work
hard
to
get
good
marks.
【答案】
一、1.among
2.except
3.cross
4.whole
5.myself
6.seasons
7.vacation
8.while
9.promise
10.empty
11.sleepy
12.worried
13.lost
14.winner
15.ourselves
16.Canadian
17.medical
18.treatment
19.operation
20.flight
二、1-5
CABBA
6-10
BBCDC
11-15
DDBAB
三、1.face
to
face
2.plenty
of
3.In
my
opinion
4.rewrite
5.as
soon
as
6.all
over
7.In
the
end
8.count
down
of
9.perfect
10.help,
out
四、1.
She
will
leave
for
Beijing
as
soon
as
She
receives
a
letter
from
her
son.
2.
The
boy
doesn’t
jump
into
the
water
because
he
can’t
swim.
3.
I
haven’t
heard
from
you
since
you
left
Shanghai.
4.
The
room
is
so
small
that
it
could
hardly
hold
over
one
hundred
people.
5.
We
don’t
know
if
it
is
going
to
rain
tomorrow.
五、1-5
GECFB
六、1-5
BDBCA
6-10
AAADB
七、1-5
ABCBD
6-10
FTFFT考点聚焦
一、要点梳理
必考词汇
◆1.
ours
ours是物主代词，物主代词可分为形容词性物主代词和名词性物主代词。
⑴
形容词性物主代词起形容词的作用，用在名词前。
例如：
We
love
our
motherland.
我们热爱我们的祖国。
⑵
名词性物主代词起名词的作用。例如：
Look
at
the
two
pencils.
The
red
one
is
yours
and
the
blue
one
is
mine.
看那两支铅笔，红的是你的，蓝的是我的。
【注意】在使用名词性物主代词时，必须有特定的语言环境，也就是要省略的名词大家已经知道，已经提起过。例如：
There
is
a
book.
It’s
hers.
那有本书。是她的。
⑶
名词性物主代词=形容词性物主代词+名词。
为避免重复使用名词，有时可用“名词性物主代词”来代替“形容词性物主代词+名词”的形式。例如：
My
bag
is
yellow,
her
bag
is
red,
his
bag
is
blue
and
your
bag
is
pink.
为避免重复使用bag，可写成My
bag
is
yellow,
hers
is
red,
his
is
blue
and
yours
is
pink.
⑷
名词性的物主代词在用法上相当于省略了中心名词的-’s属格结构，例如：
Jack’s
cap
意为
The
cap
is
Jack’s.
His
cap
意为
The
cap
is
his.
【链接中考】
（黑龙江省鸡西市）
—
Wow,
what
a
nice
MP4!
Whose
is
it
—
My
aunt
bought
it
for
my
brother
and
me.
It’s
______.
A.
mine
B.
his
C.
ours
【答案】C
◆2.
expect
⑴
表示“期待”“期望”，通常用作及物动词，不要受汉语的影响在其后误加介词
for。例如：
我在等她的电话。
误：I’m
expecting
for
a
telephone
call
from
her.
正：I’m
expecting
a
telephone
call
from
her.
⑵
还可以表示“预计”“预料”等。例如：
I
expect
a
storm.
我预计会有场暴风雨来。
I
expect
to
be
back
on
Sunday.
/I
expect
that
I
will
be
back
on
Sunday.
我预计星期日回来。
⑶
其后可接不定式或不定式的复合结构，但不能接动名词。例如：
I
expect
to
finish
the
work
by
Friday.
我期望能在星期五以前完成此工作。
He
expected
her
to
go
with
him.
他期望她同他一起去。
⑷
其后可接
that
从句，若从句谓语为否定，注意否定的转移。例如：
I
don’t
expect
that
he
has
done
such
a
thing.
我预料他不会干出这种事来。
【链接中考】
（黑龙江省哈尔滨市）
1.
Which
word
of
the
following
has
a
different
stress
from
the
others
A.
Expect
B.
dentist
C.
Theater
【答案】A
（武汉市实验区）
2.
—
Do
you
think
Brazil
will
beat
Japan
in
World
Cup
2010
—
Yes.
They
have
better
players,
so
I
______
them
to
win.
A.
hope
B.
prefer
C.
expect
D.
want
【答案】C
◆3.
beauty
beauty是名词，意为“美，美丽，美人，美的东西”。例如：
She
was
a
great
beauty
in
her
youth.
她年轻时是个大美人。
We
enjoyed
the
beauty
of
nature.
我们欣赏大自然的美。
That
last
goal
was
a
beauty.
最后进去的那个球真漂亮。
【链接中考】
（江苏省镇江市，四，10）
A)根据句意，用括号中所给单词的正确形式填空，每空一词。
40.—
On
April
14th,
an
earthquake
hit
Yushu
and
destroyed
its
______
(beautiful)
completely.
—
It’s
a
great
pity.
【答案】40.beauty
◆4.
experience
⑴
作可数名词。表“经历”（亲身见过、做过或遭受过的事）。有复数形式，亦可与不定冠词连用。例如：
He
has
rich
experience
in
banking.他在银行业务方面有很丰富的经验。
【注意】experience
作可数名词时有复数形式，但习惯上不说，many
experiences.只有当experiences前面有形容词修饰时才可用many。例如：
I
had
many
cheerful
experiences
in
Africa.我在非洲有许多令人愉快的经历。
⑵
不可数名词表“经验”。（由实践得来的知识或技能）。没有复数形式，也不能与不定冠词连用。例如：
Experience
is
the
mother
of
wisdom.经验是智慧之母。
『常用搭配』
experience
in
在某些方面的经验。
by
experience
透过经验。
⑶
常与动词have,介词of或in连用，表示在某方面有经验、体验。
【链接中考】
（浙江省）
I
had
a
very
unusual
▲
yesterday.
I
saw
a
UFO
land
in
front
of
me.
A.
decision
B.
test
C.
friend
D.
experience
【答案】D
常考短语
◆1.
give
up
give
up意为“放弃；投降，认输”，后接名词或动名词。作“放弃”时，give
up=
stop
doing
sth.。例如：
I
can’t
answer
that
puzzle;
I
give
up.
我猜不出这个谜语,
我认输了。
She
will
give
up
this
journey.
她将放弃这次旅行。
Bad
habits
are
not
easily
given
up.
恶习难改。
My
doctor
advised
me
to
give
up
smoking.
我的医生劝我戒烟。
【链接中考】
（山东省莱芜市）
1.
—
My
father
has
decided
to
______
smoking.
—
That’s
good
news
for
us.
A.
give
up
B.
give
out
C.
give
in
D.
give
to
【答案】A
（2010·四川省眉山市）
2.
I
feel
it
hard
to
keep
up
with
my
classmates
in
study
and
sometimes
I
lose
heart.
But
whenever
I
want
to
______,
my
teacher
always
encourages
me
to
work
harder.
A.
go
on
B.
run
away
C.
give
up
D.
look
out
【答案】C
◆2.
thanks
to
thanks
to意为“幸亏有了……，多亏……”。thanks
是名词，其后的s不能省略。
Thanks
to
the
Green
Great
Wall,
we
had
a
good
harvest.
幸亏有了绿色长城，我们今年获得了大丰收。
Thanks
to
his
help,
we
pass
the
exam
easily.
多亏他帮忙，我们很容易过了考试。
【链接中考】
（黄冈罗田县第一中）
______
the
bad
weather
,
the
swimming
match
had
been
put
off.
A.
Because
B.
Thanks
to
C.
With
the
help
of
D.
For
【答案】B
◆3.
make
progress
make
progress动词短语，意为“有进步,
取得进步”。例如：
Study
well
and
make
progress
every
day.
好好学习，天天向上。
What
impedes
you
to
make
progress
什么事妨碍你取得进步？
【链接中考】
（湖北省荆州市，Ⅶ，10）
根据括号内的汉语和句末括号内的英语单词提示完成句子。
65.I
didn’t
know_______________________(你是否取得进步)
last
year.(make)
【答案】65.if
you
(had)
made
progress
经典句型
◆1.
Of
course
not.
⑴
表示“当然；自然”。例如：
He
was
late
again,
of
course.
自然他又迟到了。
Of
course
I’ll
help
you.
我当然会帮你。
Of
course,
I
wish
both
of
you
well.
当然我希望你们俩身体健康。
⑵
通常在对话中用作回答。例如：
—
Are
you
coming
with
us
你和我们一起去吗
—
Of
course.
当然啦。
—
May
I
book
your
dictionary
我可借你的字典吗
—
Yes,
of
course.
当然可以。
⑶
有时与not连用。例如：
—
Were
you
glad
to
leave
你愿意离开吗
—
Of
course
not.
当然不愿意。
—
Do
you
want
lost
the
game
你起输掉这场比赛吗
—
Of
course
not.
当然不想。
【链接中考】
（湖北省武汉市）
1.
—
Would
you
mind
my
using
your
dictionary
—
________.
A.
Yes,
please
B.
Of
course
not
C.
You
are
welcome
D.
My
pleasure
【答案】B
（广西省定西市）
2.
—
Did
you
have
a
good
weekend
—
______.We
enjoyed
ourselves
in
an
amusement
park.
A.
I’m
afraid
not
B.
I
don’t
think
so
C.
Of
course
D.
I
hope
not
【答案】C
◆2.
Congratulations
to
our
winners
and
thanks
to
everyone
who
entered
the
competition.
⑴
congratulation表示祝贺或恭喜，意为“祝贺你(们)；恭喜恭喜”。例如：
　　Congratulations
on
your
new
job!
祝贺你有了新的工作。
　　It’s
your
birthday
today
Congratulations.
今天是你的生日
祝贺祝贺!
—
I
won
the
100-meter
race
on
our
sports
day.
在今天的体育比赛中我赢得了百米比赛。
—
Congratulations.
We
are
proud
of
you!
祝贺你。我们为你感到骄傲。
⑵
congratulations通常用复形式，其后常用介词on，例如：
Please
accept
my
congratulations
on
your
success
marriage.
请接受我们对你成功、新婚的祝贺。
如果congratulation
表示的是抽象意义的祝贺，则不用复数形式。例如：
It’s
a
matter
for
congratulation.
那是件可喜可贺的事。
　　另外，congratulations
可用于成功、生日、结婚、毕业等场合的祝贺，但一般不用于节日的致词。
【链接中考】
（江苏省扬州市）
—
I
passed
the
driving
test
this
morning.
—
_______!
A.
Best
wishes
B.
Congratulations
C.
Good
luck
D.
Gome
on
【答案】B
◆3.
Good
luck,
betty.
good
luck意为“祝您好运
”，用于对别人的祝福。例如：
Wish
you
good
luck.
祝您好运。
I
wish
you
good
luck
and
great
success
in
the
coming
New
Year.
祝来年好运，取得更大的成就。
—
And
I
hope
your
future
engages
will
not
take
place
during
meal
times.
我还希望以后你的婚约不会发生在吃饭的时候。
—
I’ll
try,
Sir.
我会尽力的，先生。
—
Good
luck.
祝你好运。
—
Thank
you,
Sir谢谢，先生
【链接中考】
(江苏省宿迁市)
—
The
Mars-500
test
will
take
about
520
days.
—
_______
I
hope
it
goes
well.
A.
It’s
a
pleasure.
B.
Good
luck!
C.
That’s
OK.
D.
Congratulations!
【答案】B
◆4.
…there
are
a
great
number
of
______
problems.
◇
a
number
of表示“许多”，相当于
many，修饰可数名词复数。作主语时，谓语动词用复数。number前可用great,
large,
small等修饰，以表示程度。例如：
A
number
of
students
are
planting
trees
on
the
hill．许多学生在小山上植树。
Quite
a
number
of
students
have
read
this
book.
很多学生都读了这本书。
◇
the
number
of表示“……的数量”，跟复数名词连用作主语时，中心词是number，谓语动词要用单数。例如：
The
number
of
students
in
our
class
is
50.
我们班学生的数量是50人。
The
number
of
giant
pandas
is
growing.
大熊猫的数量在增加。
【链接中考】
（四川省巴中市）
In
our
school
library,
there
______
a
number
of
books
on
science
and
the
number
of
them
______
growing
larger
and
larger.
A.
is;
are
B.
are;
is
C.
have;
is
【答案】B
◆5.
Welcome
to
our
school
prize-giving.
welcome常见用法归纳：
⑴
用作感叹词，表示“欢迎
”。例如：
Welcome!
Come
in
and
meet
my
parents.
欢迎!进来见见我的父母。
⑵
用作名词，意为“欢迎，款待”,可用
warm
(热烈的),
cold
(冷淡的),
enthusiastic
(热情的)等形容词作定语加以修饰。例如:
The
hostess
gave
us
a
warm
welcome.
女主人热烈欢迎我们。
⑶
用作及物动词，意为“欢迎(某人或某事物)”。例如：
They
welcome
us
warmly
and
showed
us
to
our
rooms.
他们热情地欢迎我们,并把我们带到我们住的房间里。
He
was
warmly
welcome
back
to
Beijing.
人们热烈欢迎他回到北京。
【链接中考】
（浙江省卷）
What
would
the
mascot（吉祥物）of
the
World
Expo
2010
Shanghai
probably
say
in
the
picture
on
the
right？
A
Running
can
keep
you
healthy
B
Welcome
to
Shanghai,
China
C
Animals
are
our
good
friend
D
Water
is
very
important
for
all
of
us
【答案】B
◆6.
We
hope
that
you’ll
enjoy
a
course
with
us,
too.
hope作动词“希望、盼望、期望”时，有以下几种用法
⑴
接不定式：hope
to
do
sth.。
I
hope
to
be
your
friend.
我希望成为你的朋友。
注意：不能说成hope
sb.
to
do
sth.
⑵
接一个句子：hope十从句。
I
hope
I
can
be
a
doctor
like
my
father.我希望你像父亲一样做个医生。
⑶
特殊用法。可以和so连用。
I
hope
so.我希望是这样。
『辨析活用』hope和wish
hope和wish都有“希望”的意思，但用法不同。
◇hope后面可以接动词不定式或that从句作宾语，表示有可能实现的主观愿望。
I
hope
to
visit
him.我希望拜访他。
◇wish可以接动词不定式、动词不定式的复合结构、双宾语或that从句作宾语。
I
wish
to
see
you.我想看到你。
I
wish
you
well
and
happy.
我祝愿你健康愉快。
I
wish
I
were
[was]
a
bird.
但愿我能变成一只鸟。
●①wish后面接双宾语时往往表示祝愿；②wish后接从句时通常表示很难实现的愿望，因此它后面的从句往往用一般过去时（表示将来很难实现的愿望）。
【链接中考】
（福建省晋江市）
1.
—
Shall
we
see
the
movie
today
or
tomorrow
—
_______
It’s
all
the
same
to
me.
A.
I
hope
so.
B.
I’m
sure.
C.
It’s
up
to
you.
【答案】C
（江苏省常州市）
2.
I
_____
you
_____
shopping
with
us
tomorrow.
A.
will
hope;
to
go
B.
hope;
to
go
C.
will
hope;
can
go
D.
hope;
can
go
【答案】D
二、知识全练
第一部分
基础知识运用
一、词汇。（共20分，每小题1分）
A)根据括号中所给的汉语写出单词，使句子意思完整正确。
1.
People
come
from
______(各处)
to
celebrate
the
victory.
2.
Botswana(博茨瓦纳)
is
not
a
______(典型的)
African
country.
3.
None
of
the
others
have
lived
my
______(经历).
4.
He
can
probably
tell
us
all
the
______(详情)
we
want.
5.
I
sent
them
flowers
as
an
______(表达)
of
thanks.
6.
The
boy
caused
a
lot
of
______(麻烦)
to
his
parents.
7.
Most
of
the
parents
______(期待)
much
of
their
children.
8.
The
country
has
a
______(人口)
of
100
million.
9.
There
was
a
______(人群)
of
people
in
front
of
the
town
hall.
10.
The
boy
has
made
great
______(进步)
this
year.
B)从方框里选出适当的词语，并用其正确形式填空。
alongside,
sunshine,
hand,
similar,
our,
trouser,
guest,
length,
application,
various
11.
Could
you
give
me
a
______
with
the
box
12.
The
police
car
pulled
up
______.
13.
The
color
of
Ann’s
skirt
is
______
to
yours.
14.
This
is
their
classroom.
______
is
on
the
second
floor.
15.
She
sat
in
the
garden
enjoying
the
sunshine.
16.
The
______
of
the
movie
is
two
hours.
17.
Everyone
arrived
late
at
the
party
for
______
reasons.
18.
The
motel
manager
showed
the
______
to
their
room.
19.
How
much
does
this
pair
of
______
cost
20.
He
made
an
______
to
us
for
going
abroad.
二、选择填空（共15分，每小题1分）。
1.
______
woman
in
a
purple
skirt
is
Betty’s
mother.
A.
The
B.
A
C.
An
D.不填
2.
The
man
was
surprised
______
what
he
saw
just
now.
A.
at
B.
to
C.
in
D.
on
3.
—
How
do
you
like
Peking
duck
—
It’s
______.
A.
junk
food
B.
tasty
C.
cute
D.
fitness
4.
—
What
do
you
think
of
his
talk
—
Wonderful.
The
topic
______
all
of
us.
A.
interest
B.
interesting
C.
is
interested
D.
interests
5.
—
Do
you
think
the
Stars
will
beat
the
Bulls
—
Yes.
They
have
better
players,
so
I
______
them
to
win.
A.
hope
B.
prefer
C.
expect
D.
want
6.
Look
up
at
the
kite
in
the
sky.
It
______
an
eagle.
A.
is
like
B.
like
C.
likes
D.
look
like
7.
—
Don’t
______
our
hopes.
Things
will
be
fine
soon.
—
Yes.
We
should
learn
to
be
brave
when
we
are
in
difficulties.
A.
pick
up
B.
give
up
C.
clean
up
D.
go
on
8.
—
Mum,
where
is
my
shot
—
Look!
It’s
under
the
chair.
Please
______.
A.
pick
it
up
B.
pick
up
it
C.
pick
them
up
D.
pick
up
them
9.
—
Does
your
brother
always
work
so
hard
—
Yes,
______
he
catches
a
cold
or
has
a
fever
sometimes.
A.
whenever
B.
no
matter
how
C.
even
though
D.
although
10.—
Our
class
won
the
boy’s
800-metre
relay
race.
—
______
A.
Congratulation!
B.
Really
C.
I’m
glad
to
hear
that.
D.
I
don’t
believe
it.
11.—
_____
free
education,
the
poor
children
in
our
hometown
can
go
back
to
school
—
So
can
the
poor
children
in
our
hometown.
A.
Thanks
to
B.
Instead
of
C.
As
for
D.
Even
though
12.
—
What
kind
of
music
do
you
like
—
I
like
music
______
I
can
dance
to.
A.
who
B.
whom
C.
what
D.
that
13.
—
What
are
you
doing,
Cathy
—
I’m
______
my
bike.
I
can’t
find
it.
A.
looking
for
B.
looking
at
C.
looking
up
D.
looking
after
14.—
What
is
______
—
He
wants
to
talk
about
the
movie.
A.
on
B.
up
C.
in
D.
down
15.
—
Would
you
mind
turning
on
the
TV
—
______.
A.
That’s
all
right
B.
Of
course
not
C.
Thank
you
D.
At
all
三、根据汉语完成下列句子，每空一词。（共10分，每小题2分）。
1.那只装满水果的篮子与我们的很相似。
The
basket
that
__________________
is
____________.
2.你认识在那边拍照的那个男孩儿吗
Do
you
know
the
boy
____________________________
3.你刚才试用的相机是托尼的。
The
camera
_____________________
is
Tony’s.
4.和去年相比，我们收到了更多的电子邮件。
____________________,
we
received
much
more
emails.
5.我能跟史密斯先生说话吗？
May
I
________________________
Mr.
Smith
四、完成对话。（共10分，每小题2分）。
在下面对话的空白处，填入适当的短语或句子，使对话意思完整、通顺。
The
Smiths
are
going
to
Haikou
for
a
holiday.
Now
Mr.
Smith
is
booking
rooms
in
Dalian
by
telephone.
Woman:
Hello.
The
Seaside
Hotel.
(1)

Mr.
Smith:
Yes,
please.
I’d
like
to
book
two
rooms
for
the
coming
weekend.
Woman:
Next
weekend,
you
say
Well,
(2)

Mr.
Smith:
Oh!
Just
two.
Woman:
OK.
Two
nights.
From
Friday
or
Saturday
Mr.
Smith:
Friday.
Woman:
Friday,
July
1st...
(3)

Mr.
Smith:
Two
double
rooms,
please.
Woman:
Right.
Two
doubles
for
Friday
and
Saturday,
July
1st
and
2nd.
Mr.
Smith:
(4)

Woman:
Well,
it’s
400
yuan
per
night,
with
breakfast.
Mr.
Smith:
I
see.
Can
I
book
the
rooms
now,
please
Woman:
Certainly.
(5)

Mr.
Smith:
Rick
Smith.
第二部分
综合能力提升
五、完形填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
先通读短文，掌握其大意，然后从所给的四个选项中选出最佳的一项填空，使短文意思完整通顺。
Sammamish
is
a
small
town
near
Seattle.
Every
morning,
1
the
clock
strikes
six,
everyone
gets
up
in
the
town.
Rain
or
shine,
the
milkman
delivers
milk
and
the
paperboy
throws
the
morning
paper
at
the
front
doors.
You
know
a
new
day
has
begun.
People
2
there
are
very
friendly
and
life
is
peaceful.
When
it
is
about
twenty
to
eight,
the
3
rush
to
school.
Toward
the
end
of
the
afternoon,
the
bank
4
first.
By
six
o’clock
everything
is
closed
along
the
main
street
except
the
gas
station,
the
restaurant
and
the
drugstore.
Most
people
are
at
home
5
dinner.
When
it
is
fine,
you
will
find
the
sky
bluer
and
leaves
greener.
But
the
weather
often
changes
6
you
are
ready
for
it.
It
is
not
7
to
experience
rain,
sunshine,
cloud
and
fog
within
the
same
day.
In
the
holidays,
people
like
hiking
into
mountains
and
boating
on
lakes.
Rocky
Mountains
are
not
far
away
and
Lake
Sammamish
is
8
beside
the
city.
And
not
far
away
there
is
a
9
bigger
lake
called
Lake
Washington.
With
the
snow-covered
mountains,
the
ever-green
lakes
and
the
blue
sky,
Sammamish
10
very
beautiful.
Now
are
you
n
eve
with
this
quiet
town
1.
A.
while
B.
because
C.
when
D.
since
2.
A.
live
B.
living
C
to
live
D.
lived
3.
A.
ladies
B.
workers
C.
children
D.
parents
4.
A.
opens
B.
closes
C.
works
D.
starts
5.
A.
for
B.
with
C.
to
D.
without
6.
A.
when
B.
before
C.
after
D.
because
7.
A.
surprise
B.
surprised
C.
surprises
D.
surprising
8.
A.
ever
B.
already
C.
right
D.
still
9.
A.
more
B.
much
C.
very
D.
little
10.
A.
looks
B.
is
looked
C
is
looking
D.
looked
六、阅读理解（共10分，每小题1分）。
A
下面是一个名为“人口危机委员会”的组织对世界上100个大城市进行的调查。请根据下面12个主要大城市的调查表回答问题。
Population(millions)
%
of
income
spent
on
food
Persons
per
room
%
of
houses
with
water
and
electricity
Telephones
per
100
people
%
of
children
in
middle
school
Tokyo
28.7
18
0.9
100
44
97
Mexico
City
19.4
41
1.9
94
6
62
New
York
17.4
16
0.5
99
56
95
Sao
Paulo
17.2
50
0.8
100
16
67
Osaka
16.8
18
0.6
98
42
97
Seoul
15.8
34
2.0
100
22
90
Moscow
13.2
33
1.3
100
39
100
Bombay
12.9
57
4.2
85
5
49
Calcutta
12.8
60
3.0
57
2
49
Buenos
Aires
12.4
40
1.3
86
14
51
Los
Angeles
11.5
12
0.5
94
35
90
London
11.0
24
0.6
100
50
58
根据图表内容，选择最佳答案。
1.
Of
the
following
four
cities,
people
living
in
_____
spend
least
of
their
income
on
food
A.
Mexico
City
B.
Buenos
Aires
C.
Calcutta
D.
Bombay
2.
Which
city
has
the
most
people
A.
New
York.
B.
Moscow.
C.
Tokyo.
D.
London.
3.
The
number
of
the
students
studying
in
middle
schools
in
Tokyo
out
of
100
students
is
the
same
as
that
of
_____.
A.
Seoul
B.
Sao
Paulo
C.
Calcutta
D.
Osaka
4.
In
which
city
do
all
the
houses
have
water
and
electricity
A.
London.
B.
Los
Angeles.
C.
New
York.
D.
Bombay.
5.
It
is
the
most
difficult
for
people
in
_____
to
make
a
phone
call.
A.
Sao
Paulo
B.
Mexico
City
C.
Bombay
D.
Calcutta
B
Tibet
is
among
the
most
popular
places
for
Chinese
tourists.
The
number
of
travelers
to
Tibet
has
grown
by
10%
every
year
for
a
few
years.
Since
July
1,
2006,
when
the
first
train
ran
1956
kilometers
from
Xining
to
Lhasa,
more
and
more
people
have
been
going
to
Tibet.
The
train
stops
at
several
famous
places
along
the
way,
such
as
Qinghai
Lake,
Kunlun
Mountain,
and
the
Potala
Palace.
Passengers
can
also
enjoy
many
activities
during
the
journey,
like
Tibetan
dancing
and
Karaoke.
On
the
train,
passengers
can
have
tea,
eggs
and
noodles
for
breakfast,
and
fried
chicken
and
green
vegetables
for
lunch
and
dinner.
Unlike
most
Chinese
trains
which
have
open－hole
toilets,
this
one
has
special
toilets
which
can
collect
the
waste.
There
is
also
a
special
rubbish
system
in
the
train
that
keeps
the
environment
clean.
All
the
windows
on
the
train
can
protect
people
from
the
bright
sunlight.
TV
and
electrical
sockets(插座)
for
computers
and
mobile
phones
can
be
found
on
the
train.
Because
there
isn’t
much
oxygen
there,
trains
will
have
oxygen
masks
(氧气罩)
for
those
who
need
them.
It
makes
passengers
feel
more
comfortable
when
they
have
enough
oxygen
on
the
famous
“roof
of
the
world”.
There
are
also
doctors
on
the
train
to
make
sure
that
all
of
the
travelers
are
safe.
根据短文内容，选择最佳答案。
6.
Which
of
the
following
is
not
among
the
places
of
interest
A.
Qinghai
Lake.
B.
Karaoke.
C.
Kunlun
mountain.
D.
The
Potala
Palace
7.
The
train
is
unlike
most
Chinese
trains
except
its
______.
A.
windows
B
toilets
C.
sockets
D.
rubbish
8.
The
underlined
word
“them”
in
the
last
paragraph
refers
to
______.
A.
oxygen
masks
B.
doctors
C.
oxygen
D.
passengers
9.
We
can
learn
from
the
passage
that
______.
A.
flying
to
Tibet
is
impossible
B.
train
to
Lhasa
is
too
clean
to
take
C.
train
trip
to
Tibet
is
popular
with
travelers
D.
taking
train
to
Lhasa
causes
a
lot
of
trouble
10.
What’s
the
best
title
of
the
passage
A.
Tibet
roof
of
the
world
B.
Magic
train
to
magic
Tibet
D.
Beautiful
view
in
Tibet
D.
A
comfortable
trip
to
Tibet
八、书面表达（15分）
暑假期间，你参加了一个中学生环保夏令营，并对本市的环境进行了一次全面的调
查(survey)研究。通过此次活动，你发现了城市环保工作还存在着许多不尽人意的地方。今晚你将被邀请去电视台英文频道做一期有关环保的访谈节目。请就下面方框中的内容准备一篇80－100词的发言稿。
◆指出环境污染及资源浪费的危害；◆阐明环保的重要性；◆呼吁人们积极投身于环保行动中。
1、节约用水2、河湖中随意垂钓、游泳3、塑料饭盒4、垃圾投放5、纸张浪费
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________
第三部分
课标新题探究
九、短文填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
从下面方框中选出10个单词，用它们的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
he,
build,
run,
easy,
get,
stand,
visit,
invent,
say,
science,
France,
which
The
Eiffel
Tower
is
one
of
Europe’s
most
famous
buildings.
It
1
in
a
park
near
the
River
Seine
in
Paris.
It
is
300
meters
tall.
It
was
designed
and
2
by
Alexandre
Gustave
Eiffel
many
years
ago
for
the
Palls
Universal
Exposition.
“Universal”
here
means
“of
the
whole
world”,
and
“exposition”
is
a
place
where
new
3
new
kinds
of
art
and
new
kinds
of
food
are
displayed.
Eiffel
hoped
that
people
could
go
to
the
lop
of
the
tower
4
,
so
he
asked
Elisa
Otis
to
design
an
elevator.
Unfortunately,
the
5
government
did
not
like
the
first
design
6
Otis
showed
them,
and
they
would
not
let
him
put
the
elevator
in.
In
early
1889,
the
first
visitors
had
to
climb
hundreds
of
stars
7
to
the
top.
It’s
interesting
that
Eiffel
8
lived
in
the
tower
where
he
had
his
own
apartment.
Although
Eiffel
designed
the
tower
for
people
to
visit,
it
was
also
for
9
use.
Now,
the
tower
gets
much
more
10
than
another
famous
budding－the
Louvre(卢浮宫).
1____________
2___________
3____________
4____________
5____________
6____________
7___________
8____________
9____________
10____________
十、任务阅读（共10分，每小题1分）。
Dear
Fatima,
Thank
you
for
your
wonderful
birthday
present.
It
was
lovely!
And
I
so
much
enjoyed
reading
about
your
sister’s
party
and
looking
at
the
photos.
Your
English
is
very
good!
I
loved
it.
How
long
have
you
been
learning
We
learn
French
at
school,
but
I’m
afraid
none
of
us
is
very
good
at
it.
I
told
you
in
my
last
letter
that
we
were
going
to
Disneyland,
Paris.
Well,
we’ve
been!
It’s
not
so
large
as
Walt
Disney
World
in
Florida,
but
it’s
pretty
large
all
the
same.
It
was
so
crowded!
We
had
to
wait
a
long
time
to
go
on
the
rides
sometimes,
but
the
weather
was
very
fine,
though
not
so
sunny
as
in
Florida.
There
are
great
things
to
see.
Sleeping
Beauty’s
Castle
is
wonderful.
My
young
sister
Annette
like
that
best.
Then
there’s
Frontier
Land－you
feel
you
are
in
the
middle
of
an
old
Western
film.
My
elder
brother
Tom
liked
that.
I
loved
the
Pirates
of
the
Caribbean
area.
You
visit
it
in
a
boat.
You
really
think
you
are
living
in
those
exciting
times－but
without
the
danger
of
course!
There
are
some
great
rides
too.
I
think
the
best
is
the
Peter
Pan
ride.
You
seem
to
fly
through
the
air
over
London.
There’s
also
a
ride
that
actually
goes
upside
down.
I
didn’t
dare
go
on
it,
but
my
dad
did.
Another
thing－did
you
know
that
there
are
more
trees
in
Disneyland
than
in
the
whole
of
Paris－150,000
of
them!
My
mum
found
that
out.
Do
you
have
places
like
this
in
your
country
If
so,
what
are
they
like
I
know
so
little
about
you
as
yet(至今).
I’m
so
looking
forward
to
hearing
from
you
again.
I’m
sure
we’re
going
to
be
great
pen
friends.
Please
write
soon!
Love,
Louise
根据短文内容，回答下列问题。
1.
What
was
Louise’s
favorite
ride
_________________________________________________
2.
How
many
people
went
to
Disneyland
with
Louise
_________________________________________________
3.
What
does
Louise
say
about
her
visit
to
Disneyland
_________________________________________________
4.
Why
is
Louise
writing
to
Fatima
_________________________________________________
5.Which
Disneyland
World
is
larger,
the
one
in
Florida
or
the
one
in
Paris
_________________________________________________
【答案】
一、1.everywhere
2.typical
3.experiences
4.details
5.expression
6.trouble
7.expect
8.population
9.crowd
10.progress
11.hand
12.alongside
13.similar
14.ours
15.sunshine
16.length
17.various
18.guests
19.trousers
20.application
二、1-5
AABDC
6-10
ABACA
11-15
ADABB
三、1.is
full
of
fruit;
similar
to
ours
2.that
is
taking
photos
over
there
3.which
you
tried
out
just
now
4.Compared
with
last
year
5.have
a
word
with
四、1.Can
I
help
you
2.how
many
nights
3.Do
you
need/
want
single
rooms
or
double
4.What’s
the
price
of
a
double
room,
please
5.What’s
your
name,
please
五、1-5
CBCBA
6-10
BDCBA
六、1-5
BCDAD
6-10
BDACB
PAGE
17考点聚焦
一、要点梳理
必考词汇
◆1.
glad
glad是形容词，意为“高兴的,
欢喜的；使人高兴的；乐意的”等，例如：
I
am
glad
about
his
new
job.我为他的新工作感到高兴。
How
did
you
get
the
glad
news
你是如何得到这个令人高兴的消息的
『常用搭配』
⑴
I’ll
be
glad
to.我很乐意做。
例如：
—
Would
you
give
me
a
hand
请帮我一下好吗
—
Yes,
I’ll
be
glad
to.
好的，我很乐意。
⑵
I’m
glad
to
hear
that.
听到这消息我很高兴。例如：
—
The
party
is
a
great
success.
We’ve
had
a
good
time.晚会很成功，我们玩得很开心。
—
I’m
glad
to
hear
that.听到最好个消息我很高兴。
【链接中考】
（浙江省卷）
—
China
beat
Australia
1:0
at
the
17th
Women’s
Football
Asian
Cup
last
night.
—
Really
A
That’s
a
pity.
B
Don’t
mention
it
C
I’m
glad
to
hear
that
D
You’re
welcome
【答案】C
◆2.
over
⑴
用作副词，意为“结束,
了结”。例如：
The
war
was
all
over.
战争结束了。
His
suffering
will
soon
be
over.
他的苦难就要结束了。
⑵
用作介词，主要用法：
◇
(表示位置)在…的正上方;
在…的上面;
在…的上空
There
is
a
lamp
over
the
table.
桌子正上方有一盏灯。
◇
(表示方向)越过,
从一边至…的另一边
Instead
of
opening
the
gate,
we
climbed
over
it.
我们没有开门,
而是从门顶上爬过去的。
◇
(表示等级或数目)高于;
在…之上,
超过
I
am
not
in
charge
of
the
department;
I
have
two
people
over
me.
我不是这个部门的主管,
我还有两位上级。
【链接中考】
(河北省卷)
This
term
______
over.
The
summer
vacation
is
coming
in
two
weeks.
A.
is
B.
was
C.
has
been
D.
will
be
【答案】D
◆3.
taste
taste即可作名词也可作动词，作名词时意为“味道，品味，味觉”；作动词时意为“尝，体会”。例如：
The
medicine
has
a
bitter
taste.
这药有苦味。
She
has
good
taste
in
clothes.
她对服装有很好的审美眼光。
This
soup
tastes
of
chicken.
这汤里有鸡肉的味道。
【拓展】look,
sound,
smell,
taste,
feel的用法特点
当这几个词用作连系动词的时候，它们的意思分别是“看起来”、“听起来”、“闻起来”、“尝起来”、“摸起来”，其用法特点如下：
特点一
通常以被感觉的东西作主语，虽有被动词味，但不用被动语态。例如：
误：The
material
is
felt
nice.
这料子摸起来不错。(is
felt
应改为feels)
误：The
soup
is
tasted
delicious.
这汤味道不错。(is
tasted应改为tastes)
特点二
其后均可接介词
like。例如：
This
looks
(tastes,
smells,
feels)
like
an
orange.
这东西看起来(吃起来，闻起来，摸起来)像桔子。
另外，taste和smell后还可接介词of，表示“有…的味道”。例如：
It
tastes
[smells]
of
fish.
这东西有鱼的味道。
特点三
除look外均不用于进行时态(即使是look用于进行时态也不多见)。例如：
You
look
[are
looking]
tired
this
evening.
今晚你好像很累。
但是不说What
you
says
is
sounding
reasonable.
【注】feel
表示“感觉”可用于进行时。例如：
How
are
you
feeling
now
你现在感觉如何
I’m
feeling
terrible.
我感到难受极了。
另外，若以上动词用作实意动词，则可以用于进行时态。例如：
He
is
tasting
the
pudding.
他在尝布丁。
特点四
除look外，均不能接
to
be(即使是look后接to
be也不多见)。例如：
She
looks
(to
be)
the
best
person
for
this
job.
她似乎是做这项工作的最佳人选。
【注】feel
有时可表示“使人感觉起来…”。
It
feels
cold
in
here.
这儿很冷。
【链接中考】
(山东省潍坊市)
1.
The
cookies
______
good.
Could
I
have
some
more
A.
taste
B.
smell
C.
feel
D.
sound
【答案】A
（2010·江苏省扬州市）
2.
—
Yummy!
The
coffee
is
good.
—
That’s
right
.It
will
taste
_______
with
some
milk.
A.
good
B.
better
C.
best
D.
the
best
【答案】B
◆4.
fetch
fetch是及物动词，意为“接来(某人),
取来(某物)
”。例如：
Have
you
fetched
the
doctor
你把医生接来了吗
『辨析活用』bring,
carry,
fetch和take
◇bring表示“拿来，带来”，指从别处把某物带来。它表示单程，与take的方面相反。
This
little
girl
brought
me
here.
是这位小姑娘把我带到这里来的。
You’d
better
finish
the
work
today,
and
bring
it
tomorrow.
你最好今天把作业完成，明天把它带来。
◇carry表示“携带，搬运”，有负担的含义，它指从一地到另一地的运动，但不说明动作的方向。
The
box
is
too
heavy
for
me
to
carry.
这箱子太重了，我搬不动。
Why
do
you
carry
an
umbrella
on
such
a
fine
day
这样的好天气你为什么还带把雨伞？
◇fetch表示“去取来，去请来”，指到别处去把某物取来，或把某人接来。它表示往返，指双程。
He
rushed
home
to
fetch
his
raincoat.
他匆忙回家取回他的雨衣。
Run
and
fetch
the
doctor,
please.
请快跑去把医生接来。
◇take表示“拿走，带走”，指把某物从说话者所在地拿走，或把某人带走。它指单程，与bring的方向相反。
Take
the
letter
to
the
post
office.
把这封信带到邮局去。
I
want
to
take
some
books
to
the
classroom.
Could
you
help
me,
please
我要把一些书拿到教室里去。请你帮我一下，好吗？
【链接中考】
(山东德州市)
1.
I
asked
Danny
to
_______
me
my
book,
but
he
brought
me
his
book.
A.
take
B.
fetch
C.
carry
D.
match
【答案】B
（湖北省襄樊市）
2.
—
William,
please
remember
to
______
the
photo
taken
in
Canada
here
when
you
come
to
school
tomorrow.
I’d
like
to
have
a
look.
—
OK.
I’ll
introduce
something
about
it
to
you
myself.
A.
take
B.
pass
C.
bring
D.
carry
【答案】C
经典句型
◆1.
How
far
have
we
walked
how
far
是指距离的长短。如果想问“你家里这里多远？”就要用how
far。例如：
—
How
far
is
it
from
here
to
the
zoo
从这里到动物园有多远？
—
It’s
6
kilometres.
六公里。
【拓展】how
long,
how
soon,
how
often
◇
how
long意为“多久、多长时间”主要是对一段时间进行提问，答语通常是(
for)
three
days／weeks／months等时间段，它可用于各种时态。
—
How
long
did
the
meeting
last？这个会开了多长时间？
—
About
half
an
hour.
大约半小时。
◇
how
soon意为“还要多久”，是对从某个基本时间到将来某动作结束或其动作发生这段时间提问，常用在一般将来时态的句子中，答语通常是“in十段时间”。
—
How
soon
will
the
road
be
finished？这条路要多久才能完工？
—
In
a
few
months.
几个月之内。
◇
how
often意为“隔多久”，用来提问在某一特定的时间进行某个动作的次数，答语通常是always,
usually,
often,
sometimes,
once／twice
a
week／month等。
　　—
How
often
do
you
visit
your
uncle
你要隔多久去拜访你叔叔一次？
—
Once
a
week.每周一次。
【链接中考】
(上海市)
1.
—
______
is
it
from
here
to
the
railway
station
—
About
ten
kilometers.
A.
How
far
B.
How
fast
C.
How
soon
D.
How
often
【答案】A
（山东省菏泽市）
2.
—
______
can
we
get
there
—
In
five
minutes.
A.
How
often
B.
How
far
C.
How
soon
D.
How
long
【答案】C
◆2.
We
had
better
get
you
to
hospital.
⑴
had
better意为“最好”、“应该”，后接动词原形，与情态动词should用法相似，其中的had通常缩略为’d。例如：
You’d
better
get
some
sleep.
你最好去睡一会儿。
We
had
better
go
before
it
rains.
我们最好在下雨前就去。
⑵
had
better构成否定式时，通常将not置于had
better之后(而不是had之后)；而构成疑问式时，则通常将had(而不是had
better)置于主语之前。例如：
I’d
better
not
disturb
him.
我最好别去打扰他。
What
had
we
better
do
我们最好怎么办
【注】在否定疑问句或反意疑问句中可将not与had连用。例如：
Hadn’t
we
better
go
now
我们是不是现在就去呢
◇有关had
better的几点用法说明：
【链接中考】
(江苏省宿迁市)
1.
—
Do
you
mind
if
I
smoke
here
—
______
You
can
go
to
smoke
in
the
next
door.
A.
Yes,
please.
B.
Never
mind.
C.
You’d
better
not.
D.
Of
course
not.
【答案】C
（淄博市）
2.
—
May
I
listen
to
the
music
here,
Mr.
White

—
Sorry,
you’d
better
______ it
like
that.

A.
not
to
do
B.
not
do
C.
don’t
do
D.
not
do
to
(杭州市)
3.
A
mobile
phone
of
this
type
costs
too
much.
You’d
better
_______.
A.
wait
B.
waiting
C.
waited
D.
to
wait
◆3.
I’m
sorry,
I
can’t
eat
this.
sorry是I’m
sorry的省略式。sorry是用于表达由于某种过失或办不成某事的一种歉意。常用在以下语境中：
⑴
当自己犯了错误而给对方可能带来麻烦时。
　　I’m
sorry.
I’m
late.
对不起，我来晚了。
⑵
当别人向你请求某事，而你无法满足或爱奠能助时。
　　—
Can
you
spell
it,
please
请问，你会拼写它吗？
　　—
Sorry,
I
can’t.
对不起，我不会。
【拓展】Excuse
me,
I’m
sorry和
I
beg
your
pardon
三者都有“对不起、请原谅”等意思，但用法有别。
◇下列情景要用Excuse
me：
①
向别人问路、问时间时。
Excuse
me!
Where
is
the
washroom
请问，洗手间在哪里？
②
当你询问别人是否准许你做事时。
Excuse
me!
Can
I
put
my
bike
here
对不起，我能把自行车放在这儿吗？
③
当你向别人打听某人（某事）时或当你要证实对方是不是某人时。
—
Excuse
me!
Are
you
Mr.
Black
打扰了，你是布莱克先生吗？
—
No,
I’m
not.
不，我不是。
◇
I’m
sorry常用来表示自己犯了某种过失，也可以表示“遗憾”，如对别人的不幸有所表示或不能满足对方的要求等。I’m
sorry
for
giving
you
so
much
trouble.对不起，给你添了这么多麻烦。
I’m
sorry
I
didn’t
do
the
work
well.
很遗憾，我没把工作做好。
Sorry,
you
can’t
come
in.对不起（很抱歉），你不能进来。
◇
I
beg
your
pardon可用于（正式场合）：①做错事道歉；②谈话中提出异议以前；③没听清对方的话，希望他重复一遍时（可说
Beg
pardon或
Pardon，可用问号，说时用升调）；④（以不友好的语气说）不相信对方的话是真实的；例如：
I
beg
your
pardon
for
coming
late.
请原谅，我来迟了。
I
beg
your
pardon
but
that
is
my
coat.
对不起，可那是我的上衣呀。
—
The
third
answer
is
B.
第三个答案是
B。
—
I
beg
your
pardon.（Beg
pardon.
Pardon,）对不起，请再说一遍好吗？
【链接中考】
（山东省聊城市）
1.
If
you
make
a
mistake
,just
say,
“______.”
A.
Don’t
worry
B.
Sorry
C.
It’s
a
great
pity
D.
I
don’t
care
【答案】B
（福建省晋江市）
2.
当你在公共汽车上不小心踩了他人的脚时，你应该说
________以示道歉.
A.
Excuse
me.
B.
Never
mind.
C.
I’m
sorry.
【答案】C
◆4.
“No,
thanks,
it
was
delicious,
but
I’ve
had
enough.
No,
thanks.意为“不啦，谢谢”，用于婉转地拒绝别人提出的请求、建议或某种看法。
例如：
—
Would
you
like
to
have
another
cake
你再来一块蛋糕吗？
—
No,
thanks.
I’ve
had
two.
That’s
enough.
不啦，谢谢。我吃两块了，饱了。
【链接中考】
（福建省晋江市，附加，2）
1.
就餐时，朋友问你要不要加点汤，而你已吃饱，你会说
______
来委婉拒绝.
A.
No,
thanks.
B.
No,
no,
no.
C.
Why
not
【答案】A
(江苏省无锡市)
2.
—
Would
you
like
me
to
take
you
to
the
new
shopping
centre
—
______.
I’ve
been
there
once.
A.
No,
thanks
B.
No
problem
C.
Yes,
I
think
so
D.
That’s
very
kind
of
you
【答案】A
◆5.
You
may
find
it
earlier
than
you
expect
because
Chinese
people
…
find
it十adj.十to
do
sth.意为“发现做某事……”，it是形式宾语，真正的宾语为to
do
sth.。
动词不定式作宾语，后面又有一个形容词作宾补时，习惯上用形式宾语it代替，而把动词不定式移到句子后面去。能接“it十形容词（宾补）＋动词不定式”结构的动词有think，make，find，feel等。例如：
He
thought
it
hard
to
pass
the
exam.他认为通过这次考试很难。
I
feel
it
hard
to
keep
up
with
my
classmates
in
study
and
sometimes
I
lose
heart.
我感觉再学习上很难赶上同学们，而且有时我失去信心。
【链接中考】
（四川省巴中市）
The
boy
found
______
hard
to
get
along
with
the
other
classmates.
A.
this
B.
that
C.
it
【答案】C
◆6.
…
and
I’m
proud
of
what
I’ve
learnt.
be
proud
of…
以……为荣；以……自豪。例如：
He
was
proud
of
what
he
had
done.
他因自己所作的事感到自豪。
I
am
be
proud
of
this
works.
这是我的得意之作。
【链接中考】
（天津市）
Shen
Xue
and
Zhao
Hongbo
won
the
gold
medal
for
China
so
we’re
proud
_____them.
A.
in
B.
on
C.
of
D.
for
【答案】C
◆6.
I
don’t
think
it’d
really
difficult
to
learn
English,
…
这是一个表示否定转移的句型。
⑴
当think,
believe,
suppose,
imagine,
expect等动词后接的宾语从句为含有not的否定句时，该否定应移至主句，即否定主句的谓语动词。例如：
　　I
don’t
think
it
will
rain
tomorrow.
　　We
don’t
expect
our
football
team
will
win
the
World
Cup.
　　●需要特别说明的是：涉及到转移的只是not，not以外的其它否定词，如no,
never,
hardly,
few,
little,
seldom等，不必转移。例如：
　　I
believe
my
brother
has
never
been
late
for
school.
　　We
can
imagine
birds
can
hardly
live
without
these
woods.
⑵
反意疑问句的构成视情况不同有两种：
　　think,
believe,
suppose,
imagine,
expect等动词后接宾语从句构成的主从复合句在构成反意疑问句时，视情况不同有两种不同的构成方式。
　　①
当主句的主语为第一人称时，其后的简短问句应与从句相一致。例如：
　　I
expect
our
English
teacher
will
be
back
this
weekend,
won’t
she/he
　　We
suppose
you
have
finished
the
project,
haven’t
you
　　●值得注意的是，当这些动词后接的宾语从句的否定转移到主句时，其仍属否定句，故其后的简短问句应用肯定式，而非否定式。例如：
　　I
don’t
believe
that
he
can
translate
this
book,
can
he
　　We
don’t
imagine
the
twins
have
arrived,
have
they
　　此类句子的回答同“前否后肯”型反意疑问句一样，如上述后一个句子，若双胞胎已经到了，则回答为“Yes,
they
have.”；若尚未到达，使用“No,
they
haven’t.”。
②
当主句的主语为第二、三人称时，其后的简短问句则应与主句相一致。例如：
　　Your
sister
supposes
she
needs
no
help,
doesn’t
she
　　You
thought
they
could
have
completed
the
project,
didn’t
you
【链接中考】
（湖北省十堰市）
—
The
exam
was
very
easy,
wasn’t
it
—
Yes,
but
I
don’t
think
______
would
pass
it.
A.
somebody
B.
anybody
C.
everybody
D.
nobody
【答案】C
◆7.
I
hope
so.
在英语中，某些表示想法的动词或结构后，可以接用替代词so（用于肯定）和not（用于否定），用以代替前面提到的内容（即that
从句），这类动词和结构主要的有：think，believe，hope，
suppose，guess，imagine，expect，be
afraid
等。例如：
①—
Is
that
Mary？那是玛丽吗？
—
Yes,
I
think
so.
我想是的吧。
—
No,
I
don’t
think
so．我想不是吧。
②—
Will
he
come
to
the
party？他来参加晚会吗？
—
I
hope
so.
我希望他来。
—
I
hope
not.
我希望他不来。
③—
Can
you
finish
it
in
time
你能及时完成吗？
—
I’m
afraid
so.
恐怕可以吧。
—
I’m
afraid
not.
恐怕不行。
【链接中考】
（江苏省南京市）
1.
—
Are
you
confident
about
this
evening’s
performance,
Katie
—
_______.
I’m
well
prepared
and
feel
I’ve
got
everything
ready.
A.I
hope
so
B.
It’s
hard
to
say
C.
Sure,
I
am
D.I
am
afraid
not
【答案】A
（湖北省黄石市）
2.
—
Could
you
go
shopping
with
go
to
Wuhan
tomorrow.
—
______
.
My
father
and
I
will
to
Wuhan
tomorrow.
A.
I
think
so
B.
Yes,
I
hope
so
C.
I’m
afraid
so
D.
Sorry,
I’m
afraid
not
【答案】D
二、知识全练
第一部分
基础知识运用
一、词汇。（共15分，每小题1分）
A)根据句意及所给汉语提示，写出句中所缺单词(每空一词)。
1.
They
weigh
five
kilos.
So
I’ll
be
just
under
the
______(重量).
2.
They
came
out
of
the
tunnel
and
thankfully
______(呼吸)
the
fresh
air.
3.
The
dishes
you
make
are
very
much
to
my
______(口味).
4.
“There’s
no
smoke
without
fire”,
as
the
______(谚语)
goes.
5.
You
will
listen
to
a
short
______(对话)
between
2
people.
6.
Last
year
was
really
bad
for
the
car
______(工业)
in
Europe.
7.
The
are
talking
about
the
______(重要性)
of
protecting
nature.
8.
______(无论哪里)
the
beer
is
kept,
the
temperature
must
be
carefully
controlled.
9.
I
will
try
to
reach
the
highest
______(水平)
of
Chinese.
10.
This
will
be
a
really
special
gift
for
them
to
______(珍视)
for
always!
B)根据句意，用所给单词的正确形式填空。
11.
This
actor
is
famous
not
only
for
his
talent
but
also
for
his
______(kind).
12.
Her
parents
are
very
happy
about
her
______(decide)
of
becoming
a
lawyer.
13.
She
loves
to
play
all
kinds
of
______(music)
instruments.
14.
Susan
has
been
the
______(own)
of
the
corner
shop
for
the
last
10
years.
15.—
Would
you
like
Mexican
or
______(India)
food
—
I’m
easy.
You
choose.
二、选择填空（共15分，每小题1分）。
1.
—
______
you
good
luck
in
the
new
year!
—
The
same
to
you.
A.
Hope
B.
Want
C.
Wish
D.
Like
2.
—
What
is
a
microwave
oven
used
for
—
Oh,
it’s
used
for
_____
food.
A.
cook
B.
cooking
C.
to
cook
D.
cooked
3.
Teenagers
have
all
kinds
of
dreams.
,
some
students
would
like
to
go
to
the
moon
some
day.
A.
After
all
B.
At
once
C.
In
fact
D.
For
example
4.
—
How
much
does
it
cost
to
build
the
school
library
—
Five
_____
Yuan.
A.
million
B.
millions
C.
millions
of
D.
millions
of
5.
—
Is
there
______
that
you
want
to
say
to
us
—
No,
nothing.
A.
something
else
B.
else
something
C.
anything
else
D.
else
anything
6.
—
What
do
you
______
your
hometown
—
I
love
it
very
much.
A.
look
at
B.
talk
about
C.
think
of
D.
look
like
7.
—
Do
you
remember
that
accident,
Danny
—
Of
course.
It
was
terrible.
I
will
never
forget
it
______
it
happened
so
long
ago.
A.
only
if
B.
even
though
C.
only
when
D.
ever
since
8.
—
Now,
where
is
my
school
bag
—
______!
We’ll
be
late
for
school.
A.
Just
a
minute
B.
Take
it
easy
C.
Don’t
worry
D.
Come
on
9.
Amy,
I’ll
be
on
holiday
for
a
week.
Could
you
help
me
______
my
dog.
A.
look
for
B.
look
at
C.
look
after
D.
look
over
10.—
Who’s
the
little
baby
in
the
photo,
Susan
—
It’s
me.
This
photo
______
ten
years
ago.
A.
takes
B.
is
taken
C.
took
D.
was
taken
11.
______
more
information
about
the
trip,
you
can
go
to
A.
Find
B.
Finding
C.
To
find
D.
Found
12.
I
find
______
difficult
to
finish
the
work
on
time.
We
only
have
three
hours
left.
A.
it
B.
that
C.
its
D.
this
13.—
What
are
you
looking
for
—
I
am
looking
for
the
book
______
I
bought
yesterday.
A.
who
B.
which
C.
whose
D.
where
14.—
Excuse
me,
where
is
the
clothing
store
—
______.
I
don’t
know.
A.
Thank
you
B.
Hello
C.
I’m
sorry
D.
You’re
welcome
15.—
Would
you
like
another
cake
—
_____.
I’m
full.
A.
Yes,
please
B.
No,
thanks
C.
You’re
welcome
D.
Here
you
are
三、根据汉语完成下列句子，每空一词。（共10分，每小题2分）。
1.不允许任何人参加我们的晚会。
　No
one
else
______
______
______
______
to
our
party.
2.河水受到污染，所以这条河里鱼越来越少。
　The
river
______
_______,
so
there
are
______
and
______
fish
in
it.
3.据说他们从小就认识。
　It’s
said
that
they
______
______
______
______
since
their
childhood
4.在中国要求学生学习英语。
　High
school
students
______
______
______
______
English
in
China.
5.他们终于想到了一个如何学好英语的好办法。
　At
last,
they
came
up
with
_______
_______
_______
_______
learn
English
well.
四、完成对话。（共10分，每小题1分）。
A)根据对话内容，选用方框中适当的句子补全对话，其中两项为多余选项。
A:
Can
you
tell
me
a
little
about
Mexico
City
B:
(1)________
What
would
you
like
to
know
A:
Well,
what’s
a
good
time
to
visit
B:
(2)________
The
weather
is
always
nice.
A:
Oh,
good!
(3)________
B:
Well,
you
should
visit
the
National
Museum
and
go
to
the
Palace
of
the
Fine
Arts.
A:
(4)________
B:
Oh,
you
shouldn’t
miss
The
Pyramid
of
the
Sun.
(5)________
A:
It
all
sounds
really
exciting.
A.
And
what
should
I
see
there B.
Of
course
not.C.
What
else D.
Anytime.E.
Sure
I
can.F.
Would
you
like
to
go
somewhere G.
It’s
very
interesting.
B)根据下面的对话情景，在每个空白处填上一个适当的句子，使对话的意思连贯、完整。
(Jill
is
not
feeling
well.
So
her
mother
takes
her
to
the
hospital.)
Jill:
Good
morning,
doctor.
Doctor:
Good
morning.
(6)__________________
Jill:
This
morning
I
had
a
pain
in
my
head.
Doctor:
(7)__________________
Jill:
I’m
feeling
even
worse.
Doctor:
Let
me
take
your
temperature.
It’s
a
cold.
(8)__________________.
Jill:
Really
But
I
don’t
feel
any
better
now.
Doctor:
Did
you
eat
anything
for
breakfast
Jill:
No.
(9)__________________.
Doctor:
Well,
take
this
medicine
three
times
a
day.
(10)__________________.
Jill:
OK.
Thank
you.
第二部分
综合能力提升
五、完形填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
Living
in
a
big
city
is
stressful.
People
1
in
big
cities
are
often
very
busy
and
have
to
work
long
2
.
Students,
too,
lead
busy
lives.
They
have
to
study
and
get
ready
for
tests
and
examinations.
People
are
often
very
tired
and
stressed
out,
3
they
get
sick
easily.
This
stressful
way
of
living
is
not
good
4
people’s
health.
People
know
that
their
diet－the
kinds
of
they
eat
and
drink
is
important
for
health.
They
know
that
5
and
sleep
are
important,
6
.
7
and
healthy,
people
should
eat
more
fresh
fruit
and
vegetables.
They
should
eat
more
fish
and
chicken,
and
they
should
not
eat
so
much
red
meat,
like
lamb
and
beef.
They
should
also
not
eat
too
much
junk
food
like
hamburgers
and
hot
dogs.
People
should
also
8
at
least
eight
glasses
of
water
each
day.
They
should
not
drink
too
much
soda.
People
should
also
try
to
exercise
a
bit
every
day,
and
9
should
try
to
sleep
for
seven
to
eight
hours
each
night.
People
should
relax
10
they
can
in
their
free
time
or
on
vacation.
1.
A.
lived
B.
will
live
C.
living
D.
not
living
2.
A.
years
B.
days
C.
hours
D.
minutes
3.
A.
or
B.
but
C.
and
D.
because
4.
A.
for
B.
at
C.
with
D
of
5.
A
exercise
B.
exercises
C.
exercising
D.
to
exercise
6.
A.
too
B.
yet
C.
either
D.
also
7.
A.
Being
strong
B.
To
be
strong
C.
Not
being
strong
D.
Having
been
strong
8.
A.
drink
B.
buy
C.
use
D.
sell
9.
A.
they
B.
them
C.
their
D.
themselves
10.
A.
that
B.
when
C.
where
D.
which
六、阅读理解（共10分，每小题1分）。
A
Want
to
listen
to
your
favourite
CD
in
the
garden
without
disturbing
the
neighbours
Try
our
new
cordless
radio
headphone.
These
new
headphones
allow
you
to
receive
your
favourite
radio
station
or
TV
programme
without
disturbing
others.
The
sound
quality
is
excellent
and
the
lightweight
headset
is
so
comfortable
that
you
won’t
notice
you’re
wearing
it.
You
don’t
even
need
to
be
in
the
same
room
to
enjoy
your
favourite
sounds.
Just
connect
the
special
sender
with
your
TV
or
radio!
◆The
sound
goes
straight
to
your
headphones
and
no
one
else
will
hear
it.
◆The
sound
signal
is
so
strong
that
it
can
go
through
walls
and
doors!
◆There’s
a
sound
control
on
the
headset
itself.
◆Relax
in
your
garden.
Listen
to
your
favourite
CD
without
disturbing
the
neighbours.
Order
yours
today!
Place
your
order
on
our
24-hour
hotline.
01044
232467-24-hour
ordering
service
7
days
a
week.
根据短文内容，选择最佳答案。
1.
What
does
this
advertisement
advise
people
to
buy
A.
CD-ROMs.
B.
Radios.
C.
TV
sets.
D.
Headphones.
2.
Which
of
the
following
is
True
about
the
headphones
A.
The
headset
doesn’t
weigh
very
much.
B.
You
have
to
take
the
sender
wherever
you
go.
C.
You
can’t
use
the
headphone
in
a
room
away
from
where
you
are.
D.
If
you
want
to
turn
the
music
up,
you
need
to
go
back
where
the
CD
or
TV
is.
3.
What
does
the
underlined
word
“cordless”
most
probably
mean
in
______
Chinese
A.
相连的
B.
无线的
C.
时尚的
D.
灵敏的
4.
How
does
the
sound
go
to
your
headphone
A.
It
goes
straight.
B.
No
one
else
hear
it.
C.
It
is
strong.
D.
It
can
go
through
walls.
5.
When
can
you
ring
the
hotline
if
you
want
to
buy
one
A.
At
weekends.
B.
Right
at
the
moment.
C.
During
weekdays.
D.
At
any
time
of
the
day
and
night.
B
Life
in
the
twenty-first
century
The
World
Future
Society
is
a
group
of
people
from
more
than
80
countries
who
are
interested
in
how
modern
technology
is
making
our
world
better,
and
who
write
reports
about
how
it
will
change
our
lives.
The
things
that
we
will
be
able
to
do
in
the
twenty-first
century
should
help
us
live
better
lives
in
many
ways,
at
home
and
at
work,
in
our
own
country
and
around
the
world.
Here
are
just
some
of
them,
put
into
five
groups:
◇People
People
may
live
for
up
to
120
years
and
use
new
technology
to
help
when
people
go
blind,
deaf
and
have
other
problems.
The
number
of
people
over
a
hundred
years
old
could
go
from
135,000
today
to
2.2
million
people
by
2050.
By
2015
people
think
that
100
million
workers
will
be
able
to
work
from
home
for
a
company
in
a
different
country
by
using
the
Internet.
◇Money
Worldwide
e-businesses(电子商务)
will
become
even
more
successful
with
online
shops
that
sell
special
products
for
each
person,
which
will
be
brought
to
their
house
the
next
day.
◇Environment
The
technology
for
making
energy
from
wind
and
the
Sun
is
growing
very
quickly.
In
the
future
wind
and
Sun
energy
could
become
much
cheaper
and
many
more
countries
could
use
it.
This
would
be
very
useful
in
poor
countries.
The
air
in
big
cities
would
also
become
much
cleaner
and
healthier
as
a
result.
◇Society
and
culture
The
Internet
will
help
to
create
more
worldwide
friendships.
Families
may
spend
more
time
together
as
people
will
be
able
to
do
24-hour
online
banking
and
shopping.
◇Technology
The
new
science
of
“nanotechnology”
(very
small
robots
or
machines)
will
make
all
sorts
of
products
smaller
and
lighter.
Very,
very
small
machines
could
take
away
rubbish,
make
things
in
factories,
and
help
inside
the
human
body
by
taking
away
fat.
By
2010
people
will
be
able
to
wear
these
small
machines
that
look
like
watches,
which
will
give
them
lots
of
information
about
their
body
and
keep
them
healthy.
根据短文内容，选择最佳答案。
6.
What
does
the
World
Future
Society
do
A.
Look
at
how
technology
will
make
people
happy.
B.
Look
at
how
technology
will
change
the
world.
C.
Make
technology
work
better
for
themselves.
D.
Make
small
machines
to
make
us
healthier.
7.
How
will
technology
help
people
A.
Help
all
people
live
for
over
120
years.
B.
Help
disabled
people
to
get
jobs.
C.
Make
people
healthier
and
live
longer.
D.
Help
workers
to
use
the
Internet.
8.
How
will
people
go
shopping
A.
In
special
shops.
B.
Using
the
Internet
at
certain
times.
C.
Using
the
Internet
any
time
of
the
day.
D.
Using
nanotechnology.
9.
How
will
technology
help
the
environment
A.
Poor
countries
will
have
enough
energy.
B.
Wind
energy
will
be
cheaper
than
Sun
energy.
C.
We
will
not
need
wind
and
Sun
energy.
D.
Wind
and
Sun
energy
will
be
cheaper.
10.
The
new
science
of
“nanotechnology”
will
______.
A.
drive
small
machines
to
work
for
people
B.
make
good-quality
watches
C.
allow
people
to
eat
more
D.
make
very
tiny
products
七、书面表达（15分）
为了宣传六月六日“全国爱眼日”，《英语周报》正在组织征文活动。请你结合生活实际写一篇题目为“How
to
Protect
Our
Eyes”的征文稿，内容要点包括：
1、眼睛的重要性；
2、保护眼睛的措施；
注意：词数80词左右。
How
to
Protect
Our
Eyes
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
第三部分
课标新题探究
九、短文填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
根据材料内容及首字母提示，写出所缺单词，补全材料。
Hopes
and
Dreams
Kids
are
excited
about
what
the
future
has
in
store
for
them.
Nine
out
of
ten
kids
believe
it
is
p
1
to
be
anything
they
want
when
they
grow
up.
Most
kids
a
2
have
a
career(职业)
in
mind.
G
3
dream
of
becoming
teachers,
actresses
and
fashion
designers.
Boys
have
their
sights
set
on
careers
in
s
4
,
science,
video-game
design
and
medicine.
B
5
girls
and
boys
think
that
enjoying
your
job
is
more
important
than
m
6
a
lot
of
money.
But
kids
also
said
that
money
matters
too.
I
7
kids
could
have
any
one
wish
allowed,
one
in
four
said
they’d
ask
for
money.
Why
Many
kids
want
to
help
their
f
8
.
“I
wish
to
win
the
lottery
so
my
mom
wouldn’t
have
to
work
so
m
9
,”
said
one
girl.
“I
wish
that
my
family
had
enough
m
10
not
to
worry
anymore,”
said
another.
1.
________
2.
________
3.
________
4.
________
5.
________
6.
________
7.
________
8.
________
9.
________
10.
________
十、任务阅读（共10分，每小题1分）。
Traveling
to
Brazil
How
much
do
you
know
about
Brazil
You
might
think
of
football,
samba
(桑巴)
and
the
Amazon.
But
there
is
a
lot
more
to
this
country:
its
wonderful
land,
history
and
culture.
On
September
7,
1822,
Brazil
won
its
independence
(独立)
from
Portugal.
So
that
day
is
Brazil’s
National
Day.
It
is
the
largest
country
in
South
America
and
has
the
second
longest
river
in
the
world.
It
is
called
the
Amazon.
The
river
is
6
440
kilometres
long
and
runs
through
the
world’s
largest
rainforest.
The
rainforest
is
home
to
between
800
000
and
5
million
kinds
of
plants
and
animals.
But
be
careful
when
you
swim
because
the
biggest
snake,
the
Anaconda(大水蟒),
and
the
most
terrible
fish,
the
Piranha(水虎鱼)
live
there.
Brazilians
love
sports,
especially
football.
Many
great
players
were
born
in
Broil,
like
Ronaldo,
Ronaldinho
and
Rivaldo.
Football
is
played
everywhere.
It
is
so
popular
that
schools
and
businesses
close
during
their
important
matches.
The
Brazilians
also
love
dancing
veer
much.
The
national
dance
is
the
samba.
Samba
is
a
very
lively
and
fun
dance.
Every
year
in
February
or
March,
there
is
the
Carnival(狂欢节).
This
is
a
time
for
parade(游行)
and
partying.
People
go
out
and
dance
in
the
streets.
Dancers
dress
up
in
colourful
clothes
and
go
through
the
streets
on
big
cars
called
floats(彩车).
Tens
of
thousands
of
people
watch
the
dancing.
If
you
want
to
be
part
of
the
Carnival,
then
find
a
chance
to
travel
to
Brazil.
根据短文内容，回答下列问题。
1.
What
does
Brazil
have
besides
football,
samba
and
the
Amen
_________________________________________________
2.
What
day
is
Brazil’s
National
Day
Why
_________________________________________________
3.
What
is
the
second
longest
river
in
the
world
_________________________________________________
4.
What
do
Brazilians
do
when
there
are
importer
matches
_________________________________________________
5.
What
is
the
Carnival
_________________________________________________
【答案】
七、One
possible
version:
How
to
Protect
Our
Eyes
The
eye
is
the
window
of
our
mind.
We
use
our
eyes
to
see
everything
around
us.
Without
eyes,
nothing
is
left
beside
you
but
darkness.
How
to
protect
our
eyes
It’s
not
right
to
keep
your
eyes
working
for
a
long
time.
You’d
better
not
read
in
strong
or
poor
light.
Don’t
read
in
bed
or
a
moving
bus.
Remember
to
keep
your
books
away
from
your
eyes
for
about
a
foot
and
do
eye
exercises
every
day.
What’s
more,
a
balanced
diet
is
necessary.
Follow
my
advice
and
form
a
good
habit.
It’s
time
to
say
goodbye
to
thick
glasses.
八、1.possible
2.already
3.Girls
4.sports
5.both
6.making
7.If
8.families
9.much
10.money
九、1.
It
has
wonderful
land,
history
and
culture.
2.
September
7,1822.
Because
Brazil
won
its
independence
from
Portugal
on
that
day.
3.
The
Amen.
4.
Schools
and
businesses
close
to
watch
their
matches.
5.
B
is
a
time
for
parades
and
partying.
PAGE
1考点聚焦
一、要点梳理
必考词汇
◆1.
smell
◇表示“闻
(到)”、“感觉到”，是实义动词，注意以下用法：
⑴
其主语一般应是“人”或“动物”；
⑵
不用于进行式；
⑶
通常
(但不一定)与
can,
could
连用；
⑷
可接名
(代)词或“宾语＋现在分词”
(但通常不接“宾语＋动词原形”)。
例如：Can
you
smell
smoke
你闻到烟味了吗
Does
[Can]
a
bee
smell
蜜蜂有嗅觉吗
I
(can)
smell
something
burning.
我闻到了烧焦的气味。
若是强调正在“闻”、“嗅”的动作，有时也可以用于进行式：
He
was
smelling
the
flowers.
她在闻花香。
◇表示“闻起来”，是连系动词，注意以下用法：
⑴
主语一般应是被闻的对象；
⑵
通常接形容词
(而不是副词)作表语；
⑶
虽有被动意味，但只能用主动形式
(因连系动词是不及物动词)
例如：这些花闻起来很香。
正：The
flowers
smell
good.
误：The
flowers
smell
well.
◇有时单独使用，通常指发出不好闻的气味，有时也指有香味
(视具体的语境而定)。
例如：This
egg
smells.
这只蛋发臭了。
Do
the
flowers
smell
那花有香味吗
◇与介词of连用，表示“有…的气味”。
例如：Babies
smell
of
milk.
婴儿都有股乳香味。
【拓展】look,
sound,
smell,
taste,
feel的用法特点
当这几个词用作连系动词的时候，它们的意思分别是“看起来”、“听起来”、“闻起来”、“尝起来”、“摸起来”，其用法特点如下：
特点一
通常以被感觉的东西作主语，虽有被动词味，但不用被动语态。例如：
误：The
material
is
felt
nice.
这料子摸起来不错。(is
felt
应改为feels)
误：The
soup
is
tasted
delicious.
这汤味道不错。(is
tasted应改为tastes)
特点二
其后均可接介词like。例如：
This
looks
(tastes,
smells,
feels)
like
an
orange.
这东西看起来(吃起来，闻起来，摸起来)像桔子。
另外，taste和smell后还可接介词of，表示“有…的味道”。例如：
It
tastes
[smells]
of
fish.
这东西有鱼的味道。
特点三
除look外均不用于进行时态(即使是look用于进行时态也不多见)。例如：
You
look
[are
looking]
tired
this
evening.
今晚你好像很累。
【注】feel
表示“感觉”可用于进行时。例如：
How
are
you
feeling
now
你现在感觉如何
I’m
feeling
terrible.
我感到难受极了。
另外，若以上动词用作实意动词，则可以用于进行时态。
He
is
tasting
the
pudding.
他在尝布丁。
特点四
除look外，均不能接
to
be(即使是look后接to
be也不多见)。例如：
She
looks
(to
be)
the
best
person
for
this
job.
她似乎是做这项工作的最佳人选。
【链接中考】
（广西南宁）
—
Something
______
terrible.
What
goes
bad
in
the
kitchen
—The
meat.
A.
looks
B.
tastes
C.
smells
D.
feels
【答案】C
◆2.
must
must无时态和人称变化,
后面接不带
to
的动词不定式。
⑴
必须,
应当（表示义务、命令或必要）
We
must
keep
our
word.我们必须遵守诺言。
You
must
not
do
it.你不可以做那件事。
由must引起的一般疑问句的否定回答要用needn’t。
—
Must
I
come
here
tomorrow
我明天必须来这里吗？
—
No,
you
needn’t.
不必。
⑵
一定；必定是（表示推断、推测）
You
must
be
hungry.
你一定饿了。
There
must
be
a
mistake.
准是弄错了。
『辨析活用』must和have
to
①must也作“必须”解，但它所强调的是说话者的主观愿望。
I
must
go
now,
or
I’ll
be
late.
我必须现在就走，否则就迟到了。
②
have
to是情态动词，意为“必须，不得不”，后面跟动词原形。强调由于外在的客观原因而使主语必须做某事。使用时，各种句型的变化方法与行为动词相同。
It’s
getting
dark,
I
have
to
go
home
now.天黑了，我得现在回家。
【链接中考】
（天津市）
1.
—
Can
I
wear
any
clothes
I
like
to
school
—
No,
you
can’t
.You
______
wear
a
uniform.
A.
might
B.
must
C.
will
D.
would
【答案】B
（四川省巴中市）
2.
You
______
be
tired
after
playing
sports
for
a
long
time
without
a
rest.
A.
must
B.
need
C.
can’t
【答案】A
◆3.
excited
excited是形容词，意为“兴奋的,
激动的”。例如：
He
was
getting
excited
just
thinking
about
the
trip.
一想到那次旅行他就兴奋。
I
was
quite
excited
to
hear
that.
听到那事我非常激动。
『辨析活用』excited和exciting
◇excited表示“兴奋的，激动的”，指人、物对……感到兴奋。例如：
Are
you
excited
about
going
to
Beijing
你要去北京了，感到兴奋吗？
◇exciting表示"令人兴奋的；使人激动的"，指人、事、物本身让人兴奋、激动。例如：
He
told
us
an
exciting
story
yesterday.
他昨天给我们讲了一个使人激动的故事。
【拓展】一般情况下，是人做主语，用v-ed；物做主语，用v-ing，其他类似的词，如surprising
/surprised；interesting/interested
等。
【链接中考】
（福建省福州市）
1.
—
Lin
Tao
,why
are
you
so
_______
—
Because
Wang
Meng
got
three
gold
medals
at
the
Winter
Olympics.
A.
excited
B.
angry
C.
disappointed
【答案】A
（湖北省荆门市）
2.
He
was
so
▲
when
he
heard
the
▲
news
that
he
got
the
first
prize
in
the
contest.
A.
exciting,
exciting
B.
exciting,
excited
C.
excited,
excited
D.
excited,
exciting
【答案】D
◆4.
between
between介词，
(表示位置)在…之间;
在…之中；
(表示时间)在…与…的一段时间内;
在…的间隔中。例如：
I
will
come
between
twelve
and
one
o’clock.
我会在12点至1点之间来。
『辨析活用』between和among
一般说来，among
用于三者或三者以上的“在…中间”，其宾语通常是一个表示笼统数量或具有复数(或集合)意义的名词或代词；而between
主要指两者之间，其宾语往往是表示两者的名词或代词，或者是由
and
连接的两个人或物。例如：
They
hid
themselves
among
the
trees.
他们躲在树林中。
There
was
a
fight
between
the
two
boys.
这两个孩子打过一次架。
【链接中考】
（河南省）
1.
If
you
try
to
sit
on
two
chairs，you
will
fall
them
.For
life，you
must
choose
one
chair．
A
between
B
under
C
among
D
into
【答案】A
（福建省晋江市）
2.
—
Peter,
can
you
tell
me
the
differences
______
the
four
words
—
Sorry,
I
don’t
know.
A.
between
B.
among
C.
for
【答案】B
◆5.
almost
Almost是副词，意为“几乎,
差不多,
差一点;
将近“。例如：
In
the
hall
it
was
almost
dark.
大厅里几乎漆黑一片。
almost修饰动词时，通常应放在行为动词之前，特殊动词之后；修饰形容词、副词、名词等时，通常应将其放在被修饰词语之前。例如：
I
almost
dropped
the
plate.
我差点把碟子掉了。
Almost
all
the
guests
are
here.
差不多所有的客人都来了。
『辨析活用』
◇almost强调“差一点……就”（=very
nearly）,可用于no,
none,
nothing等前面，但nearly不可。almost不能用not修饰。
He
almost
knocked
me
down
before
he
saw
me.
他看到我之前差点把我撞倒。
Almost
no
one(=Hardly
anyone)believes
her.几乎没有人相信她。
◇nearly表示“接近”。常可与almost换用，但在具体数字前常用nearly，
not修饰nearly
意为“远非”，“远不及”。
例如：
They
are
nearly
at
the
end
of
their
journey.
他们快结束旅行了。
【链接中考】
(江苏扬州市)
—
Do
you
know
anything
about
the
players
of
our
school
football
team
—
Yes.
They
are
______
young
boys
between
the
age
of
thirteen
and
fifteen.
A.
most
B.
mostly
C.
almost
D.
at
most
【答案】C
◆6.
depend
depend主要意思为“依靠”、“依赖”、“取决于”等，只用作不及物动词，通常与介词
on,
upon
连用，主要用法有：
⑴
depend
on
[upon]＋某人或某物。例如：
Whether
we’ll
go
camping
depends
on
the
weather.
我们是否去野营要看天气。
I
haven’t
got
a
car,
so
I
have
to
depend
on
the
buses.
我没有汽车，所以我得乘公共汽车。
有时可在某人或某物后用介词
for。例如：
Children
depend
on
their
parents
for
food
and
clothing.
儿童的衣食靠父母。
⑵
depend
on
[upon]＋某人或某物＋不定式或动名词。例如：
I’m
depending
on
you
to
do
the
work.
我指望你做这工作。
You
can’t
depend
on
the
train
arriving
on
time.
千万不要认为火车能正点到达。
⑶
depend
on
[upon]＋从句。例如：
Our
success
depends
on
whether
everyone
works
hard
or
not.
我们的成功取决于每个人是否努力。
在
It
(all)
depends
on
[upon]＋从句中，介词
on,
upon
有时可省略(主要见于口语中)。
例如：
It
depends
(on)
whether
you
can
afford
it.
这要看你是否买得起。
【链接中考】
（湖北省黄石市）
Whether
I’ll
go
to
Shanghai
______
the
result
of
the
examination.
A.
belongs
to
B.
cares
about
C.
depends
on
D.
Aims
at
【答案】C
◆7.
anything
⑴
anything表示“某事”、“某东西”，主要用于否定句，疑问句及条件句中，用以代替
something
(常译为：什么…)；表示“任何事”、“任何东西”，主要用于肯定句
(有时也可用于其它句型)。例如：
Has
anything
interesting
happened
发生了什么有趣的事吗
We
can’t
believe
anything
he
says.
无论他说什么，我们都不能相信。
I
want
something
to
eat,
and
anything
will
do.
我想弄点东西吃，什么都行。
⑵
用作主语，谓语用单数；用代词时也用单数
(it)。例如：
Anything
is
better
than
nothing,
isn’t
it
有点总比什么都没有要好，不是吗
⑶
修饰anything的形容词应置于其后。例如：
Did
you
hear
anything
interesting
there
你在那儿听到什么有趣的事了吗
⑷
用于
be
anything
but,
意为“根本不是”、“一点不是”，可用于人和物。例如：
He’s
anything
but
a
hero.
他绝不是英雄。
【链接中考】
(四川省内江市)
1.
—
Oh,
you’re
reading
a
newspaper
.Is
there
______
in
it
—
I
don’t
know.
I
read
it
just
now.
A.
new
something
B.
anything
new
C.
something
new
【答案】B
（湖北省宜昌市）
2.
—
Hurry,
Mike!
The
bus
is
coming.
—
Wait
a
moment,
please!
Let
me
see
if
there’s
______
left.
A.
anything
else
B.
something
important
C.
nothing
else
D.
any
other
things
【答案】A
经典句型
◆1.
What
does
your
dad
look
like
⑴
look
like的意思是“看上去像……”，这里的like是介词，常与感官动词连用，后接名词或代词的宾格形式。例如：
The
little
girl
looks
like
her
father.小女孩看上去像她爸爸。
⑵
What
does
sb.
look
like
用于提问人的长相、外貌，意为“他长得什么样？”；常见的回答有：He
has
long/
curly
hair.
He
has
a
medium
build/
height.
He’s
tall/short.
He
is
thin/
fat.
He’s
a
little
bit
heavy.
【拓展】
What’s
sb.
like
用于提问人的性格、品质等，意为“他是个什么样的人？”，句中like是介词；而What
does
sb.
like？用于提问人的爱好，意为“他喜欢什么？”，句中的like是动词。试比较：
①
—
What
does
Cathy
look
like
卡西长得什么样
—
She’s
tall,
and
she
has
black
hair.
她个子很高，一头黑发。
②
—
What’s
Ruth
like
鲁思是个什么样的人呢
—
She’s
quiet
and
a
little
shy.她很文静，有点害羞。
③
—
What
does
Paul
like 保罗喜欢什么
—
He
likes
English
songs.
他喜欢英文歌曲。
【链接中考】
（2010·贵州省铜仁市）
—
What
does
your
brother
look
like
—
______.
A.
He
is
a
little
shy
B.
He
is
tall
C.
He
likes
dancing
D.
He
is
a
doctor
【答案】B
◆2.
Excuse
me.
Excuse
me的基本含义是“对不起”，“请原谅”。它可不像sorry那样，事后才向别人赔礼，而是事前就先向别人致歉。在日常生活中，以Excuse
me作为开头语，一来可以引起别注意；二来表示自己的彬彬有礼。
◇在英国英语中，下列情景要用Excuse
me：
⑴
向别人问路、问时间时。
Excuse
me!
Where
is
the
washroom
请问，洗手间在哪里？
⑵
当你询问别人是否准许你做事时。
Excuse
me!
Can
I
put
my
bike
here
对不起，我能把自行车放在这儿吗？
⑶
当你向别人打听某人（某事）时或当你要证实对方是不是某人时。
—
Excuse
me!
Are
you
Mr.
Black
打扰了，你是布莱克先生吗？
—
No,
I’m
not.
不，我不是。
【拓展】sorry是I’m
sorry的省略式。sorry是用于表达由于某种过失或办不成某事的一种歉意。常用在以下语境中：
⑴
当自己犯了错误而给对方可能带来麻烦时。
　　I’m
sorry.
I’m
late.
对不起，我来晚了。
⑵
当别人向你请求某事，而你无法满足或爱奠能助时。
　　—
Can
you
spell
it,
please
请问，你会拼写它吗？
　　—
Sorry,
I
can’t.
对不起，我不会。
【链接中考】
（广西省定西市）
,
is
there
a
restaurant
in
the
neighborhood
A.
Sorry
B.
Yes
C.
Excuse
me
D.
Pardon
me
【答案】C
◆3.
问路和指路的常用句型：
当我们用英语向别人问路时，可以用一般疑问句提问，也可用特殊疑问句提问。常用的表达方式有：
　　⑴
Is
there
a
...near
here
　　⑵
Where
is
....
　　⑶
How
can
I
get
...
　　⑷
Which
is
the
way
to
...
　　⑸
Can
you
tell
me
the
way
to...
　　⑹
Can
you
tell
me
how
I
get
to
...
　　为了出于礼貌，应先说：Excuse
me，然后再提出问题。
　　◇为别人指路时，可以用以下句子：
　　①
Go/
Walk
along
this
road/street.沿着这条路走。
　　②
Take
the
first
turning
on
the
left/right.在第一个拐弯处向左／右拐。
　　③
It’s
about
....
meters
from
here.大约离这儿有……米。
　　给别人指路时，要根据对方问路时所用的句型恰当地作出回答。如果知道，可以指点方向，如果不知道，可以说：I’m
sorry
I
don’t
know.
这时问路者仍应有礼貌地向对方表示谢意，说Thank
you
all
the
same.还是要谢谢你。例如：
—
Excuse
me.
Where’s
the
bookshop,
please
打扰了，请问书店在哪儿？
—
Sorry,
I
don’t
know.
对不起，我不知道。
—
Thank
you
all
the
same.
谢谢你。
【链接中考】
（江苏省连云港市）
1.
—
I
seem
to
be
lost.
Could
you
tell
me
_______
—
Sure.
You
can
take
the
No.3
bus
to
get
there.
A.
where
is
the
nearest
hospital
B.
how
long
it
will
take
me
to
the
airport
C.
how
far
is
my
trip
to
the
Olympic
Village
D.
how
I
can
get
to
the
National
Museum
【答案】D
(四川省内江市)
2.
—
Excuse
me.
Where
is
the
nearest
post
office
—
Sorry,
I’m
new
here.
—
______!
A.
Thank
you
all
the
same
B.
What
a
pity
C.
Bad
luck
【答案】A
◆4.
It
makes
me
mad!
◇make用作及物动词，在主动语态中的含义主要有：
⑴
做，制作，制造。make后可跟双宾语，间接宾语后移时一般用for引导。
Can
you
make
any
mooncakes
你会做些月饼吗？
My
uncle
will
make
a
kite
for
me.
叔叔将为我做一只风筝。
⑵
使；使之
She
will
make
him
happy.
她将使他幸福。
⑶
迫使；令
I
can’t
make
the
horse
go.
我无法使这匹马走动。
◇make用作及物动词，意为“使，让”，在主动语态中其后要跟省略to的不定式作宾语补足语，而在被动语态中，to不能省去。
Don’t
make
the
baby
cry
any
more.
不要让那个孩子再哭了。
She
was
made
to
wait
for
over
an
hour.
她被迫等了一个多钟头。
类似于make这种用法的动词还有let,
have,
hear,
see,
watch,
notice,
feel等。
She
was
seen
to
go
into
the
classroom.
有人看见她进了教室。
◇make用作及物动词，后接复合宾语，表示“使……成为……；使成为……”。通常由形容词、名词、介词短语充当宾语补足语。
Loud
music
makes
me
uncomfortable.
吵闹的音乐使我不舒服。
【链接中考】
(江苏省盐城市)
1.
The
talk
show
on
TV
is
very
popular.
It
often
makes
people
______.
A.
laugh
B.
laughing
C.
to
laugh
D.
laughed
【答案】A
（湖北省宜昌市）
2.
—
How
can
I
get
well
along
with
others,
father
—
Try
to
smile
to
others,
boy.
That
will
make
______
much
______.
A.
them,
easier
B.
them,
more
easy
C.
it,
easy
D.
it,
easier
【答案】D
（天津市）
3.
We
will
have
a
field
trip
this
afternoon.
The
news
makes
everyone______.
A.
excited
B.
frightened
C.
happily
D.
luckily
【答案】A
◆5.
A
plan
to
stop
people
killing
pandas
is
now
ready.
◇stop
to
do
sth.是“停止正在干的事，去干别的事”，stop是不及物动词，to
do(sth.)是目的状语。
We
stopped
to
have
a
rest.
我们停下来休息一会儿。
◇stop
doing
sth.是“停止正在做的事”，stop是及物动词，其后的动名词作宾语。
When
the
teacher
came,
the
students
stopped
talking.
老师进来时，学生们停止了谈话。
【链接中考】
（甘肃省兰州市）
1.
Danny
did
all
kinds
of
things
to
make
the
baby
______.
A.
to
stop
crying
B.
stop
crying
C.
to
stop
to
cry
D.
stop
to
cry
【答案】B
（青海省，宁夏）
2.
When
we
came
to
the
gate,
he
stopped
______
me
go
in
first.
A.
to
let
B.
to
tell
C.
to
allow
D.
to
ask
【答案】A
二、知识全练
第一部分
基础知识运用
一、词汇（共10分，每小题1分）。
A)请根据句意及所给汉语提示，写出句中所缺单词(每空一词)。
1.
People
in
different
countries
speak
different
______(语言).
2.
I
could
not
find
a
______(座位)
on
the
bus,
so
I
stood
all
the
time.
3.
Have
you
eaten
your
dinner
______(已经)
4.
My
grandparents
like
living
in
the
______(乡下).
5.
This
is
a
______(相当)
comfortable
house.
B)请根据句意，用所给单词的正确形式填空。
6.
Our
history
teacher
told
us
______
(live)
story.
7.
There
are
many
______
(tour)
visiting
the
Great
Wall
every
year.
8.
I
find
that
very
______
(surprise),
so
I
didn’t
say
anything.
9.
It’s
the
______
(20)
of
June,
my
father’s
birthday.
10.
______
(keep)
healthy,
you
should
take
more
exercise.
二、选择填空（共15分，每小题1分）。
1.
—
______
you
good
luck
in
the
new
year!
—
The
same
to
you.
A.
Hope
B.
Want
C.
Wish
D.
Like
2.
—You’d
better
hurry,
or
we’ll
be
late
for
the
plane.
—
Don’t
worry.
The
plane
will
_____
in
two
hours.
A.
take
in
B
take
away
C.
take
off
D.
take
out
3.
—
Your
new
bike
is
so
nice.
How
much
is
it
—
It
______
me
￥685.
A.
bought
B.
paid
C.
spent
D.
cost
4.
—
How
long
have
you
kept
the
business
—
______
1998.
A.
In
B.
From
C.
Since
D.
For
5.
—
May
I
borrow
your
camera
—
______.
Here
you
are.
A.
Of
course
B.
By
the
way
C.
You’re
welcome
D.
That’s
a
good
idea
6.
—
There
goes
the
bell.
—
It’s
time
for
class.
Let’s
stop
______.
A.
talk
B.
to
talk
C.
talking
D.
not
talk
7.
—
Do
I
have
to
come
back
tomorrow
—
Yes,
you
______.
A.
can
B.
may
C.
must
D.
should
8.
—Why
are
you
so
______
—
Because
our
school
football
team
has
won
the
match.
A.
excited
B.
exciting
C.
bored
D.
boring
9.
—
Mum,
where
is
my
sweater
—
______.
A.
You
are
here
B.
Here
it
is
C.
It’s
green
D.
Fine
10.—
Do
you
know
who
took
my
umbrella
by
mistake
—
Sorry,
I
don’t
know.
Let
me
______
who
did
it.
A.
find
out
B.
find
C.
look
D.
look
for
11.—
What
a
good
boy
Li
Ping
is!
—
Yes.
She
often
______
her
seat
to
the
old
lady
on
the
crowded
bus.
A.
offers
B.
brings
C.
lends
D.
takes
12.
I
find
_____
is
necessary
_____
the
examination
paper
carefully
after
is
finished.
A.
that;
to
go
over
B.
it;
to
go
over
C.
when;
g
over
D.
it;
will
go
over
13.—
John,
you
clean
the
classroom
today,
______
—
But
I
cleaned
it
yesterday.
Can’t
you
ask
others
to
do
it
A.
do
you
B.
didn’t
you
C.
will
you
D.
shouldn’t
you
14.—
Mum,
could
I
go
shopping
with
you
this
afternoon
—
Of
course
you
_____.
A.
can
B.
must
C.
should
D.
will
15.—
Have
you
______
any
letters
from
your
sister
recently
—
No,
I
haven’t
heard
from
her
yet.
A.
heard
B.
accepted
C.
received
D.
brought
三、根据汉语完成下列句子，每空一词。（共10分，每小题2分）。
1.球队入场时观众们为之欢呼。
The
crowd
______
______
the
teams
entered
the
field.
2.妈妈有很多家务要做。
　Mother
has
a
lot
of
housework
______
______.
3.街道的拐角处有一个入口。
　There’s
entrance
______
______
______
of
the
street.
4.直走，它在邮电局的对面。
　______
______
______.
It’s
opposite
the
post
office.
5.建立一个自然保护区十分重要。
　______
important
______
______
a
nature
reserve.
四、完成对话。（共10分，每小题1分）。
从对话后的方框中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项补全对话，其中两项为多余。
A:
Hello!
This
is
Nature
Travel
Office.
Can
I
help
you
B:
Yes.
I
will
have
a
seven-day
holiday.
I’d
like
to
go
to
Inner
Mongolia.
(1)______
A:
Sure.
The
Grassland
Hotel
there
is
beautiful
in
all
seasons.
B:
(2)______
A:
You
can
enjoy
the
bright
sunshine
and
ride
horses.
B:
(3)______
A:
Blue
Sky
Hotel
is
also
comfortable.
B:
(4)______
A:
It’s
near
the
sea.
You
can
swim
there.
It
has
beautiful
scenery.
And
staying
there
is
very
cheap.
B:
(5)______
A:
380
yuan
each
night.
B:
Sounds
good.
Thanks
a
lot.
A.
Could
you
tell
me
something
about
the
hotelsB.
How
much
is
a
double
room
thereC.
What
else
can
we
do
thereD.
What
can
we
do
thereE.
Can
you
tell
me
something
about
itF.
Where
is
the
Grassland
HotelG.
What
about
other
hotels
第二部分
综合能力提升
五、完形填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
请先通读短文，掌握其大意，然后从所给的四个选项中选出最佳的一项填空，使短文意思完整通顺。
There
are
many
places
for
people
to
visit
in
London.
One
famous
place
for
1
in
London
is
Madame
Tussaud’s
museum.
Here
people
can
2
figures
(塑像)
of
famous
people
made
of
wax
(蜡).
Madame
Tussaud
was
born
in
France
in
1761.
Her
uncle,
who
was
a
doctor,
made
wax
figures
of
people.
He
3
a
museum
of
these
figures
in
Paris.
Marie
Tussaud
helped
him
in
his
4
.
In
1789,
during
the
5
Revolution.
Marie
was
sent
to
prison.
Here
she
had
to
copy
the
heads
of
6
people
when
they
were
dead,
including
King
Louis
XVI’s
and
Queen
Marie
Antoinette’s.
In
1795,
Marie
7
Francois
Tussaud
and
in
1802
they
came
to
London
with
her
wax
figures.
Here
she
opened
a
museum
and
her
figures
can
still
be
8
today.
Nowadays,
Madame
Tussaud’s
is
opened
in
several
9
,
such
as
New
York.
Hong
Kong,
Amsterdam,
Las
Vegas.
People
can
visit
Madame
Tussaud’s
not
only
in
Europe
but
also
in
10
and
America.
1.
A.
ladies
B.
students
C.
artists
D.
tourists
2.
A.
draw
B.
make
C.
see
D.
buy
3.
A.
visited
B.
opened
C.
saw
D.
decorated
4.
A.
work
B.
drawing
C.
painting
D.
visit
5.
A.
English
B.
Russian
C.
Chinese
D.
French
6.
A.
good
B.
beautiful
C.
famous
D.
tall
7.
A.
married
B.
encouraged
C.
found
D.
saved
8.
A.
made
B.
seen
C.
discovered
D.
stolen
9.
A.
towns
B.
villages
C.
cities
D.
countries
10.
A.
Africa
B.
France
C.
Australia
D.
Asia
六、阅读理解（共10分，每小题1分）。
A
Once
a
little
boy
wanted
to
meet
Love.
He
knew
it
was
a
long
trip
to
where
Love
lived,
so
he
got
his
things
ready
with
some
pizzas
and
drinks
and
started
off.
When
he
passed
three
streets,
he
saw
an
old
woman
sitting
in
the
park
and
watching
some
birds.
She
looked
very
hungry.
The
boy
gave
her
a
pizza.
She
took
it
and
smiled
at
him.
The
smile
was
so
beautiful
that
he
wanted
to
see
it
again,
so
he
gave
her
a
Coke.
Once
again
she
smiled.
The
boy
was
very
happy.
They
sat
there
all
afternoon,
eating
and
smiling,
but
they
said
nothing.
When
it
grew
dark,
the
boy
decided
to
leave.
But
before
he
had
gone
more
than
a
few
steps,
he
turned
around,
ran
back
to
the
old
woman
and
gave
her
a
hug.
The
woman
gave
him
her
biggest
smile
ever.
When
the
boy
opened
the
door
of
his
house,
his
mother
was
surprised
by
the
look
of
joy
on
his
face
and
asked
what
had
made
him
so
happy.
“I
had
lunch
with
Love.
She
has
got
the
most
beautiful
smile
in
the
world.”
At
the
same
time,
the
old
woman’s
son
was
also
surprised
at
his
mother’s
pleasure
and
asked
why.
“I
ate
a
pizza
in
the
park
with
love,”
she
said,
“and
he
is
much
younger
than
I
expected.”
If
the
world
is
full
of
love,
we
can
enjoy
a
better
life.
根据短文内容，选择最佳答案。
1.
When
the
little
boy
saw
the
old
woman,
she
was
______.
A.
looking
for
a
seat
in
the
park
B.
passing
the
street
C.
looking
at
some
birds
D.
having
a
pizza
2.
The
little
boy
gave
the
old
woman
a
Coke
because
______.
A.
the
old
woman
still
felt
hungry
B.
he
wanted
to
see
the
smile
again
C.
he
didn’t
like
the
drink
D.
the
old
woman
paid
him
for
it
3.
The
old
woman
gave
the
little
boy
the
biggest
smile
______.
A.
after
the
little
boy
went
home
B.
before
it
grew
dark
C.
when
she
was
drinking
Coke
D.
after
the
little
boy
hugged
her
4.
The
word
“hug”
in
the
passage
means
______
in
Chinese.
A.
亲吻　　
B.
拥抱
C.
道歉　　　
D.
鞠躬
5.
What
can
we
learn
from
the
story
A.
When
one
feels
unhappy,
he
must
go
to
a
park.
B.
Old
people
are
always
kind
and
happy.
C.
Children
and
old
people
should
get
on
well
with
each
other.
D.
When
people
are
kind
to
each
other,
they
will
feel
happy.
B
Summer
School
trips
are
planned
every
Wednesday
afternoon.
Some
may
last
to
the
evening
when
we
will
go
on
a
theatre
trip.
Weekends
are
planned
for
all-day
trips
and
activities.
All
the
trips
are
designed
to
introduce
students
to
Scotland’s
culture,
exciting
cities
and
beautiful
scenery,
while
giving
them
a
fun-filled
break
from
timetabled
classes.
On
Wednesdays
students
can
choose
from:
●
Glamis
Castle(城堡):
Visit
childhood
home
of
Queen
Elizabeth
and
one
of
Scotland’s
most
beautiful
castles.
●
Royal(皇家)
research
ship
Discovery:
Visit
Captain
Scott’s
famous
research
ship
Discovery.
●
Elie
Watersports:
Go
boating
and
sailing.
Saturday
trips：
●
Edinburgh:
Visit
Scotland’s
beautiful
capital.
Discover
Edinburgh
Castle,
walk
along
Princes
Street,
home
to
some
of
Edinburgh’s
best
shops,
discover
the
city’s
past.
●
Glasgow:
Experience
Scotland’s
city
of
culture
and
buildings,
internationally
famous
for
its
Victorian
buildings
and
wonderful
museums.
Visit
Scotland’s
best-loved
museum.
Discover
and
experience
Scotland:
the
best
small
country
in
the
world.
You
will
not
be
disappointed(失望).
6.
When
will
the
students
have
their
trips
A.
On
Sunday.
B.
On
Wednesday
morning.
C.
On
Wednesday
and
Sunday.
D.
On
Wednesday
and
Saturday.
7.
Where
did
Queen
Elizabeth
live
when
she
was
young
A.
Glasgow.
B.
Glamis
Castle.
C.
Elie
Watersports.
D.
Edinburgh
Castle.
8.
If
you
want
to
go
shopping,
the
best
place
to
go
to
is
_______.
A.
Glasgow
B.
Edinburgh
C.
Elie
Watersports
D.
Discovery
9.
Where
should
you
visit
if
you
want
to
know
more
about
Scotland
A.
Glamis
Castle
B.
Edinburgh
C.
Glasgow
D.
Elie
Watersports
10.
What
you
have
read
is
_______.
A.
a
travel
diary
B.
a
news
report
C.
an
advertisement
D.
an
introduction
to
Scotland
七、书面表达（15分）
根据汉语提示，请你以“My
Plans
for
the
vacation”为题，写一篇意思连贯、符合逻辑的小短文。
要点提示：1、好好休息；2、帮助父母；3、多读好书；
写作要求：1、所给要点提示要用上；
　　　　　2、紧扣主题，适当发挥；
　　　　　3、80词左右。
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
第三部分
课标新题探究
八、短文填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
根据短信内容，在方框内选出适当的单词填空，使其通顺、完整。
interesting
happy
sad
late
busy
wonderful
over　
restaurant
old
of
free
hotel
supermarket
around
Dear
Sally,
I
hope
you
are
all
well.
I
have
been
in
Hong
Kong
for
three
days,
and
I’m
having
a
great
time.
Yesterday
morning,
our
good
friend,
Tony,
came
to
my
hotel.
After
breakfast,
he
showed
me
1
the
city.
It
was
a
very
2
day,
but
I
saw
many
3
places.
First
we
visited
the
Ocean
Park.
After
that
we
took
a
taxi
to
St.
John’s
Cathedral.
I
think
it
is
a
very
4
church.
Then
we
went
to
Victoria
Peak.
There
we
could
see
all
5
Hong
Kong.
It
was
really
6
.
After
dinner,
we
caught
a
bus
to
the
7
.
On
the
bus
back
to
the
8
,
we
both
felt
tired
but
9
.
Tony
didn’t
leave
until
10
at
night.
We
enjoyed
ourselves
very
much.
Best
wishes.
Yours
John
Smith
1.
________
2.
________
3.
________
4.
________
5.
________
6.
________
7.
________
8.
________
9.
________
10.
________
九、任务阅读（共10分，每小题1分）。
Li
Ming’s
friend
Wu
Bin
is
coming
to
the
UK
to
visit
him.
He’s
asked
Li
Ming
to
tell
him
something
about
life
in
the
UK
before
he
comes.
Dear
Wu
Bin,
I’m
getting
really
excited
about
your
visit
I
hope
you
are
too.
I
must
say,
life
is
really
different
here.
English
people
do
some
very
strange
things!
In
the
UK,
you
must
drive
on
the
left.
I
know
you’re
too
young
to
drive
but
you
have
to
remember
this
when
you
cross
the
road.
I
nearly
got
run
over(碾过)
the
other
day!
You
know
in
China,
if
you
want
a
taxi,
you
can
just
put
your
hand
out
and
one
stops
immediately.
Well,
here
you
must
go
to
a
special
place
where
there
is
a
long
queue
of
people
waiting.
Or
you
can
ring
a
taxi
company
to
order
one.
Shopping
is
difficult
on
a
Sunday.
I
can’t
believe
how
early
the
shops
close.
It
seems
like
you
can’t
buy
anything
after
six
o’clock
in
the
evening.
You
asked
me
about
living
in
an
English
house.
The
most
difficult
thing
is
using
a
knife
and
fork.
I
can
use
chopsticks
if
I
want,
but
I
want
to
do
the
same
as
other
people.
Something
really
surprised
me
the
other
day.
Mrs.
Johnson(my
host
mother)
hung
up(把……挂起来)
her
washing
in
the
kitchen!
I
couldn’t
believe
it.
Mr.
and
Mrs.
Johnson
have
a
cat,
a
dog
and
two
rabbits.
Well,
can
you
imagine,
the
other
day,
all
four
animals
were
running
around
in
the
kitchen.
Another
thing,
people
drink
cold
water
all
the
time
and
they
drink
tea
with
milk!
They
don’t
have
rice
with
every
meal,
and
they
put
carpet(地毯)
all
over
their
houses.
Life
here
is
strange,
but
I’m
enjoying
it
Lots
of
Hove
and
see
you
soon,
Li
Ming
根据短文内容，按要求答题。
1.
Are
English
people
do
some
things
as
the
same
as
us
in
life
________________________________________________
2.
How
should
you
do
if
you
want
a
taxi
in
China
________________________________________________
3.
When
do
the
shops
close
on
Sundays
in
England
________________________________________________
4.
Why
doesn’t
Li
Ming
want
to
use
chopsticks
________________________________________________
5.
How
do
English
people
drink
tea
________________________________________________
【答案】
一、1.languages
2.seat
3.already
4.countryside
5.quite
6.lively
7.tourist
8.surprising
9.twentieth
10.To
keep
二、1-5
CCDCA
6-10
CCABA
11-15
ABCAC
三、1.cheered
as
3.to
do
3.on
the
corner
4.Go
straight
ahead
5.It’s,
to
build
四、1-5
ADGEB
五、1-5
DCBAD
6-10
CABCD
六、1-5
CBDBD
6-10
DBBCC
PAGE
20考点聚焦
一、要点梳理
必考词汇
◆1.
would
would是情态动词，意为“愿意”。常见用法如下：
⑴
用于表达愿望、请求或建议的陈述之后。例如：
I
wish
you
would
stay.
我希望你能留下来。
Would
you
like
to
change
a
seat
It’s
warmer
here.您要不要换一下座位？这里暖和些。
⑵
用于提出客气的要求或请求。例如：
Would
you
go
with
me
你愿意和我一起去吗
I
would
like
to
know
more
about
your
plan.我想更多地了解一下你的计划。
⑶
用于委婉地表示自己的意见。例如：
I
would
look
at
the
problem
a
little
differently.
我对这个问题的看法略有不同。
⑷
用于表示过去经常性的行为或动作。例如：
He
would
go
to
bed
strictly
at
9,
and
on
Sundays
would
not
have
lunch
anywhere
except
in
that
restaurant.他总是严格地9点上床睡觉。星期日总在那家饭店吃午饭。
【链接中考】
（天津市）
1.
He
wanted
to
know
______
the
English
party.
A.
when
will
we
have
B.
when
we
will
have
C.
when
would
we
have
D.
when
we
would
have
【答案】D
（山东德州市）
2.
Sue
told
me
that
she
_______
shopping
with
her
sister
the
next
day.
A.
will
go
B.
would
go
C.
goes
D.
has
gone
【答案】B
◆2.
when
◇作副词
⑴
作疑问副词，意为“什么时候；何时”，引导特殊疑问句。例如：
When
will
they
come
back
他们什么时候回来？
⑵
作连接副词，意为“什么时候”，引导名词性从句或不定式，从句使用陈述句语序，时态根据实际情况而定。例如：
I’d
like
to
know
when
they
will
come.
我想知道他们什么时候来。
Have
you
decided
when
to
go
sightseeing
(when
引导不定式)
你们已经决定什么时候去观光了吗？
⑶
作关系副词，引导定语从句。例如：
The
days
are
gone
forever
when
the
Chinese
people
were
looked
down
upon.
中国人民被看不起的日子一去不复返了。
◇作从属连词，引导状语从句
⑴表示时间，意为“当……时”。
在时间、条件等状语从句里，用一般现在时表示将来时；当需要表达将来完成的意义时，必须使用现在完成时来代替。如：
When
you
see
him,
please
say
hello
to
him.
见到他时，代我向他问好。
⑵
表示过去发生的事情，在含有when
引导的时间状语从句的主从复合句中，动作发生在先的用过去完成时，在后的用过去时。如：
When
I
reached
the
station,
the
train
had
left.
当我到达火车站时，火车已经开走了。
【链接中考】
（湖北省十堰市）
1.
I
began
to
work
in
Shanghai
in
the
year
______
Hong
Kong
was
returned
to
China.
A.
that
B.
which
C.
where
D.
when
【答案】D
（湖北省宜昌市）
2.
—
So
you
were
in
the
supermarket
_______
you
heard
a
strange
sound,
right
—
That’s
true.
I
ran
out
as
quickly
as
possible.
A.
when
B.
while
C.
then
D.
which
【答案】A
（青海省，宁夏）
3.
I
can’t
forget
the
time
_______
the
earthquake
happened
in
Yushu.
A.
when
B.
which
C.
that
D.
where
【答案】A
◆3.
have
have作实意动词，有如下用法：
⑴表示“有”的意思。
　　I
have
a
few
friends
here.在这儿我有一些朋友。
『辨析活用』动词have与there
be表示“有”的区别：
have表示“拥有”，常用来表达所属或构成关系，主语多是人；而there
be结构通常表示“某处有某物（或某人）”，是表示存在意义的“有”，主语是紧接其后的名词，而不是后面的地点。试比较：
I
have
a
new
dictionary.
我有一本英语词典。
There
is
a
dictionary
in
my
bag.
我书包里有一本英语词典。
⑵
表示“吃”、“喝”。
What
did
you
have
for
supper
晚餐你们吃了什么？
⑶
表示“进行；经受”。
We
had
sports
meeting
last
week.
上周我们举行了运动会。
⑷
have作助动词时与过去分词一起连用，构成现在完成时或过去完成时。
I
have
already
seen
the
film.我已看过这部电影。
『常用搭配』
have用作行为动词还常与一些名词搭配在一起，构成短语，表示做某件事情。此时短语have的意思失去了“有”含义。
have
a
lesson上课　have
a
meeting
开会　have
a
good
time
玩得高兴
have
breakfast/
lunch/
supper吃早饭(午饭、晚饭)
have
a
look
(at)看一看　　
have
a
talk
谈话、交谈
have
a
rest
休息一下　　　have
a
headache
头疼
【链接中考】
（辽宁省沈阳市）
—
Where
______
you
______
lunch
—
At
home.
There
was
no
school
lunch.
A,
did;
have
B.
are;
having
C.
will;
have
D.
do;
have
【答案】A
◆4.
never
never是副词，意为“从未；永不；决不”。主要与肯定动词连用而不与否定动词连用，在各句中的位置和not相同。例如：
I
have
never
done
that
before.
我从未做过那个。
He
will
never
go
there
again.
他再也不会去那里了。
当never谓语句首予强调时，句中主、谓语也采用倒装词序。例如：
Never
in
my
life
have
I
seen
such
a
plant.
我生平从来没有见过这样的工厂。
『常用搭配』
Never
mind.没关系。
【拓展】Never
mind口语的常见用法。
⑴
表示安慰，意为“别着急；不要紧；没关系。”例如：
Never
mind,
next
time
I’m
sure
you
can
do
better.
没关系，我相信你下次一定会做得好些。
⑵
用来回答道歉，意为“没关系；没什么。”例如：
—
Sorry
to
have
kept
you
waiting.
对不起，让你久等了。
—
Never
mind.
没关系。
【链接中考】
（江苏省苏州市）
1.
I
can
______
be
a
nurse.
I’m
not
a
very
patient
person.
A.
seldom
B.
ever
C.
never
D.
always
【答案】C
(山东省潍坊市)
2.
—
Sorry,
sir.
I
made
a
mistake
again.
—
______
Practice
more
and
you
will
do
better.
A.
Never
mind.
B.
I’m
not
sure.
C.
You’re
welcome
D.
Don’t
mention
it
【答案】A
常考短语
◆1.
What
about…
What
about... ＝How
about... 意为“（你认为）……怎么样？”常用于征求意见、询问情况或提出建议。后接名词、代词或动名词。
What
about
a
glass
of
milk？来一杯牛奶怎么样？
What
about
going
out
for
a
walk？出去散步怎么样？
I
want
to
go
shopping.
What
about
you
我想去买东西，你呢？
【链接中考】
（湖南省娄底市）
1.
—
Lucy’s
skirt
is
black.
What
about
______
—
Mine
is
white.
A.
you
B.
your
C.
yours
【答案】C
（江苏省连云港市）
2.
—I
like
red
best.
What
about
_______
—My
favourite
colour
is
orange.
It
represents
joy.
A.
you
B.
her
C.
him
D.
it
【答案】A
（广东省）
3.
—
We
don’t
have
much
homework
this
we
go
out
together
—
OK.
What
about
a
movie
A.
to
see
B.
seeing
C.
see
D.
sees
【答案】B
经典句型
◆1.
Would
you
like
to
go
to
the
cinema 你想去看电影吗？
Would
like表示“想做某事”，would
like主要用于婉转地提出请求、建议或某种看法。语气比want更委婉。would
like后面一般跟动词不定式，也可以跟事物名词。在表示建议或请求时，肯定回答常说Yes,
please/
Yes,
I’d
love(like)
to；否定回答常说No,
thanks.
...意为“你想要……吗？”用来提出建议，后面可以接名词，也可以接动词不定式。
①Would
you
like
something
to
eat 你想要吃的东西吗？
　　②—
Would
you
like
to
go
shopping
with
me 你愿意和我一起去买东西吗？
　　　—
Yes,
I’d
love
to!
是的，我很原意。
　　③—
Would
you
like
a
mooncake 　吃块月饼好吗？
—
No,
thanks.
不用，谢谢。
【链接中考】
(江苏省无锡市)
1.
—
Would
you
like
me
to
take
you
to
the
new
shopping
centre
—
______.
I’ve
been
there
once.
A.
No,
thanks
B.
No
problem
C.
Yes,
I
think
so
D.
That’s
very
kind
of
you
【答案】A
(重庆市)
2.
—
Ben,
would
you
like
to
play
football
with
us
—
______,
but
I
have
to
wash
the
dishes
first.
A.
No,
I
can’t
B.
I
don’t
want
to
C.
Yes,
please
D.
I’d
love
to
【答案】D
◆2.
Let’s
go
in
the
evening.
我们晚上去吧。
这是祈使句，用来表示请求，命令，叮嘱。祈使句中通常不带主语，谓语动词用原形，句末用感叹号或句号。
let祈使句的否定形式为：(1)Let
(us,
me)＋not＋动词原形；(2)Don’t
let＋第三人称宾格或名词＋动词原形。例如：
Let’s
not
wait
for
her.
咱们别等她了。
Don’t
let
them
go!
别让他们走！
祈使句的反意疑问句通常用
shall
we或will
you？
Make
it
a
little
earlier，will
you？
　　Let’s
go
out
for
a
walk,
shall
we
【链接中考】
（湖北省荆门市）
—
Let’s
go
skating,
_______
—
Ok,
Let’s
go.
A.
do
you
B.
don’t
you
C.
will
you
D.
shall
we
【答案】D
◆3.How
often
do
you
use
a
computer
你多久使用一次计算机？
how
often意为“多久（一次）”，
用来询问某动作间隔多久进行一次，即询问动作间隔的时间长度，动作发生的频率。通常是对一些表示频率的副词提问，如always,
usually,
often,
sometimes,
never等。也可以对表示“多久几次”之类的短语提问，如once
a
week（一周一次），twice
a
year（一年二次），three
times
a
day（一天三次）等。
『辨析活用』
how
long,
how
soon,
how
often
⑴
how
long意为“多久、多长时间”主要是对一段时间进行提问，答语通常是(
for)
three
days／weeks／months等时间段，它可用于各种时态。
—
How
long
did
the
meeting
last？这个会开了多长时间？
—
About
half
an
hour.
大约半小时。
⑵
how
soon意为“还要多久”，是对从某个基本时间到将来某动作结束或其动作发生这段时间提问，常用在一般将来时态的句子中，答语通常是“in十段时间”。
—
How
soon
will
the
road
be
finished？这条路要多久才能完工？
—
In
a
few
months.
几个月之内。
⑶
how
often意为“隔多久”，用来提问在某一特定的时间进行某个动作的次数，答语通常是always,
usually,
often,
sometimes,
once／twice
a
week／month等。
　　—
How
often
do
you
visit
your
uncle
你要隔多久去拜访你叔叔一次？
—
Once
a
week.每周一次。
【链接中考】
(山东省潍坊市)
1.
—
______
do
you
have
PE
lessons
—
Three
times
a
week.
A.
How
long
B.
How
soon
C.
How
many
D.
How
often
【答案】D
（山东省滨州市）
2.
—
_______
will
you
be
away
—
In
a
couple
of
weeks.
A.
What
time
B.
How
soon
C.
How
often
D.
How
long
【答案】B
二、知识全练
第一部分
基础知识运用
一、词汇。（共20分，每小题1分）
A)根据括号中所给汉语或首字母写出单词，使句子意思完整正确。
1.
Linda
often
______
(邀请)
me
to
her
party.
2.
Can
you
tell
me
how
I
can
get
to
the
______(体育馆)
3.
Miss
Liu
is
our
______(化学)
teacher.
We
all
like
her.
4.
Elena
often
helps
her
mother
do
______(家务)
on
Sundays.
5.
I
think
smoking(吸烟)
is
a
bad
_______(习惯).
6.
Betty
want
to
be
a
______(歌手)
when
she
grow
up.
7.
There
are
three
______
(千)
students
in
our
school.
8.
There
is
______(更多)
food
in
the
kitchen.
You
can
go
there
to
get
it.
9.
Is
he
coming
this
weekend
or
______(下一个)
weekend
10.
You
can
find
the
times
of
your
trains
in
this
timetable
______(时刻表).
B)根据句意，用括号中所给的单词填空。
never,
often,
sometimes,
again,
every,
ask,
break,
when,
breakfast,
panda
11.I’d
like
to
know
______
they’ll
let
him
out.
12.
You
would
go
to
______
your
teacher.
13.
Tony
often
gets
up
at
six
and
has
______
at
seven
in
the
morning.
14.
You
are
tired(累),
please
have
a
______.
15.
Sam
is
a
good
student.
He
is
______
late
for
class.
16.
David
______
listens
to
music
after
class.
17.
______
eat
bamboo
and
live
in
the
forest.
18.
The
library
is
open
______
day.
19.
Would
you
say
that
______
20.
Becky
and
Karl
come
to
visit
us
______.
二、选择填空（共15分，每小题1分）。
1.
______
eats
grass
and
panda
eats
bamboo.
A.
Tiger
B.
Lion
C.
Elephant
D.
polar
bear
2.
—
When
did
the
Shanghai
Expo
open
—
______
May
1st,
2010.
A
In
B.
On
C.
At
D.
By
3.
The
wolf
______
in
the
European
forests.
A.
comes
B.
lives
C.
likes
D.
eats
4.
—
Does
the
kangaroo
come
from
______
—
Yes,
it
does.
A.
Europe
B.
Asia
C.
African
D.
Australia
5.
—
Ms
Lin
is
very
popular
among
the
students.
—
Yes.
Her
classes
are
______
lively
and
interesting.
A.
always
B.
sometimes
C.
hardly
D.
never
6.
If
you
try
to
sit
on
two
chairs，you
will
fall
between
them
.For
life，you
must
______
one
chair.
A.
choose
B.
have
C.
get
D.
check
7.
—
Would
you
like
_______
—
No,
thank
you.
I’m
full.
A.
something
B.
anything
C.
some
more
D.
a
little
8.
_____
early，and
you
won't
be
late
for
school．
A.
Turn
down
B.
Turn
up
C.
Get
up
D.
Get
down
9.
—
I
like
English
very
much,
______
you,
Lingling
—
My
favorite
lesson
is
history.
A.
What
about
B.
Shall
we
C.
Would
you
D.
Why
not
10.—
_____
did
you
tell
him
about
the
news
—
By
____
an
e-mail.
A.
How;
sending
B.
How;
send
C.
How;
sent
D.
What;
sending
11.—
Does
the
monkey
live
in
the
desert
—
______.
A.
Yes,
it
does
B.
No,
it
doesn’t
C.
Yes,
it
is
D.
No,
it
isn’t
12.
—
_______
—
It’s
Thursday.
A.
What
day
is
it
today
B.
What’s
the
date
C.
What’s
the
time
D.
When
is
it
13.—
Let’s
go
fishing
after
the
exam,
______
—
Sounds
great!
A.
will
you
B.
shall
we
C.
won’t
you
D.
don’t
you
14.
—Would
you
like
to
go
out
for
a
walk
with
us
after
supper
—
_______
But
I
must
finish
my
homework
first.
A.
of
course
not.
B.
That’s
all
right.
C.
Yes,
I
do.
D.
I’d
love
to.
15.—
Shall
we
go
skating
tomorrow
—
______.
A.
you’re
all
right
B.
It’s
very
kind
of
you
C.
You
are
right
D.
That’s
a
good
idea
三、按要求改写下列句子，每空一词。（共5分，每小题1分）。
1.
Girls
like
eating
French
fries.
(改为否定句)
Girls
______
______
eating
French
fries.
2.
Jane
eats
oranges
and
apples
every
day.
(对划线部分提问)
______
does
Jane
______
every
day
3.
Take
the
ice
cream
to
your
sister.
(改为否定句)
______
______
the
ice
cream
to
your
sister.
4.
They
have
chicken
and
tomatoes
for
lunch.
(对划线部分提问)
______
_____
they
have
for
lunch
5.
We
have
hamburgers.
(改为let开头的祈使句)
______
______
hamburgers.
四、根据汉语完成下列句子，每空一词。（共10分，每小题2分）。
1.接着，用鼠标点击“保存”。
Next,
______
the
mouse
and
______
“save”.
2.欢迎来我们学校。
______
______
our
school.
3.去巴黎度假怎么样？
______
______
going
to
Paris
for
a
holiday
4.你早饭通常吃什么？
　What
do
you
often
______
______
breakfast
5.你星期六到公园来好吗？
　______
you
______
to
go
to
the
park
on
Saturday
五、完成对话。（共15分，每小题1分）。
A)从方框中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项。
A:
Can
I
help
you
B:
(1)______
A:
Do
you
like
oranges
a
lot
B:
(2)______
A:
Does
your
mother
like
oranges
B:
(3)______
A:
What
about
some
bananas
B:
(4)______
Some
bananas,
please.
A:
OK.
Some
oranges
and
bananas.
Here
you
are.
B:
(5)______
A:
You
are
welcome.
A.
No,
she
doesn’t
like
them
at
all,
but
my
father
likes
them
a
little.B.
Thank
you
very
much.C.
Yes,
I
do.D.
I’d
like
some
oranges.E.
OK.
My
father
and
my
mother
like
bananas
a
lot.
B)根据对话内容，在空格上填写适当的单词补全对话。
A:
Hello,
Mary!
Come
with
me,
please.
B:
6
are
you
going,
Bill
A:
I’m
going
to
7
lunch.
8
have
it
in
that
restaurant.
B:
OK.
A:
What
9
does
the
restaurant
have
B:
There
are
10
kinds
of
food
in
it.
Do
you
11
eating
Chicken
A:
No,
I
don’t
want
to
eat
any
12
.
B:
You
are
a
kind
girl.
13
do
you
like
eating
A:
I
like
eating
French
fries,
tomatoes
and
strawberries.
B:
14
and
fruit
can’t
help
your
health.
A:
You
are
right.
15
I
have
some
hamburgers
and
eggs.
第二部分
综合能力提升
六、完形填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
Tracking
the
Tiger
Carol
Amore
has
a
mission(使命).
“My
task
is
finding
and
helping
to
1
tigers,
the
most
dangerous
and
alluring(诱惑的)
of
all
big
cats,”
Amore
says.
She
found
that
the
best
way
to
do
that
was
to
learn
more
about
the
tigers’
2
and
their
habitat.
So
she
traveled
to
India
to
3
three
months
filming
in
the
Bandhavgarh
Tiger
Reserve,
a
protected
place
that
is
home
to
about
30
or
40
Bengal
tigers.
4
she
was
there,
Amore
became
especially
5
in
a
family
of
tigers
that
included
a
mother,
which
she
called
Bachhi,
and
her
two
female
cubs,
Choti
and
Badi.
The
6
she
made
about
her
experience
is
called
Tigers:
Tracking
a
Legend(传说).
To
help
people
to
7
the
trouble
of
tigers,
Amore
has
also
helped
to
create
an
interactive
exhibition
at
the
South
Street
Seaport,
8
New
York
City,
called
TIGERS
The
Exhibition:
Tracking
a
Legend.
The
seaport
is
a
popular
spot
for
9
who
come
to
visit
the
city
from
across
the
United
States
and
around
the
10
.
It’s
the
perfect
place
to
reach
a
wide
audience.
1.
A.
see
B.
teach
C.
save
D.
make
2.
A.
lives
B.
food
C.
babies
D.
numbers
3.
A.
take
B.
spend
C.
cost
D
.pay
4.
A.
After
B.
Before
C.
Until
D.
While
5.
A.
boring
B.
interested
C.
excited
D.
surprising
6.
A.
book
B.
story
C.
sport
D.
movie
7.
A.
understand
B.
make
C.
read
D.
play
8.
A.
from
B.
at
C.
in
D.
with
9.
A.
tourists
B.
children
C.
doctors
D.
tigers
10.
A.
city
B.
world
C.
country
D.
seaport
七、阅读理解（共10分，每小题1分）。
A
Summer
Surfing
USA15-Day
Tour
for
Beach
LoversVisit
beautiful
Southern
CaliforniaSurfing
beaches◇Accommodations:
Single
or
double
rooms
In
beachfront
hotels◇Price
includes:
Money
for
daily
surfboard3-hour
beginner’s
lessons◇Other
activities:
Visit
DisneylandTour
Beverly
Hills
and
see
the
movie
stars’
homeTour
cost:
Single
room
$
1,999Double
room
$
2,
300
Winter
Wonderland15-Day
Ski
Tour
in
the
Green
Mountains◇Accommodations:
Village
hotels,
with
relaxing
environment
and
the
dining
comfortable
rooms
with
nice
furniture◇Price
includes:
All
ski
equipment,
lift
tickets,
and
daily
2-hour
lessons◇Night
activities:
Parties
in
the
open
air,
rock
music
concerts◇Other
activities:
Shopping,
ice
skating,
cross-country
skiing
◇Tour
cost:
Single
room:
%
2,
500
Double
room
$
3,
200
[注释]accommodation
食宿
；
equipment
设备
根据短文内容，选择最佳答案。
1.
Which
of
the
activities
can
you
do
at
night
A.
Visit
Disneyland.
B.
Skate
on
the
ice.
C.
Enjoy
rock
music.
D.
See
the
movie
stars’
homes
2.
If
you
like
skiing,
you
can
choose
to
stay
______
to
enjoy
your
vacation.
A.
in
a
beachfront
hotel
B.
in
a
village
hotel
C.
only
in
a
single
room
D.
only
in
a
double
room
3.
Going
to
______
is
beach
lovers’
best
choice
for
summer
vacation.
A.
Vermont
B.
Green
Mountains
C.
Northern
California
D.
Southern
California
4.
It
will
take
you
______
to
enjoy
your
vacation
either
in
the
green
mountains
or
on
the
beaches.
A.
one
week
B.
one
month
C.
half
a
week
D.
half
a
mom
h
5.
Which
of
the
following
does
the
price
of
both
tours
include
A.
Lessons.
B.
Lift
tickets.
C.
Daily
surfboard.
D.
Ski
equipment.
B
We
want
our
children
to
do
their
homework,
but
are
we
going
enough
to
help
“Parents
shouldn’t
just
tell
kids
to
do
homework,”
says
William
Corey,
headmaster
of
the
Brent
International
School
in
Subic
Bay(苏比克湾)
Philippines(菲律宾).
“They
should
also
provide
the
right
atmosphere(气氛).”
Some
ways
to
help
your
kids
get
their
schoolwork
done:
●Set
up
a
quiet
comfortable
study
area
away
from
the
television,
loud
music
and
telephones.
●Pay
attention
to
what
your
children
are
doing.
Even
if
they
don’t
need
help
with
homework,
they
will
appreciate(感激)
knowing
that
you
are
interested
in.
Praise
them
for
a
job
well
done.
●Never
use
homework
as
punishment(惩罚),
or
refer
to
it
in
negative
terms.
Make
it
one
of
the
most
interesting
parts
of
the
day.
●If
your
child
has
a
heavy
workload,
break
it
up
into
smaller
tasks,
giving
praise
and
rest
time
between
each
assignment.
●Keep
in
contact
with
teachers
to
make
sure
that
all
homework
is
being
brought
home
and
done
properly.
根据短文内容，选择最佳答案。
6.
According
to
the
passage,
which
of
the
following
is
wrong
A.
Although
children
don’t
need
help
with
homework,
they
are
pleasant
if
parents
praise
them.
B.
The
parents
should
pay
attention
to
what
the
children
are
doing.
C.
When
kids
do
something
wrong,
you’d
better
ask
them
to
do
more
homework.
D.
Parents
should
keep
in
touch
with
teachers
properly.
7.
The
underlined
phrase
“away
from”
means
“______”
in
Chinese.
A.
远离
B.
靠近
C.
搬走
D.
关闭
8.
What
should
parents
do
when
their
children
did
their
homework
well
A.
Punishment
them.
B.
Praise
them.
C.
Appreciate
them.
D.
Help
them.
9.
If
a
child
has
a
heavy
workload,
his
parents
______.
A.
should
ask
his
child
to
finish
it
without
rest
B.
should
reduce
the
workload
C.
should
encourage
their
child
D.
A
and
B
10.
The
author’s
purpose
of
writing
this
text
is
to
______.
A.
tell
children
how
to
do
homework
B.
tell
teachers
how
to
teach
little
kids
C.
tell
parents
how
to
help
their
kids
get
their
schoolwork
done
D.
tell
parents
how
to
punish
their
kids
八、书面表达（15分）
去年夏天，你和家人去了海南岛，那里风景优美，气候宜人。你在海滩上漫步、嬉戏，在海里游泳、冲浪，过得非常快乐。请你用英语描述一下自己在海南岛的这次旅游经历。
要求：1、词数80左右；
2、不可逐句翻译，可适当发挥。
My
Visit
to
Hainan
Island
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
第三部分
课标新题探究
九、短文填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
根据短文内容填入适当的单词，使短文意思完整，首字母已给出。
Peter
Clark
wants
to
be
a
running
s
1
.
He
gets
up
at
six
in
the
morning.
He
runs
before
b
2
.
He
has
breakfast
at
seven.
He
eats
three
eggs,
two
h
3
and
a
big
apple
for
breakfast.
He
doesn’t
eat
salad
or
ice
cream
in
the
morning.
He
has
lunch
at
t
4
o’clock.
He
eats
chicken,
French
fries,
some
salad
and
two
oranges.
During
the
b
5
,
he
often
has
dessert
and
ice
creams.
He
says
that
eating
m
6
food
can
make
him
tall
and
strong.
He
likes
playing
balls
very
much.
After
four
in
the
a
7
,
he
plays
with
his
friends.
W
8
he
gets
home,
he
is
very
hungry.
He
has
lots
of
food
for
d
9
.
He
says
that
exercise
makes
him
to
have
much
food.
More
food
makes
him
h
10
.
1.
________
2.
________
3.
________
4.
________
5.
________
6.
________
7.
________
8.
________
9.
________
10.
________
十、任务阅读（共10分，每小题1分）。
Animal
Sleeping
Habits
Most
animals
sleep
in
much
the
same
way
as
we
do,
but
they
deep
in
different
positions
and
for
varying
lengths
of
time.
First,
let’s
consider
one
or
two
domestic
animals.
Hops
stud
up
to
sleep,
but
cows
lie
down.
Cows
sleep
for
a
couple
of
hours
less
than
horses
each
day.
Cats
seem
to
sleep
almost
all
day
and
all
night.
If
they
have
nothing
special
to
do,
they
just
curl
up(蜷作一团)
in
a
warm
spot
and
go
to
sleep.
What
about
wild
animals
Lions
generally
sleep
in
the
shade
of
a
bush
and
many
of
them
sleep
for
twenty
hours
a
day.
Elephants
sleep
for
about
two
hours
at
a
time,
sometimes
lying
down
but
usually
standing
up.
Giraffes
sleep
for
only
ten
minutes
at
a
time,
but
they
sleep
many
times
a
day.
They
sleep
standing
up.
Monkeys
sleep
for
about
the
same
time
as
humans.
Baby
monkeys
sleep
for
twelve
hours
or
more
each
day.
They
like
to
cuddle(依偎)
up
together
in
groups
or
lie
close
to
their
mothers
when
they
sleep.
Gorillas
sleep
at
night.
They
sleep
in
nests
which
they
make
from
leaves
and
branches.
根据短文内容，回答下列问题。
1.
“....much
the
same
way
as
we
do,
...”
(Line
1)
Who
is
meant
by
“we”
________________________________________________________
2.
“...
they
just
curl
up....”
(Line
5)
What
just
curl
up
________________________________________________________
3.
“...
they
sleep
many
times
a
day.”
(Line
8-9)
What
sleep
many
times
a
day
________________________________________________________
4.
“They
like
to
cuddle
together...”
(Line
10)
What
like
to
cuddle
together
________________________________________________________
5.
“They
sleep
in
nests
…”
(Line
12)
What
sleep
in
nests
________________________________________________________
【答案】
八、One
possible
version:
My
Visit
to
Hainan
Island
During
last
summer
vacation,
I
went
to
Hainan
Island
with
my
family.
The
weather
was
perfect.
The
sky
was
blue
and
clean,
and
the
sea
was
blue
and
bright.
Walking
by
the
sea
is
just
like
being
in
a
beautiful
picture.
Swimming
in
the
sea
is
quite
different
from
that
in
a
pool,
because
the
depth
is
various
all
the
time.
Maybe
the
water
can’t
afford
you
this
minutes,
and
then
it
will
flow
over
your
head.
Surfing
in
the
sea
is
also
interesting.
We
enjoyed
ourselves
there.
I’m
always
hoping
to
go
there
again
some
day.
九、1.star
2.breakfast
3.hamburgers
4.twelve
5.break
6.more
7.afternoon
8.When
9.dinner
10.healthy
十、1.Human
being/
People.
2.Cats.
3.Giraffes.
4.Baby
monkeys.
5.Gorillas.中考英语考点聚焦五
一、要点梳理
必考词汇
◆1.
match
◇v.（动词），意为“相配；十分相似；和……符合”。例如：
The
tie
matches
your
suit.
那条领带跟你的西装很相配。
It’s
difficult
to
match
the
color
of
old
paint.
很难找到和旧画颜色相配的色彩
◇
n.（名词），意为“火柴,
比赛,
竞赛,
匹配,
(足球,
捧球,
蓝球)比赛”。例如：
We
had
a
friendly
match
with
them.
我们与他们进行了一场友谊比赛。
The
chairs
and
the
desk
are
a
good
match.这些椅子和这种书桌很相配。
【链接中考】
（湖北省武汉市）
—
Why
don’t
you
choose
the
red
tie
—
For
me,
it
doesn’t
______
my
shirt
very
well.
A.
fix
B.
accept
C.
compare
D.
match
【答案】D
◆2.
advice
advice是不可数名词，意为“建议”，可用some，much，a
piece
of，pieces
of等修饰，不能说an
advice或many/
a
few
advices，表示“有关……的建议”时，用介词on接名词、代词或由疑问词引导的不定式。例如：
Let’s
ask
for
his
advice
on
what
to
do
next.
我们去征求一下他的意见下一步该怎么办。
『常用搭配』
give
advice
on对……提出建议
take/follow
one’s
advice接受某人的建议
ask
for
advice征求意见
act
on
one’s
advice照某人的建议去做
accept/refuse
one’s
advice接受（拒绝）某人的建议
offer
advice
to
sb.向某人提供建议
动词形式为advise
『常用搭配』
advise
sb.
to
do
sth.
建议某人去做某事。例如：
My
teacher
advises
me
to
leave
now.老师建议我现在就离开。
【链接中考】
（新疆省阜康市）
Mr.
Black
gave
us
______on
how
to
learn
English
well.
A.
an
advice
B.
many
advices
C.
some
advice
D.
some
advices
【答案】C
◆3.
hear
hear通常表示某种声音“进入我们的耳朵”。是听到、听见的意思，指听的能力和结果，但不一定指有意识地听。
例如：
Suddenly
I
heard
a
strange
noise.
我突然听到一种奇怪的响声。
『辨析活用』
◇
hear是“听见”、“听到”，不是有意识地听，侧重于“听”的结果。hear在作“听见”时，不能用现在进行时态中。
What
did
you
hear
just
now
你刚才听见什么了？
◇
listen是“听”，指有意识地倾听，但不一定听见，侧重于“听”的动作。listen是不及物动词，后面常用介词to。listen
to可以用在进行时态中。
Please
listen
to
the
teacher
carefully
in
class.
课堂上请认真听讲。
【链接中考】
（山东省菏泽市）
I’m
sorry,
I
didn’t
______
you
clearly.
Would
you
say
it
again
A.
hear
B.
notice
C.
see
D.
watch
【答案】A
◆4.
sound
⑴
sound作动词，意为“似乎；听起来”。例如：
His
explanation
sounds
all
right.
他的解释似乎有理。
Your
idea
sounds
a
good
one.
你的想法听起来很好。
⑵
sound为连系动词，后边接形容词，构成系表结构。表示“听起来……”。
That
sounds
interesting.
那听起来很有趣。
That
sounds
boring.
那听起来很无聊。
［拓展］类似的其他常用连系动词：
taste尝起来
feel感受到
touch摸起来
smell闻起来
look看起来
【链接中考】
(2010.浙江省衢州市)
1.
—
Shall
we
go
for
a
picnic
in
the
park
this
Saturday
—
Oh,
that
______
good.
A.
feels
B.
looks
C.
tastes
D.
Sounds
【答案】D
（湖北省黄冈市）
2.
—
Which
T-shirt
do
you
prefer
—The
red
one
.It
______
more
comfortable.
A.
tastes
B.
smells
C.
feels
D.
sounds
【答案】C
(山东省潍坊市)
3.
The
cookies
______
good.
Could
I
have
some
more
A.
taste
B.
smell
C.
feel
D.
sound
【答案】A
◆5.
beside
beside作介词，意为“
(表示位置)在…旁边”。例如：
Here!
There’s
room
beside
me.
嘿!我旁边有空间。
『辨析活用』by,
beside和near
⑴
by和beside均表示“在……旁边”，常可换用。例如：
She
stood
by
the
window.
她站在窗边。
The
hotel
is
beside
(/by)
the
river.
那家饭店在河边。
Put
your
shoes
beside
mine.
把你的鞋子放在我的鞋子旁边。
⑵
near表示“在……附近”，表示的距离比by和beside稍远些，也时常换用。例如：
There
is
a
theatre
near
his
home.
他家附近有一家剧院。
There
is
a
post
office
near
No.
1
Middle
School.
第一中学附近有一所邮局。
【链接中考】
(山东省潍坊市)
The
little
elephant
is
afraid
to
go
alone.
He
always
walks
______
his
mother.
A.
beside
B.
behind
C.
below
D.
under
【答案】A
◆6.
another
⑴
another作形容词，意为“再一，别的，不同的”。例如：
I’ll
give
you
another
example.
我再给你举个例子。
⑵another作代词，意为“另一个”。
例如：
I
don’t
like
this
shirt,
give
me
another
please.我不喜欢这件衬衣,
请另外给我一件。
［拓展］another和the
other
◇another表示三个以上的人或物中同类的另一个；也可用作形容词，修饰后面的名词，意为“另一个，又一个”。
We
need
another
chair.我们再要一把椅子。
　　I
don’t
want
the
green
apple.
Please
give
me
another.我不想要这个箐苹果，请给我另一个吧。
◇the
other表示两个人或两个物中的另一个或另一部分，常与one搭配构成one…,
the
other…句型。
Hold
it
in
this
hand,
not
the
other.用这只手握着,
不要用那只手。
【链接中考】
（江苏省连云港市）
1.
—
Would
you
like
to
have
_______
cake
—
No,
thanks.
I’ve
had
two.
That’s
enough.
A.
other
B.
others
C.
another
D.
the
other
【答案】C
(年上海市)
2.
New
Zealand
has
two
islands.
One
is
North
Island
and
______
is
South
Island.
A.
another
B.
the
other
C.
other
D.
the
others
【答案】B
◆6.
already
already表示“已经”，通常用于肯定句，不用于否定句或疑问句(此时要用
yet)。例如：
He
has
already
read
the
book.
他已经读过这本书。
Has
he
read
the
book
他已经读过这本书吗
『辨析活用』
already,
yet和still
◇already副词，意为“已经”，多用于肯定句中的be动词、助动词之后，行为动词前。有时already用于疑问句中表示惊讶、怀疑等语气。例如：
I
have
finished
reading
this
book
already.我已经读完这本书了。
Have
you
finished
reading
the
book
already？你真的已经读完这本书了？（表示惊讶）
◇yet一般用在疑问句或否定句中。在疑问句中意为“已经”；在否定句中意为“还”，通常放在句末。例如：
—
Have
you
found
the
book
yet？你已经找到那本书了吗？
—
Not
yet.还没找到。
◇still意为“仍然；还”，表示某事正在进行中，可用于各种句式，一般只位于句子中间。例如：Do
you
still
teach
in
that
school？你还在那所学校教书吗？
【链接中考】
（天津市）
1.
—
Would
you
like
to
go
and
see
Avatar
with
me
tonight
—
Thank
you
very
much,
but
I
______
it
already.
A.
see
B.
will
see
C.
have
seen
D.
am
seeing
【答案】C
（四川省巴中市）
2.
My
e-mail
______
to
you
last
night.
Have
you
received
it
______
A.
sent;
yet
B.
is
sent;
already
C.
was
sent;
yet
【答案】C
◆7.
none
none用作代词，意为“没有人;
一个也没有;
一点儿也没有”。例如：
There
were
none
for
him
to
read.
没有人为他朗读。
None
of
guests
want
to
stay.
客人中没有一个想留下不走的。
[拓展]
none
与
no
one
/
nobody
及
nothing
no
one
/
nobody
常用来指人，作主语时谓语动词要用单数形式；nothing
常用来指物，作主语时谓语动词也要用单数形式；none
可指人也可指物，作主语时，如和of连用指不可数名词时，谓语动词要用单数形式；指可数名词时，谓语动词用单、复数均可。例如：
　　No
one
likes
a
person
with
bad
manners.
　　Nothing
is
difficult
in
the
world
if
you
put
your
heart
into
it.
　　None
of
them
has
/
have
seen
me
before.
　　None
of
this
money
belongs
to
me.
　　注意：
　　⑴
none
可与
of
连用表示范围，而
no
one
/
nobody
及
nothing
不可。
　　⑵
none
可用来回答
How
many
/
much…？
的特殊疑问句；而
no
one
/
nobody
及
nothing
则分别用来回答
Who…？
和
What…？
的特殊疑问句。例如：
　　—
How
many
birds
are
there
in
the
tree？
　　—
None.
　　—
What
is
in
the
box？
　　—
Nothing.
　　—
Who
is
in
the
classroom？
　　—
No
one
/
Nobody.
【链接中考】
（湖北省武汉市）
1.
—
How
many
students
are
there
in
the
classroom
—
_______.
They
are
all
in
the
lab.
A.
Some
B.
None
C.
All
D.
Neither
【答案】B
（湖北省黄冈市）
2.
—
How
many
students
like
this
song
—
________
of
us
likes
it.
It
sounds
terrible.
A.
None
B.
Nobody
C.
Every
one
D.
All
【答案】A
◆7.
alone
⑴
alone用作形容词时，只能作表语
(不能作定语)。例如：
She
watches
TV
when
she
is
alone.
独自一人时,她便看电视。
⑵alone用作副词，除表示“独自”外，还可表示“仅仅”，注意要放在有关的词语之后。
例如：For
years
Mary
lived
alone
in
New
York.
玛丽孤身一人在纽约生活了好几年。
⑶alone可用
all,
much,
very
much
等修饰，但一般不用very
修饰。例如：
He
is
all
(much,
very
much)
alone.
他独自一人。
『辨析活用』alone和lonely
alone,
lonely同时作形容词时,
lonely表示感情内心上的孤独,
而alone是没有感彩的。例如：
I
am
alone
but
I
am
not
lonely,虽然我单独一人,但我并不感觉孤独.
When
his
wife
died,
he
was
very
lonely.
太太死后他非常孤独。
【链接中考】
(江苏省无锡市)
Though
his
grandmother
lives
______,
she
never
feels
______.
A.
alone;
alone
B.
lonely;
lonely
C.
alone;
lonely
D.
lonely;
alone
【答案】C
◆8.
prefer
prefer动词，意为“比较喜欢；更喜欢”。不能用于进行时态，其过去式和过去分词均为preferred。
Do
you
prefer
coffee
or
tea
你喜欢咖啡还是茶
［拓展］prefer的各种搭配为：
◇prefer…to…“与……相比更喜欢……”，其后接名词或动名词。
He
prefers
dogs
to
cats.
他很喜欢狗，而不喜欢猫。
I
prefer
skating
to
swimming.与游泳相比我更喜欢滑冰。
◇prefer…rather
than…“宁可／宁愿……而不……”，其后接动词不定式，than后的不定式符号to常省去。
I
prefer
to
stay
at
home
rather
than
go
to
the
cinema.
我宁愿呆在家里也不愿意去看电影。
【链接中考】
（四川省巴中市）
1.
They
preferred
______
rather
than
______
a
bike.
A.
to
walk;
to
ride
B.
walking;
riding
C.
to
walk;
ride
【答案】C
（山东省泰安市）
2.
—
How
about
going
shopping
this
weekend,
Peter
—
Sorry.
I
prefer
______
rather
than
______.
A.
to
stay
at
home,
go
out
B.
to
go
out,
stay
at
home
C.
staying
at
home,
go
out
D.
going
out,
stay
at
home
【答案】A
◆9.
even
⑴
even
表示“甚至”，通常应放在被修饰词语之前，否则会引起含义的变化。例如：
Even
now
he
doesn’t
believe
me.
甚至到现在他还不相信我。(其它时候就不用说了)
Now
he
doesn’t
even
believe
me.
现在他甚至不相信我了。(其他方面的事就更不可能了)
⑵
用来修饰形容词或副词的比较级，表示“比(已经……的)更加……”。例如：
This
film
is
even
more
interesting
than
that
one.
这部电影比那部更有趣。
I
often
drive
fast,
but
he
drives
even
faster.
我经常开车开得很快，但他却开得更快。
『常用搭配』
even
if
即使，尽管。例如：
I
will
come
even
if
[even
though]
it
rains.
即使正雨我也会来。
Even
if
you
don’t
like
wine,
try
a
glass
of
this.
即使你不喜欢喝酒，也不妨尝尝这一杯。
【链接中考】
（台湾省）
Sandy:
How
was
your
vacation
in
America
Linda:
It
couldn’t
be
worse!
I
don’t
　
　
want
to
talk
about
it!
(A)
even
(B)
least
(C)
never
(D)
then
【答案】A
◆10.
since
since十时间点，表示“自从（过去某时）以来”，其着眼点是过去某时，即表示自过去某时延续至今的一段时间，常与现在完成时连用。since既可作介词，又可作从属连词。
⑴
作介词
She
has
worked
here
since
2000.
自2000年以来，她就在这里工作。
⑵
作从属连词
She
has
worked
here
since
she
left
school.自她毕业以来，她就在这里工作。
［拓展］
for十时间段，表示“（延续）……之久”，其着眼点是现在，即表示延续到现在的一段时间（与现在完成时连用），或表示一段已经终结了的时间（与过去时连用），或表示将要延续的一段时间（与将来时连用）。
They
have
lived
in
China
for
two
years.
他们在中国已经住了两年。（现在还住在中国）
【链接中考】
（四川省卷）
1.
I
don’t
have
to
introduce
him
to
you
______
you
know
the
boy.
A.
until
B.
unless
C.
since
D.
but
【答案】C
（浙江省杭州市）
2.
—
How
long
have
you
been
collecting
shells
—
______.
A.
After
I
left
school
B.
Before
I
moved
here
C.
When
I
went
to
the
beach
D.
Since
I
was
ten
years
old
【答案】D
常考短语
◆1.
enjoy
yourself
◇enjoy表示“喜欢”“享受”等，其后可接动名词作宾语，但不能是不定式。例如：
I
enjoyed
reading
these
books
very
much.
我很喜欢读这些书。
◇enjoy后接反身代词，表示“过得快活”，与
have
a
good
time同义，enjoy后所接的反身代词要与句子的主语相对应。例如：
He
enjoyed
himself
at
the
party.
他在晚会上玩得很开心。
I
hope
you
enjoy
yourself
this
evening.
我希望你今晚过得愉快。
◇enjoy
一般只用作及物动词，所以在通常情况下其后不能没有宾语。如：
—
Did
you
enjoy
the
film
你喜欢这部电影吗
—
Yes,
I
enjoyed
it
a
lot.
是的，很喜欢(from
www.)。
【链接中考】
（湖北省咸宁市）
1.
—
I
am
glad
to
be
invited
to
Susan’s
birthday
party
on
Friday
evening,
Mum.
—
yourself,
dear!
But
remember
to
be
back
before
10
o’clock.
A.
Help
B.
Believe
C.
Make
D.
Enjoy
【答案】D
(江苏省盐城市)
2.
—
How
was
your
visit
to
the
World
Park
in
Beijing
—
Wonderful!
We
enjoyed
______very
much.
A.
itself
B.
myself
C.
yourselves
D.
ourselves
【答案】D
◆2.
take
off
◇take
off意为“起飞”。例如：
When
will
the
plane
take
off
飞机何时起飞？
What
was
the
girl
doing
when
the
UFO
took
off
当飞碟起飞时，女孩在干什么？
◇take
off还可以作“脱下”讲，反义词为put
on。例如：
Put
on
your
clothes.
Don’t
take
them
off.
把衣服穿上，别把衣服脱下。
【链接中考】
（天津市）
1.
The
plane
will
______
from
Beijing
Capital
Airport
and
land
in
London
A.
take
up
B.
take
out
C.
take
away
D.
take
off
【答案】D
（青海省，宁夏）
2.
It’s
very
hot
here.
Why
not
______
your
coat
A.
have
on
B.
take
off
C.
put
off
D.
put
on
【答案】B
◆3.
look
after
look
after动词短语，意为“照管，照料，照料；注意，关心”。例如：
Don’t
worry,
Mum.
I
can
look
after
myself.
别担心，妈妈，我能照料自己。
We
look
after
the
baby
carefully.
我们小心地照看着婴儿。
『辨析活用』look
after与take
care
of
◇take
care
of与look
after都能作“照顾、照料”解，可以互相替换。但look
after没有“保管、保护”的意思。例如：
She
stayed
at
home
and
took
care
of
her
mother
yesterday.
＝She
stayed
at
home
and
looked
after
her
mother
yesterday.
昨天她呆在家里照料她母亲了。
◇take
good
care
of和look
after…well意义相同，都是“好好照料、好好照顾”的意思。
但要注意，take
care
of用的是good一词，而look
after则用well。例如：
Don’t
worry.
I
can
take
good
care
of
your
pet
while
you
are
away.
＝Don’t
worry.
I
can
look
after
your
pet
well
while
you
are
away.
放心，你不在时，我会照料好你的宠物的。
【链接中考】
（湖北省荆州市）
—
Peter,
what
if
your
parents
go
out
—
They
ask
me
to
______
myself.
A.
look
after
B.
look
up
C.
look
for
D.
look
through
【答案】A
经典句型
◆1.How
to
learn
English
这是疑问词＋to不定式结构。动词不定式可以和疑问词what,
which,
how,
when,
where,
whether等连用，构成不定式短语，在句中常用作主语、表语或宾语。例如：
How
to
use
the
computer
is
a
question.怎样使用这台计算机是个问题。（作主语）
The
question
is
when
to
start.问题是何时出发。（作表语）
Could
you
tell
me
what
to
write
about
in
this
letter
你能告诉我在信里写什么吗？(作宾语)
能用这种不定式短语作宾语的动词有：tell,
show,
know,
learn,
forget等。
【链接中考】
（江苏省连云港市）
—
We
can
use
QQ
to
communicate
with
each
other
online.
—
Good.
Will
you
please
show
me
_______.
A.
which
to
use
B.
how
to
use
it
C.
what
to
use
D.
where
to
use
it
【答案】B
◆2.
That’s
a
good
idea.
当别人提出一个好的建议和想法时，我们通常用That’s
a
good
idea．来愉快地表示同意。例如：
—Why
don’t
you
ring
Mrs.
Smith？你为什么不给史密斯太太打个电话呢？
—That’s
a
good
idea.
是个好主意。
有时也说Good
ides.／That’s
an
idea.
等。
—Let’s
go
out
for
a
walk，shall
we？我们出去散散步好吗？
—Good
idea.
Where
shall
we
go？好主意，我们去什么地方呢？
【链接中考】
（天津市）
—
Shall
we
raise
some
money
for
the
children
of
Yushu,
Qinghai
Province
—
_______.
A.I
see
B.
It’s
a
pleasure
C.I
don’t
believe
it
D.
That’s
a
good
idea
【答案】D
◆3.
I’ve
never
been
to
Shanghai.
⑴
have
been
to表示某人“曾经去过某处”，表示此人有去过某地的经历，但此人现在在此处，它常与just,
ever,
never,
once,
twice,
several等连用。例如：
—
Have
you
ever
been
to
the
Great
Wall
你曾经去过长城吗？
—
Yes,
I’ve
ever
been
there
only
once.
是的，我曾去过那儿一次
⑵
have
gone
to
表示某人“到某处去了”，或在去的路上或已到某处，反正不在此地。一般不用第一二人称代词作句子的主语。例如：
—
May
I
speak
to
Han
Mei
请韩梅接电话好吗？
—
Sorry,
she’s
gone
to
the
library.
对不起，她去图书馆了。
⑶
have
been
in表示“已在某地”或者“在某地呆过”，其后常与“for+时间段”、“since+时间点或从句”等时间状语连用。例如：
He
has
been
in
Hainan
for
two
years.他在海南二年了。
Jack
has
been
in
Xinjiang
since
last
year.杰克自从去年以来就呆在新疆。
【链接中考】
（吉林省通化市）
1.
—
Where
are
the
Greens
,may
I
ask
—
Well,
they
______
to
England.
They
have
been
there
for
nearly
a
week
now.
A.
have
been
B.
are
going
to
C.
have
gone
D.
will
go
【答案】A
（四川省巴中市）
2.
—
Could
you
tell
me
______
—
Yes.
He
______
to
Australia.
A.
where
is
he;
has
gone
B.
where
he
is;
has
gone
C.
where
he
is;
has
been
【答案】B
◆4.
But
I
get
on
well
with
her.
get
on
well
with
sb./
sth.
表示“和某人相处……”或“工作进展……”。表示工作进展时一般要用进行时。例如：
I
get
on
well
with
my
classmate.我和同学相处的很好。
—
How
are
you
getting
on
with
your
English
你英语学得怎么样？
—
Very
well.
非常好。
【链接中考】
（广东省）
If
you
get
on
well
your
classmates,
you’ll
enjoy
your
school
life
more.
A.
to
B.
at
C.
with
D.
in
【答案】C
◆5.
You’ve
heard
of
him,
haven’t
you
反意疑问句前一部分为肯定句，后一部分用否定句；前一部分用否定句，后一部分则用肯定句，两部分在人称、时态上必须保持一致。反意疑问句要用Yes或No来回答，并要严格根据事实来回答。特别值得注意的是，对第二种结构的反意疑问句的回答，英汉表达不相同。
◇肯定反意疑问句的回答
当陈述部分为否定式，反意疑问句为肯定式时，其回答往往与汉语不一致，需特别引起注意：
—
It
isn’t
cheap,
is
it
它不便宜吧
—
Yes,
it
is.不，很便宜。
—
He
doesn’t
love
her,
does
he
他不爱她，是吗
—
No,
he
doesn’t.是的，他不爱她。
◇否定反意疑问句的回答
当陈述部分为肯定式，反意疑问句为否定式时，其回答一般不会造成困难，一般只需照情况回答即可：
—
It’s
new,
isn’t
it
是新的，对吗
—
Yes,
it
is.对，是新的。
—
He
wants
to
go,
doesn’t
he
他想去，对吗
—
No,
he
doesn’t.不，他不想去。
【链接中考】
（广西南宁）
1.
—
Hi,
Sam.
Your
mother’s
busy
these
days,
______
—
The
meat.
A.
has
she
B.
is
she
C.
hasn’t
she
D.
isn’t
she
【答案】D
（浙江省杭州市）
2.
Alice
had
a
wonderful
time
yesterday,
______
A.
hadn’t
she
B.
wasn’t
she
C.
didn’t
she
D.
wouldn’t
she
【答案】C
二、知识全练
第一部分
基础知识运用
一、词汇(共10分，每小题1分)
A)请根据句意及所给汉语提示，写出句中所缺单词(每空一词)。
1.
There
was
a
______(微笑)
on
his
face
when
he
heard
the
news.
2.
Please
tell
us
your
______(经历)
in
America.
3.
The
scientists
think
that
______(行星)
is
probably
lifeless.
4.
The
police
asked
them
to
______(描述)
what
they
saw
5.
There
will
be
______(暴风雪)
there
in
a
few
days.
B)请根据句意，用所给单词的正确形式填空。
6.
I
didn’t
go
______(where)
yesterday.
I
only
stayed
at
home.
7.
You’ve
asked
me
that
question
______(two).
8.
Jim
fell
off
his
bike
yesterday,
______(luck)
he
didn’t
hurt
himself.
9.
Don’t
go
______
(cross)
the
street
when
the
traffic
light
is
red.
10.—
Was
Carol
at
the
party
last
night
—
Yes,
she
______(wear)
a
really
nice
dress.
二、选择填空（共15分，每小题1分）。
1.
—
______
something
to
drink
—
Good
idea.
I’m
thirsty.
A.
What
about
B.
Shall
we
C.
Would
you
D.
Why
not
2.
—
Bob,
may
I
______
your
bike
—
Sure,
but
you’d
better
not
______
it
to
others.
A.
lend;
lend
B.
borrow;
lend
C.
borrow;
borrow
D.
borrow;
lend
3.
—
Mum,
David
asks
me
to
go
to
his
birthday
party
tonight
and
I
won’t
be
back
until
ten.
—
How
nice!
Just
______!
A.
enjoy
yourself
B.
help
yourself
C.
go
there
yourself
D.
by
yourself
4.
—
What
did
you
say
I
didn’t
quite
catch
you.
—
OK.
Let
me
______
my
words.
A.
repeat
B.
speak
C.
say
D.
tell
5.
—
Have
you
heard
the
song
“Better
City,
Better
Life”
—
Yes,
it
______
beautiful.
A.
smells
B.
sounds
C.
looks
D.
tastes
6.
—
_____,
could
you
tell
me
the
way
to
the
Park
Street
—
The
Park
Street
Oh,
go
straight
and
turn
left.
You
can’t
miss
it.
A.
I’m
sorry
B.
Thank
you
C.
Excuse
me
D.
By
the
way
7.
—
_____
did
they
travel
to
Beijing
—
They
went
there
______
plane.
A.
How;
by
B.
What;
take
C.
How;
take
D.
What;
by
8.
—
It
was
quite
a
heavy
snow
last
night.
Is
everyone
here
now
—
Yes,
and
______
of
us
was
late
for
school
this
morning.
A.
neither
B.
either
C.
all
D.
none
9.
I
don’t
like
this
color.
Could
you
show
me
______
me,
please
A.
other
B.
others
C.
the
other
D.
another
10.—You
know
Jane
Have
you
______
met
her
before
—
Yes.
We
first
met
in
2008.
A.
yet
B.
ever
C.
already
D.
just
11.—
My
sports
shoes
are
not
here.
Can
I
use
yours
—
______
A.
Here
are
you
B.
Here
you
are
C.
Here
it
is
D.
Here
my
shoes
are
12.—
Do
you
know
______
now
—
In
the
People’s
Hotel.
A.
where
is
Tom
working
B.
where
did
Tom
work
C.
where
Tom
is
working
D.
where
Tom
worked
13.—
Can
you
swim,
Millie
—
Yes,
I
______
swim
when
I
was
only
five
years
old.
A.
could
B.
can
C.
am
able
to
D.
can’t
14.—
I’m
going
to
the
Science
Museum.
Bus
No.
3
goes
there,
______
—
Yes,
I
think
so.
A
No.
21
goes
there,
too.
A.
can’t
it
B.
doesn’t
it
C.
won’t
it
D.
isn’t
he
15.—
What
do
you
think
of
traditional
Beijing
Opera
—
______
A.
I
am
not
sure
B.
I
don’t
believe
it
C.
I’m
afraid
not.
D.
I’m
a
fan
of
it
三、选用方框中所给词（组）的适当形式填空。（共10分，每小题1分）。
in,
fact,
be
interested
in,
take
up,
tidy
up,
sailing,
all
the
time,
far
away,
as
well
as,
right
now
1.You
would
better
________
before
the
guests
arrive.
2.
She
lives
in
the
mountain
village
happily
________.
3.
She
________
music
when
she
was
six
years
old.
4.
It’s
hard
________
when
there
is
no
wind.
5.
Harry
has
knowledge
________
experience.
6.
Too
many
activities
________
too
much
of
our
time
for
study.
7.
Are
you
busy
________
I
want
to
ask
some
questions.
8.
________,
I
am
not
interested
in
play
football.
9.
________,
what
happened
to
him
yesterday
10.It’s
very
________
from
here.
You
had
better
take
a
bus.
四、根据汉语完成下列句子，每空一词。（共10分，每小题2分）。
1.医生告诉我让我深呼吸。
　The
doctor
told
me
_______________________.
2.T-恤衫两个小时接卖光了。
　We
____________________________
in
two
hours.
3.王女士去过巴黎。
　Ms
Wang
___________________
Paris.
4.借助于词典，他可以读英文报纸。
　_________________,
he
can
read
English
newspapers.
5.因为下雨，他没去公园。
　He
didn’t
go
to
the
park
______________the
rain.
五、完成对话。（共10分，每小题2分）。
在下面对话的空白处，填入适当的短语或句子，使对话意思完整、通顺。
A:
I’m
going
to
improve
my
English
this
term.
B:
Really
(1)____________________
A:
I
want
to
get
up
early
and
to
read
English
for
half
an
hour
in
the
morning.
B:
Oh,
that’s
a
good
idea.
A:
And
(2)_________________
on
radio
while
I
am
having
breakfast.
B:
Anything
else
A:
I
want
to
read
English
for
two
hours
before
I
go
to
bed
in
the
evening
and
(3)_______________
in
English
every
day.
B:
Is
that
all
A:
Yes.
(4)_________________
B:
Great!
But
you
see,
you
spend
so
much
time
studying
English.
(5)________________
A:
I
don’t
know!
第二部分
综合能力提升
六、完形填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
NASA
will
set
up
moon
camp
NASA①
may
be
going
to
the
same
old
moon
soon
again,
but
it’s
going
to
do
something
different
this
time:
1
there.
According
to
NASA,
it
will
set
up
an
international
camp
on
__2__
of
the
moon’s
poles
and
in
2020
astronauts
will
3
on
it.
For
the
next
four
years,
astronauts
will
only
spend
a
week
at
a
time,
and
by
2024,
NASA
will
have
astronauts
living
on
the
moon
__4__
six-month
periods.
Very
different
from
NASA’s
moon
missions
(任务)
of
the
1960s,
the
5
stands
for
a
new
step
of
space
exploration.
NASA’s
missions
in
the
1960s
were
all
around
the
6
area
of
the
moon,
and
this
time
NASA
decided
to
go
to
the
moon’s
poles
7
they
are
best
for
longer-term
researches.
NASA’s
moon
plan
is
8
for
American
astronauts－it
includes
space
travelers
from
other
countries,
too.
In
2004,
the
US
announced
a
plan
to
9
astronauts
to
the
moon
by
2020.
Last
year,
NASA
said
it
would
10
$104
billion
to
get
back
to
the
moon
for
its
first
trip,
but
NASA
did
not
say
what
a
permanent
(永久的)
moon
camp
would
cost.
According
to
NASA,
the
time
frame
(时间范围)
for
its
moon
plan
is:
2009－the
first
test
of
one
of
the
spaceships.
2014－the
first
manned
(载人的)
test
flight
of
the
exploration
vehicle
with
no
moon
landing.
2020－the
first
flight
of
four
astronauts
to
the
moon.
注：①NASA＝National
Aeronautics
and
Space
Administration(美国)国家航空和宇宙航行局
1.
A.
Get
B.
Leave
C.
Stay
D.
Fly
2.
A.
one
B.
neither
C.
another
D.
both
3.
A.
arrive
B.
get
C.
carry
D.
land
4.
A.
after
B.
for
C.
since
D.
before
5.
A.
NASA
B.
astronauts
C.
moon
D.
new
plan
6.
A.
middle
B.
bottom
C.
back
D.
behind
7.
A.
but
B.
though
C.
because
D.
while
8.
A.
only
B.
just
C.
just
not
D.
not
just
9.
A.
take
B.
return
C.
bring
D.
carry
10.
A.
take
B.
pay
C.
cost
D.
spend
七、阅读理解（共10分，每小题1分）。
A
This
story
is
about
two
mice.
They
are
friends.
One
mouse
lives
in
the
country.
The
other
lives
in
the
city.
After
many
years
the
country
mouse
sees
the
city
mouse.
He
says.
“Come
and
see
me
at
my
house
in
the
country.”
So
the
city
mouse
goes.
The
country
mouse
takes
him
to
his
house
in
a
field.
He
gives
him
the
nicest
food.
But
the
city
mouse
says,
“This
food
is
no
good,
and
your
house
is
no
good.
Why
do
you
live
in
a
hole
in
the
field
You
must
come
and
live
with
me
in
the
city.”
So
the
country
mouse
goes
to
the
house
of
the
city
mouse.
It
is
a
very
good
house.
Nice
food
is
ready
for
them
to
eat.
But
just
as
they
begin
to
eat,
they
hear
a
great
noise,
“Run!
Run!
The
cat
is
coming!”
The
two
friends
run
away
quickly
and
hide
in
a
dark
hole.
After
some
time
they
come
out.
The
country
mouse
says
to
the
city
mouse,
“I
don’t
like
to
live
in
the
city.
I
like
to
live
in
my
hole
in
the
field.
It
is
nicer
to
be
poor
and
happy
than
to
be
rich
and
live
in
fear.”
根据短文内容，选择最佳答案。
1.The
two
mice
live
_____.
A.
in
the
same
place
B.
in
difference
places
C.
in
the
city
D.
in
the
country
2.
The
city
mouse
_____.
A.
wouldn’t
I
he
to
go
to
the
house
of
the
country
mouse
B.
lives
with
the
country
mouse
for
a
long
time
C.
gets
nothing
to
eat
from
the
country
mouse
D.
doesn’t
think
the
house
and
the
food
of
the
country
3.
The
city
mouse
never
asks
the
country
mouse
to
his
house,
does
he
A.
No,
he
does.
B.
Yes,
he
does.
C.
No,
he
doesn’t.
D.
I
think
so.
4.
How
are
the
two
mice
A.
They
are
helpful.
B.
They
are
not
well.
C.
They
are
good
friends
D.
They
don’t
know
each
other.
5.
When
a
cat
is
coming,
the
two
mice
_____.
A.
stay
there
quietly
B.
run
away
quickly
C.
say
“Hello”
to
it
D.
want
to
be
friends
with
it
B
Franz
Schubert
was
a
famous
musician
in
the
world.
But
he
lived
a
very
hard
life
and
often
went
hungry
when
he
was
young.
One
day
he
went
into
a
small
restaurant,
hoping
he
might
meet
some
friends
there.
He
looked
around
but
found
nobody
he
could
borrow
any
money
from.
Then
his
eyes
fell
on
a
paper
on
one
of
the
tables.
In
it
was
a
short
poem.
He
read
the
poem.
He
wrote
a
piece
of
music
for
the
poem
and
took
his
work
(作品)
to
the
owner
of
the
restaurant.
He
only
had
a
dish
of
beef
and
potatoes
for
it.
Thirty
years
after
his
death,
this
manuscript
by
Schubert
was
worth
about
40,000
francs.
It
was
his
famous
Berceuse
(《摇篮曲》).
根据短文内容，选择最佳答案。
6.
Franz
Schubert
was
______.
A.
a
writer
B.
a
teacher
C.
a
restaurant
owner
D.
a
musician
7.
This
story
tells
us
______.
A.
what
happened
to
Schubert
one
day
B.
Schubert
made
a
lot
of
money
C.
Berceuse
was
sold
at
last
D.
Schubert
became
a
rich
man
8.
The
underlined
word
“manuscript”
means
______
in
Chinese.
A.
诗报
B.
散文
C.
手稿
D.
油画
9.
The
writer
of
the
story
thought
______.
A.
the
restaurant
owner
had
pity
(同情)
on
the
musician
B.
the
restaurant
owner
should
give
more
to
the
musician
C.
the
manuscript
was
just
worth
a
dish
of
beef
and
potatoes
D.
the
restaurant
owner
didn’t
like
music
at
all
10.
The
best
title
for
this
passage
is
“______”.
A.
the
Hard
Life
of
Franz
Schubert
B.
Franz
Schubert,
a
Musician
C.
Franz
Schubert
and
Berceuse
D.
How
Franz
Schubert
Became
a
Musician
八、书面表达（15分）
为了交流学习经验，提高学习效率，《英语周报》正在举办以“How
to
be
a
good
learner ”为题的征文比赛。请你踊跃投稿。内容提示：
要求：1、内容符合学习实际，语句通顺，书写规范；
2、词数80左右，已给出的句子不计人总词数。
How
to
be
a
good
learner
As
a
good
learner,
we
should___________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
______________________________________________________________________________
I
hope
all
these
will
be
helpful
to
us.
第三部分
课标新题探究
九、短文填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
根据单词的首写字母和文章意思，填写单词使短文完整。
Special
Asian
country:
East
meets
West
Singapore
is
a
special
Asian
country.
Eastern
culture
meets
and
mixes
with
w
1
culture
there.
Singapore
people
share
many
things
with
us,
such
as
the
life
s
2
.
But
they
are
also
very
d
3
from
us.
English
is
Singapore’s
official(官方)
language.
People
there
start
to
learn
English
when
they
are
k
4
.
So,
your
Singapore
study
trip
will
be
very
interesting.
You
are
going
to
take
a
good
l
5
at
Singapore.
For
example,
you
will
see
the
highest
man-made
waterfall
and
many
rare
birds
at
Jurong
Birdpark(裕廊飞禽公园).
And,
you
will
visit
some
schools
and
know
h
6
kids
there
have
classes.
You
will
learn
u
7
everyday
English,
like
names
of
food
and
table
manners.
Remember
to
take
notes
because
you
will
have
meals
in
real
r
8
.
You
will
have
to
practise
your
English.
It’s
great,
isn’t
it
The
Singapore
trip
has
a
very
special
part.
That
is
leadership
training.
You
often
act
as
a
leader
(sometimes
you
don’t
notice
it
y
9
.
Then,
how
to
be
a
good
leader
Or,
you
can
stand
out
and
be
the
leader,
but
you
don’t
catch
the
c
10
.
Then,
how
to
change
this
You
may
find
your
answers
and
be
a
successful
leader
after
the
training.
1.
________
2.
________
3.
________
4.
________
5.
________
6.
________
7.
________
8.
________
9.
________
10.
________
十、任务阅读（共10分，每小题1分）。
A
Clean
Slate
A
“clean
slate”
in
English
means
having
a
fresh
start.
It
means
we
can
forget
the
past
and
begin
again.
The
beginning
of
the
second
term
gives
us
a
(A)
to
have
a
clean
slate.
Some
of
us
may
have
failed
a
subject
in
the
first
term.
We
may
have
spent
Spring
Festival
feeling
sad
and
worrying
about
the
second
term.
(B)But
my
advice
is
to
forget
about
the
past
and
think
about
the
future.
Many
people
have
had
trouble
in
school.
Many
people
have
failed
exams.
Chris,
a
second-year
high
school
student
remembers
that
clearly.
In
her
first
term
she
failed
math.
She
says,
“(C)but
then,
at
first,
I,
good
marks,
very
sad,
was,
studied
hard,
I,
and
got.”
Penny,
a
high
school
teacher,
also
remembers
failing
math
in
middle
school.
But
she
improved
by
doing
more
exercises,
and
by
asking
her
teacher
and
her
classmates
for
help.
After
studying
hard,
she
says,
“I
got
almost
full
marks
in
the
college
entrance
exams
(大学入学考试).”
Failing
an
exam
isn’t
the
end
of
the
world;
we
all
fail
sometimes.
(D)It
is
important
that
we
keep
trying
to
improve
and
to
do
our
best.
Failing
a
test
does
not
mean
that
we
can’t
go
to
university.
It
does
not
mean
that
we
are
stupid.
It
just
means
that
we
have
to
work
harder
and
that
we
should
ask
for
extra
help
from
our
teacher
and
our
friends.
The
first
term
is
over;
it’s
history.
Today,
we
have
a
clean
slate,
so
be
happy,
be
positive
and
be
successful.
1.在(A)处空白处填入一个适当的词。
　________________________________
2.把(B)处句子译成汉语。
　________________________________
3.把(C)处斜体部分组成一个句子。
　________________________________
4.将画线部分(D)改写成It’s
important
______
us
______
keep
trying
to
improve
and
to
do
our
best.
5.What
does
“failing
an
exam”
meaning
according
to
the
passage
____________________________________________________
【答案】
六、1-5
CADBD
6-10
ACDBC
七、1-5
BDBCB
6-10
DACBC
八、One
possible
version:
As
a
good
learner,
we
should
have
good
habits
and
ways
in
learning.
We
need
to
get
ready
for
our
lessons
before
class
and
always
listen
carefully
in
class.
After
class,
we
must
go
over
the
lessons
and
finish
our
homework
on
time.
It’s
good
to
study
in
groups
and
help
each
other.
As
a
student,
working
hard
is
important,
but
don’t
forget
to
do
sports
and
keep
healthy.
We
should
do
more
reading
in
our
free
time.
If
we
have
any
problems,
we’d
better
ask
others
for
help.
I
hope
all
these
will
be
helpful
to
us.
九、1.western
2.style
3.different
4.kids
5.look
6.how
7.useful
8.restaurants
9.yourself
10.chance
十、1.chance
2.不过我的建议是忘掉过去着眼未来。
3.At
first
I
was
very
sad
but
then
I
studied
hard
and
got
good
marks.
4.for,
to
5.It
means
that
we
have
to
work
harder
and
should
ask
for
extra
help
from
our
teacher
and
our
friends.
PAGE
1考点聚焦
一、要点梳理
必考词汇
◆1.
call
call
是一个多义词，有时在没有上下文的情况下可能有歧义，如
call
sb.
就可表示“叫醒某人”、“呼唤某人”、
“打电话给某人”等。例如：
Will
you
go
and
call
Jack
你去叫一下杰克好吗
Call
me
if
I
don’t
wake
up
in
time.
如果到时我没醒的话，请叫醒我。
I
called
him
last
night.
我昨晚给他打过话。
◇表示看望或拜访某人，后接介词
on
或
upon；
表示到某地拜访，后接介词
at。
例如：
Let’s
call
on
John
[at
John’s
house].
我们拜访约翰(去约翰家)吧。
◇表示给某人或某地打电话，英语用
call
(up)
a
person
or
a
place,
注意不要按汉语习惯在call
后加介词
to。比较：
最后我们决定给布莱克先生(的办公室)打电话。
正：At
last
we
decided
to
call
(up)
Mr.
Black(‘s
office).
误：At
last
we
decided
to
call
to
Mr.
Black(s
office).
【链接中考】
（四川省巴中市）
Marcia
called
him
three
times
yesterday,
but
nobody
answered.
A.
visited
B.
told
C.
phoned
【答案】C
◆2.
rise
rise是“上升，上涨，起床，站立”的意思。该词含义较广，总的意思是指依次上升，如自然界的日、月、星、雾、云的上升，人体从睡、跪、坐、躺等姿势站立起来等。该词为不及物动词，其过去式与过去分词分别是rose和risen。例如：
The
sun
rises
in
the
east
and
sets
in
the
west.日出于东而落于西。
Prices
rise
every
day
in
those
countries.那些国家里的物价天天上涨。
【拓展】
raise用作及物动词，其基本含义是“使升起来，举起”，它的过去分词和过去式都是raised。例如：
Heavy
rains
raised
the
river.暴雨使河水水位升高。
We
must
raise
the
living
standard
of
the
people.我们必须提高人民的生活水平。
◆3.
below
介词below表示方位、数值等“在……下面”、“低于……”之意。例如：
The
sun
sinks
below
the
horizon.太阳落在地平线下。
It
is
four
degrees
below
zero
this
morning.今晨零下四度。
【注意】below在方位上仅表示位置低于所提及的事物，而under则表示处于垂直线的下面。例如：
The
river
below
the
bridge
is
thirty
meters
deep.桥下这条河流有30米深。
The
river
under
the
bridge
is
ten
meters
deep.桥下的河流（指桥身正下方的河水）有10米深。
【链接中考】
(浙江省衢州市)
五、词汇运用
B．用方框中所给单词的适当形式填空，每词限用一次。(计5分）
travel
,
wonderful
,
below
,
minute
,
rise
66.
Night
temperature
usually
falls
_____
zero
in
winter
here.
67.
Take
the
bus
,
and
you
will
get
to
the
university
in
five
______.
68.
All
of
the
children
had
a
_____
school
trip
to
the
mountain.
69.
I
heard
the
______
news
that
there
was
an
accident
on
wall
street
this
morning.
70.
The
river
_______
again
often
the
storm
yesterday.
【答案】66
below
67
minutes
68
wonderful
69
traveling
70
rose
◆4.
disappear
⑴
表示“消失”，是不及物动词，因此不能用于被动语态。例如：
His
anger
soon
disappeared.
他的怒气一会儿就消了。
⑵
通常不与副词
away
连用，以免用词重复。例如：
He
disappeared
into
the
dark.
他消失在黑暗中。
【链接中考】
(年上海市VI
用括号中所给单词的适当形式完成下列句子每空格限填
一词。)
63.Let’s
hope
that
all
our
troubles
will
_______
soon.(appear)
【答案】63.disappear
◆5.
allow
⑴
allow作“允许”或“许可”讲，常搭用动词不定式短语作宾语补足语，即allow
sb.
to
do
sth.允许某人做某事。例如：
Please
allow
me
to
carry
your
bag.
请让我替你拿包。
My
boss
doesn’t
allow
me
to
use
the
telephone.
我的老板不允许我用电话。
⑵
allow
作“许可”，“允许”讲，只可搭配动名词短语作宾语，不可直接搭用动词不定式作宾补，即只可说
allow
doing
sth.,
不可说allow
to
do
sth.
例如：
Do
they
allow
smoking
in
the
cinemas
他们允许在电影院里抽烟吗
Smoking
is
not
allowed
here.
此处禁止吸烟。
⑶
allow还常与
out,
in,
up等副词搭配使用，即
allow
sb.
in/
out/
up等。例如：
She
is
not
allowed
out
after
dark.
天黑后，不准她出去。
The
patient
was
allowed
up
after
ten
days.
十天后病人才被允许起床(下地)。
【链接中考】
（江苏省镇江市）
1.
It’s
said
that
smoking
won’t
be
______
in
indoor
public
places
or
workplaces
in
China
soon.
A.
attacked
B.
admired
C.
attracted
D.
allowed
【答案】D
（浙江省卷）
2.
It
to
drive
after
drinking
wine.
A.
is
allowed
B.
is
not
allowed
C
is
made
.
D
is
welcomed
【答案】B
◆6.
against
⑴
表示“反对”，其反义词为
for。若表示“强烈反对”，一般用副词
strongly。例如：
Are
you
for
or
against
the
plan
你对这个计划是赞成还是反对呢
Public
opinion
is
strongly
against
his
visit
to
the
country.
舆论强烈反对他访问这个国家。
表示“反对”，经常同那些与之含义相关的动词连用
(如：fight,
struggle,
protest,
argue,
guard等)。
The
soldiers
fought
against
the
enemy
bravely.
士兵们勇敢地打敌人。
⑵
表示位置，意为“靠着”、“顶着”、“迎着”、“衬着”等。例如：
The
teacher’s
desk
is
against
the
wall.
老师的办公桌靠墙放着。
He
stood
leaning
against
the
tree.
他站着斜靠在墙上。
【注意】against
是介词，不是动词。
【链接中考】
（吉林省通化市）
Mr.
Black
is
strongly
______
keeping
animals
in
the
zoo,
because
he
thinks
animals
should
also
have
the
right
to
enjoy
freedom.
A.
up
B.
for
C.
against
D.
down
【答案】C
◆7.
either
⑴
作形容词，表示“（两者之中）任何一个；两者都……”。例如：
You
may
read
either
book.
这两本书中你可以随便读一本。
⑵
作副词，意为“也”，用于否定句或否定词组后加强语气。例如：
I
don’t
like
the
book,
either.
我也不喜欢这本书。
⑶
用作代词，表示“两者之一”。例如：
Either
girl
is
beautiful.
/
Both
girls
are
beautiful
两个女孩都漂亮。
◇either作不定代词用，既可代替名词，也可作定语，兼有“两者中的每一个”或“两者中的任何一个”的意思。
either可与of连用，后接复数名词，作主语时谓语动词用单数。
⑷
用作连词，意为“或者；要么”。例如：
Either
you
or
I
am
to
go.
不是你去，就是我去。
『常用搭配』
either…or…“或者……或者”，“不是……就是……”。用来连接两个并列的成分，可以连接两个介词短语、或连接两个动词，或连接两个名词。当连接两个主语时，谓语的动词形式要和靠近的主语保持一致，either…or…的否定形式是neither…nor…。
【链接中考】
(山东省潍坊市)
—
Would
you
like
tea
or
coffee
—
_______
is
OK.I
really
don’t
mind.
A.
None
B.
Either
C.
Neither
D.
Both
【答案】B
◆8.
instead
instead为副词，意思是“代替；取而代之的是”，表示前面的事情没做，而是做了后面的事。instead一般位于句首或句尾，但不能位于祈使句的前面，instead也不能位于句中。另外，instead所在的那个句子一般是肯定形式，前面的那个句子一般是否定形式。例如：
If
you
cannot
go,
let
him
go
instead.
如果你不能去，让他替你去。例如：
『常用搭配』instead
of
instead
of是介词词组，后面接一个并列成分，可能是名词、代词、介词短语、副词等。接动词时，应该用-ing形式。instead
of短语具有否定意义，是没有做的事情。例如：
I
have
to
finish
my
work
instead
of
going
out.我必须完成工作，不能外出。
【链接中考】
（湖北省襄樊市）
1.
—
How
will
she
deal
with
the
work
—
She
doesn’t
want
to
do
it
by
herself
.
She
wants
to
ask
someone
else
to
do
it,
_______.
A.
yet
B.
instead
C.
too
D.
either
【答案】B
（江苏省连云港市）
2.
—Let’s
go
hiking
_______
staying
at
home,
shall
we
—
A
good
idea.
A.
as
well
as
B.
in
order
to
C.
instead
of
D.
in
addition
to
【答案】C
常考短语
◆1.
millions
of
基数词hundred，thousand，million，billion表示确定的数时，用数词直接加在它们的前面即可。当hundred，thousand，million，billion等后面跟of短语时，则要加-s，表示一个大约数。
例如：
Millions
of
dollars
have
gone
into
the
building
of
this
factory.
在修建这座工厂时花掉了数百万美元。
【链接中考】
（广西省定西市）
girls
took
part
in
the
Happy
Girl
Competition
but
only
few
of
them
succeeded.
A.
Million
of
B.
Many
million
of
C.
One
million
of
D.
Millions
of
【答案】D
◆2.
set
up
set
up动词短语，意为“建立，建造,
创立,
竖立”。例如：
Plenty
of
foreign
firms
have
set
up
factories
here.
很多外国公司已在这里开办工厂。
A
monument
was
set
up
as
a
memorial
to
the
dead
soldiers.
为阵亡将士立了一个纪念碑。
set
up是一个“动词＋副词”构成的短语动词，其中up为副词，set为动词。这类短语动词若有代词作宾语，必须将代词放于动词和副词之间。
The
school
is
very
beautiful.
The
government
set
it
up
last
year.
那座学校很美丽，它是政府去年建起来的。
【链接中考】
（浙江省杭州市）
Eton
College
in
England
was
______
in
1440
by
King
Henry
VI
to
give
free
education
to
poor
students.
A.
cleaned
up
B.
set
up
C.
fixed
up
D.
cheered
up
【答案】B
◆3.
look
through
look
through的基本含义有：
⑴
透过…看去；穿过…看去。例句：
Look
through
this
window
and
you’ll
see
a
beautiful
garden.
透过这扇窗户你会看到一个美丽的花园。
⑵
浏览；(从头到尾)粗略地翻阅；温习(功课等)。例句：
She
spent
the
whole
night
looking
through
the
student’s
homework.
她花了一晚上看学生的作业。
He
looked
through
his
notes
before
the
final
examination.
他期末考试前温习了自己的笔记。
【链接中考】
（湖北省宜昌市）
—
Would
you
please ______ the
paper
for
me
and
see
if
there
are
any
obvious(明显的)
mistakes
—
Of
course
I
will.
A.
look
around
B.
look
through
C.
look
up
D.
look
into
【答案】B
◆4.
rather
than
rather
than
是一个并列连词，用法比较复杂，现归纳如下：
　　⑴
rather
than
与would
连用时，构成“would
rather...than...”句式，意思是“宁愿……而不愿……”，表示主观愿望，即在两者之中选择其一。例如：
　　She’d
rather
die
than
lose
the
children.
她宁愿死也不愿失去孩子们。
　　⑵
rather
than不与would连用时，表示客观事实，意为“是……而不是……；与其……不如……”。它连接的并列成分可以是名词、代词、形容词、介词(短语)、动名词、分句、不定式、动词等。例如：
　　He
is
an
explorer
rather
than
a
sailor.
与其说他是一个海员，不如说他是一个探险者。
　　We
will
have
the
meeting
in
the
classroom
rather
than
in
the
great
hall.
我们是在教室里开会，不是在大厅里。
　　I
decided
to
write
rather
than
(to)
telephone.
我决定写信而不打电话。
【链接中考】
（湖北省宜昌市）
1.
—
Why
would
some
workers
in
Foxcon
die
_______
continue
working
in
the
factory
—
Psychologists
say
they
are
under
too
much
pressure.
A.
better
than
B.
by
accident
C.
instead
of
D.
rather
than
【答案】D
（四川省巴中市）
2.
They
preferred
______
rather
than
______
a
bike.
A.
to
walk;
to
ride
B.
walking;
riding
C.
to
walk;
ride
【答案】C
◆5.
as…as…
as…as…表示“与……一样”时，常用as＋形容词（副词）＋as...结构，其中的形容词或副词用原级。第一个as是副词，修饰其后的形容词或副词；第二个as是连词，连接一个表示比较的状语从句。这个状语从句的谓语动词如果与主句中的谓语相同，则经常被省略；如果状语从句的谓语动词与主句中的谓语不同，则不能省略。例如：
　　This
mooncake
is
as
nice
as
that
one
(is
nice).这块月饼像那块一样好吃。
　　有时在从句中以do的某个形式代替主句中的谓语部分。例如：
She
speaks
English
as
well
as
her
sister
does.她的英语说得和她姐姐一样好。
【拓展】not
so(as)…as…
表示“不如……那样”时，常用not
so(as)＋形容词（副词)＋as...，在not后用副词so或as均可，但句末的as不能用so代替。其状语从句中谓语省略与否与as...as相同。例如：
　　It
is
not
as(so)
warm
today
as
yesterday.今天不如昨天暖和。
　　在运用这个句式结构时要注意：
　　①如果as后面的形容词用作定语，而被修饰的名词又是可数的单数名词，则应加不定冠词a(an)于名词之前，形容词之后。例如：
　　Tom
is
as
clever
a
boy
as
Jack.汤姆与杰克一样聪明。
　　②在as...as或not
so(as)...as结构中，被比较的两个词必需是同类的。例如：
误：Your
handwriting
is
as
good
as
Mary.
正：Your
handwriting
is
as
good
as
Mary’s.
【链接中考】
（青海省，宁夏）
She
is
very
good
at
painting.
She
can
paint
______
her
teacher.
A.
as
better
as
B.
as
well
as
C.
as
good
as
D.
so
well
as
【答案】B
经典句型
◆1.
…but
it
was
still
too
dark
to
see
anything.
⑴
“too…
to…”意为“太……以致不能……”，表示具有否定意义的结果。too后接形容词或副词表示否定的原因，后面的to十动词原形表示否定的内容。
I’m
too
tired
to
go
any
farther.我太累了，不能再向前走了。
⑵“too…to…”以肯定的形式表达了否定的意义，以简单句的结构表达了复合句的内容，这个结构可转换为“so…that…not…”句型。
The
woman
is
too
old
to
get
on
the
bus.
→The
woman
is
so
old
that
she
can’t
get
on
the
bus.
⑶“too…to…”结构也可以用反义的形容词转换为“enough
to”结构。
The
room
is
too
small
to
hold
so
many
people.
→The
room
isn’t
big
enough
to
hold
so
many
people.
⑷“too…to…”结构中，too后的形容词若修饰单数可数名词。需要加的不定冠词a
(an)要放在形容词之后和名词之前。
It’s
too
cold
a
day
to
have
a
swim.
⑸
当“too…to…”结构中不定式的逻辑主语是动作的执行者，若需要时则由for引出。
　The
box
is
too
heavy
for
the
boy
to
carry.
【链接中考】
(四川省内江市)
1.
Lucy
was
______
excited
______
say
anything
when
she
heard
the
good
news
.
A.
so;
that
B.
so;
to
C.
too;
to
【答案】C
（河南省）
2.
I
often
laugh
when
I
see
my
grandma
learning
pop
songs
But
she
says，“One
is
never
old
to
learn’’
A.
too
B.
so
C.
very
D.
quite
【答案】A
◆2.
How
did
people
move
these
huge
pieces
of
stone
from
so
far
⑴
so
far表示“到目前为止”“至今”等(=until
now)，通常与现在完成时连用。例如：
We
haven’t
had
any
trouble
so
far.
到上前为止，我们还没有遇到任何麻烦。
So
far
the
work
has
been
easy
but
things
may
change.
到目前为此，这工作还很容易，但情况可能有变化。
【注】有时可用一般现在时(尤其是某些状态动词)。例如：
So
far,
it
is
only
talk.
至今还只是空谈。
⑵
表示“到这种程度或范围”，根据情况选用适当时态。例如：
I
can
only
help
him
so
far.
我只能帮他到这种程度。
【链接中考】
（四川省成都市）
Although
this
village
isn’t
big,
all
the
other
villages
I
_____
so
far
are
smaller.
A.
visited
B.
have
visited
C.
would
visit
【答案】B
◆3.
I
don’t
think
so.
◇此句主要用来表示对某事的看法。当不同意对方的观点和看法时用它。so是代词，代替上文所说之事。
　　—
Can
you
carry
the
heavy
box？你能搬动这个重箱子吗？
—
Sorry,
I
don’t
think
so.
对不起，我想我搬不动。
◇反义句：I
think
so.
我认为是这样的。当同意对方的观点或看法要说这句话。
—
Is
this
your
computer？这是你的电脑吗？
—
I
think
so.我想是的。
【链接中考】
(黄冈罗田县第一中)
—
Excuse
me,
is
this
seat
taken

—
_______.
That
man
got
his
books
and
left
a
few
minutes
ago.
A.
I’m
afraid
so
B.
I
don’t
think
so
C.
I
don’t
know
D.
I
hope
not
【答案】B
二、知识全练
第一部分
基础知识运用
一、词汇。（共10分，每小题1分）
A)请根据句意及所给汉语提示，写出句中所缺单词(每空一词)。
1.
The
Great
Wall
is
one
of
the
seven
______(奇迹)
of
the
world.
2.
Milk
is
the
______(天然的)
food
for
young
babies.
3.
The
doctor
keeps
a
______(记录)
of
all
the
serious
illnesses.
4.
Their
______(参加)
into
the
war
changed
the
whole
situation.
5.
There
are
many
______(差别)
between
the
twin
sisters.
B)用所给单词的正确形式填空。
6.
The
children
enjoyed
the
______(free)
of
the
school
holidays.
7.
The
old
man
was
still
______(live)
after
twenty-eight.
8.
They
like
______(advertise)
which
show
women
in
office,
planes,
and
cars.
9.
Could
you
show
us
your
new
______(invite)
10.She
looks
______(usual)
today.
What
happened
to
her
二、选择填空（共15分，每小题1分）。
1.
—
Do
you
have
any
plans
for
your
summer
vacation
—
I
am
______
for
London
next
Sunday.
A.
going
to
B.
leaving
C.
will
go
D.
will
leave
2.
—
Why
don’t
you
play
basketball
with
us
—
_____.
A.
Yes,
I
have
B.
That’s
right
C.
I
think
it
D.
A
good
idea
3.
—
Hello,
this
is
Lily
speaking.
Could
I
speak
to
Mr.
Black
—
Sorry.
He
_____
Beijing
for
a
meeting.
A.
has
been
to
B.
went
to
C.
has
gone
to
D.
will
go
to
4.
—
We
should
love
animals
—
______.
They
are
our
friends.
A.
I
disagree
B.
I
agree
C.
I
don’t
think
so
D.
I’m
afraid
not
5.
Usually
computers
_____
to
search
the
Internet.
A.
use
B.
are
using
C.
are
used
D.
used
6.
—
Would
you
help
me
_____
this
math
problem,
Mr.
Lin
It’s
too
hard
for
me.
—
OK.
Let
me
try.
A.
look
after
B.
work
out
C.
think
of
D.
put
on
7.
A
new
bridge
was
_____
over
the
river
last
year.
A.
set
up
B.
came
up
C.
made
up
D.
cleaned
up
8.
Teenagers
should
______
spend
time
with
friends.
A.
allowed
to
B.
allowed
for
C.
be
allowed
D.
be
allowed
to
9.
—
Can
I
come
this
evening
or
tomorrow
morning
—
______
is
OK.
I’m
free
today
and
tomorrow.
A.
Either
B.
Neither
C.
Both
D.
None
10.—
What’s
the
weather
like
today
—
It
is
______
warm
______
yesterday.
A.
so…that
B.
not…until
C.
as…as
D.
too…to
11.
—
It’s
raining
heavily
outside.
What
shall
we
do
next
—
I
think
we
have
to
stay
at
home
______
going
fishing.
A.
instead
of
B.
because
of
C.
would
rather
D.
thanks
to
12.
The
window
is
broken.
Try
to
______
who
broke
it.
(
P.
45
)
A.
find
out
B.
find
C.
look
D.
look
for
13.
It
is
helpful
for
us
to
__________
the
newspapers.
A.
look
for
B.
look
after
C.
look
through
D.
look
up
14.When
you
see
the
sign
_____
in
a
public
place,
you
mustn’t
smoke.
15.—
May
I
borrow
your
bike
—
Certainly.
______.
A.
Here
are
you
B.
Here
it
is
C.
Thank
you
D.
You’re
welcome
三、根据汉语完成下列句子，每空一词。（共10分，每小题2分）。
1.据说贝加尔湖是世界自然景观之一。
　It
is
said
that
Lake
Baikal
_________________________.
2.明年我们有可能到埃及去看金字塔。
　We
_____________
the
Great
Pyramids
in
Egypt
next
year.
3.汤姆长大后想当教练。
Tom
wants
to
be
a
coach
__________________________.
4.吸烟有害于您的健康。
Smoking
will
____________________
your
health.
5.该饭店坐落于市区的边缘。
The
hotel
lies
________________________
the
town.
四、完成对话。（共10分，每小题1分）。
A)请根据上下文情景从方框中选出恰当的选项完成对话(其中有两项是多余的)。
A:
Can
you
tell
me
a
little
about
Mexico
City
B:
(1)________
What
would
you
like
to
know
A:
Well,
what’s
a
good
time
to
visit
B:
(2)________
The
weather
is
always
nice.
A:
Oh,
good!
(3)________
B:
Well,
you
should
visit
the
National
Museum
and
go
to
the
Palace
of
the
Fine
Arts.
A:
(4)________
B:
Oh,
you
shouldn’t
miss
The
Pyramid
of
the
Sun.
(5)________
A:
It
all
sounds
really
exciting.
A.
And
what
should
I
see
there B.
Of
course
not.C.
What
else D.
Anytime.E.
Sure
I
can.F.
Would
you
like
to
go
somewhere G.
It’s
very
interesting.
B)根据对话情景，在每个空白处填上一个适当的句子，使对话的意义连贯、完整。
A:
Hi,
Bruce.
Good
news
for
you.
B:
(6)__________________________
A:
You
won
the
first
prize
in
the
English
competition.
B:
Wow!
I’m
so
glad
to
hear
that.
(7)_____________________
A:
Our
English
teacher
did.
She
said
three
of
the
students
in
our
class
won
the
prize.
B.
What
about
you
A:
(8)_________________,
too.
I
think
I
was
lucky
this
time.
B:
Oh,
so
great!
Congratulations!
A:
It’s
a
great
day
for
us
today.
Let’s
go
out
and
relax
ourselves,
shall
we
B:
Good
idea.
But
(9)______________________
A:
To
the
park,
OK
B:
All
right
But
I
have
to
go
home
and
tell
my
mother
first.
See
you
later.
A:
(10)_________________________.
第二部分
综合能力提升
五、完形填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
请先通读短文，掌握其大意，然后从所给的四个选项中选出最佳的一项填空，使短文意思完整通顺。
Martha
loves
to
run.
In
high
school,
she
won
many
races.
Now,
at
the
age
thirty-three,
running
is
a
big
part
of
her
job.
So
are
swimming
and
bicycling.
Martha
is
a
professional
athlete(职业运动员).
She
competes
in
triathlons
(三项全能).
A
triathlon
is
a
special
kind
of
race.
A
triathlon
has
1
parts.
First,
there
is
a
long
swim.
Then
the
athletes
come
out
of
the
water
and
ride
their
bikes.
When
they
finish
2
their
bikes,
they
have
to
run.
It
is
3
very
difficult
sports
competition.
Three
years
ago.
Martha
went
to
Hawaii.
She
joined
athletes
from
around
the
world.
They
competed
in
the
famous
Ironman
Triathlon
there.
First,
the
athletes
4
almost
a
mile
in
the
ocean.
Then
they
rode
112
miles
5
bike.
6
they
ran
a
26.2-mile
race.
Martha
did
very
7
.
She
finished
the
race,
in
about
ten
hours.
Only
six
women
were
faster
than
Martha.
Martha
is
thinking
about
one
special
race
these
days.
That
race
is
the
Olympic
Triathlon.
Martha
is
working
hard
8
for
the
race.
She
practices
for
many
9
every
day.
She
trains
her
body
and
her
mind.
Sometimes
Martha’s
husband
runs,
rides,
and
swims
with
10
.
Sometimes
she
trains
with
(结交)
other
athletes.
Martha
must
be
healthy,
strong,
fast,
and
smart
to
win
the
race.
1.
A.
two
B.
the
two
C.
three
D.
the
three
2.
A.
ride
B.
riding
C.
to
ride
D.
rode
3.
A.
a
B.
an
C.
the
D.
\
4.
A.
swim
B.
swims
C.
swam
D.
swimming
5.
A.
on
B.
in
C.
at
D.
by
6.
A.
Again
B.
Then
C.
And
D.
Finally
7.
A.
good
B.
well
C
better
D.
best
8.
A.
to
prepare
B.
preparing
C.
prepared
D.
prepares
9.
A.
time
B.
hours
C
minutes
D.
seconds
10.
A.
she
B.
him
C.
her
D.
he
七、阅读理解（共10分，每小题1分）。
A
1001
Questions
Answered
About
Birds
Chapter
Ⅰ
The
Classification(分类)
of
Birds
Chapter
Ⅹ
Numbers
of
Birds
Chapter
Ⅱ
The
Distribution(分布)
of
Birds
Chapter
Ⅺ
Bird-banding
Chapter
Ⅲ
Birds
Flight
Chapter
Ⅻ
Bird-watching
Chapter
Ⅳ
The
Migration(迁徙)
of
Birds
Chapter
ⅩⅢ
Attracting
Birds
to
the
Garden
Chapter
Ⅴ
The
Internal(国内)
of
Birds
Chapter
ⅩⅣ
Bird
Conservation
Chapter
Ⅵ
The
Exterior(国外)
of
Birds
Chapter
ⅩⅤ
Birds
in
Mythology(神话),Tradition
and
History
Chapter
Ⅶ
The
senses
of
Birds
Chapter
ⅩⅥ
Adaptability(适应性)
of
Birds
Chapter
Ⅷ
The
life
Cycle
of
Birds
Chapter
ⅩⅦ
Birds
Books
for
a
Home
Library
Chapter
Ⅸ
The
Size
of
Birds
1.
Which
chapter
of
the
book
is
likely
to
contain
information
on
how
far
birds
can
fly
A.
Chapter
V
B.
ChapterⅢ
C.
Chapter
ⅩⅣ
D.
Chapter
Ⅷ
2.You
wonder
about
how
far
birds
can
see.
Which
chapter
of
the
book
would
you
read
A.
Chapter
Ⅸ
B.
Chapter
Ⅴ
C.
Chapter
VI
D.
Chapter
Ⅶ
3.
In
which
chapter
would
the
author
be
likely
to
give
you
information
about
seasonal
flights
of
birds
like
wild
geese
A.
Chapter
Ⅱ
B.
Chapter
Ⅲ
C.
Chapter
Ⅳ
D.
Chapter
Ⅷ
4.
If
you
read
______,
you’ll
know
the
largest
one
of
the
birds.
A.
The
life
Cycle
of
Birds
B.
The
Size
of
Birds
C.
Bird-banding
D.
Numbers
of
Birds
5.
If
you
want
to
know
how
birds
are
endangered
and
how
they
should
be
protected,
which
chapter
would
you
refer
to
A
ChapterⅩⅣ
B
ChapterⅩⅢ
C.
ChapterⅩⅤ
D.
ChapterⅩ
B
Do
you
know
that
you
can
use
your
watch
as
a
compass
on
a
sunny
day
Take
a
watch
and
point
the
hour-hand
in
the
direction
of
the
sun.
Imagine
a
line
which
runs
from
the
center
of
the
watch
through
a
point
half-way
between
the
hour-hand
and
number
one.
This
line
will
surely
point
south.
If
you
know
astronomy
a
little,
you
will
understand
why
this
works.
In
the
northern
half
of
the
earth,
the
sun
is
in
the
south
at
noon.
In
Russia,
the
real
noon
is
one
o’clock.
If
at
that
time
we
point
the
hour-hand
at
the
sun,
the
hour-hand
and
number
one
will
point
south.
That
is
why
you
must
imagine
a
line
which
will
run
from
the
center
of
the
watch
through
a
point
half-way
between
the
hour-hand
and
number
one.
It
will
point
south.
If
you
are
in
the
southern
part
of
our
planet,
you
must
point
number
12
at
the
sun.
The
line
which
you
can
imagine
between
number
twelve
and
the
hour-hand
will
then
show
north.
根据短文内容，选择最佳答案。
6.
When
we
carry
out
this
experiment
in
the
northern
part
of
the
earth,
we
should
point
_____
at
the
sun.
A.
number
12
B.
the
minute-hand
C.
the
hour-hand
D.
number
one
7.
What
does
the
underlined
word
“astronomy”
mean
in
the
passage
A.
天文学　　　　B.
地理学　　　　　　
C.
宇航学　　　　
D.
逻辑学
8.
The
passage
tells
us
that
we
can
use
a
watch
_____
on
a
sunny
day.
A.
to
study
the
weather
B.
to
show
direction
C.
to
enjoy
ourselves
D.
to
keep
good
time
9.
If
you
are
in
Australia,
which
of
the
following
is
the
right
way
to
show
north
(D)
10.
What’s
the
best
tile
for
this
passage
A.
Your
Watch
Becomes
a
Compass.
B.
An
interesting
Watch.
C.
The
Story
of
a
Watch.
D.
The
Sun
and
a
Watch.
八、书面表达（15分）
根据图画内容和所给英文提示，以“A
trip
to
Beijing
World
Park”为题，写一篇短文介绍你上星期天的和父母一起去北京世界公园的情况。
Beijing
World
Park
Many
places
of
interest
from
all
over
the
world
…..,and
so
on
要求：1、词数80左右；
2、条理清楚，语意连贯，句式规范，字迹工整。
A
trip
to
Beijing
World
Park
____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
_______________________________________________________________________________
第三部分
课标新题探究
九、短文填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
从下面方框中选出10个单词，用它们的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
Bicycles
or
cars
In
China
many
people
ride
bikes.
People
ride
them
here
and
there,
as
they
think
outdoor
cycling
will
make
them
h
1
and
strong
and
will
make
the
pollution
problem
less
serious.
Americans,
in
contrast,
are
a
people
o
2
the
wheel.
Wherever
you
go,
you’ll
see
cars.
There
are
so
many
cars
that
there
are
traffic
jams
e
3
.
As
a
matter
of
fact,
it’s
quite
disturbing
to
r
4
that
they
are
becoming
a
group
of
machine-bound
people.
But
does
this
mean
we
should
give
up
automobiles
for
bicycles
No.
We
should
discourage
the
use
of
cars
as
much
as
p
5
to
save
our
e
6
and
energy.
Everyone
wants
to
reduce
pollution,
as
the
pollution
problem
is
very
s
7
.
People
operate
motor
vehicles
and
the
exhaust
from
them
causes
a
large
percentage
of
all
air
pollution.
On
the
o__8__
hand,
the
need
for
energy
increases
every
day,
and
some
sources
of
energy
are
being
used
up
very
q
9
.
Oil
will
last
for
no
more
than
40
years,
while
coal
could
last
300
years.
The
way
we’re
heading
is
towards
a
world
where
people
are
going
to
be
c
10
and
hungry.
1.
________
2._________
3.
__________
4.
_________
5.
________
6.
________
7._________
8.
_________
9.
_________
10.
________
十、任务阅读（共10分，每小题1分）。
Get
Up,
Get
Active,
And
Get
Fit
Spring
Festival
makes
us
fat.
We
visit
our
relatives
and
eat.
We
watch
television
and
eat.
We
play
video
games
and
eat.
　　1　　
The
easiest
way
to
avoid
getting
fat
is
to
eat
less,
but
that
is
too
hard!
There
is
just
too
much
good
food
to
eat.
2
Hamburgers,
Kentucky
Fried
Chicken
and
French
fries
taste
good
but
harm
our
health.
Most
of
these
foods
come
from
America.
3
25%
of
American
kids
are
overweight.
They
get
less
than
15
minutes
of
exercise
a
day,
drink
2
litres
of
soft
drinks,
and
spend
20%
of
their
day
watching
TV
and
playing
video
games.
However,
most
American
kids
are
very
active
and
there
are
lots
of
opportunities
for
them
to
play
sports.
They
play
basketball,
American
football,
soccer,
baseball
and
ice
hockey
(冰上曲棍球).
4
So
what
can
you
do
in
China
to
get
fit
instead
of
fat
Well,
you
can
start
doing
simple
things,
like
walking
more.
5
Swimming
is
also
a
great
way
to
keep
fit.
Just
look
at
Guo
Jingjing!
Or
you
can
skip
rope(跳绳)
or
play
basketball
with
friends.
It
doesn’t
matter
what
you
do
as
long
as
you
do
it.
So,
get
up,
get
active
and
get
fit!
将下面五句话还原到文中空白处，并将其标号填入表格相应的位置。
A.
There
are
even
“Little
Leagues”
for
kids
as
young
as
5
to
play
organized
sports.
B.
Get
off
the
bus
one
stop
before
your
school
and
walk
the
rest
of
the
way.
C.
By
the
end
of
the
holidays
we
are
fatter
and
less
fit.
D.
And
Americans
are
worried
about
their
children,
too.
E.
And
much
of
that
good
food
is
not
good
for
our
health.
1
2
3
4
5
【答案】
A
trip
to
Beijing
World
Park
Last
Sunday,
my
parents
and
I
went
to
Beijing
World
Park.
We
took
a
bus
there.
It
took
us
about
two
hours.
On
the
way
there,
we
enjoyed
the
beauty
of
the
scenery.
At
half
past
twelve,
we
got
there.
We
really
enjoyed
ourselves
in
it.
We
had
a
big
lunch
in
Beijing
World
Park.
We
saw
many
places
of
interest
in
it,
such
as
the
Pyramids
of
Egypt,
the
Great
Wall
and
The
Taj
Mahal,
and
so
on.
At
5
p
m.
we
came
back.
We
had
a
good
time.
I
think
the
World
Park
is
the
most
interesting
place
to
visit
in
the
world.
八、1.healthy
2.on
3.everywhere
4.realize
5.possible
6.environment
7.serious
8.other
9.quickly
10.cold
九、1-5
CEDAB考点聚焦四
一、要点梳理
必考词汇
◆1.
somewhere
⑴
somewhere
作为副词，意为“在某处，到某处”，例如：
I
have
seem
him
somewhere
before.我以前在哪儿见过他。
⑵
somewhere
另一词性，是代词（不定代词），而不是名词。例如：
we
need
to
find
somewhere
to
live.
我们得找个住的地方
。
『常用搭配』
get
somewhere有进展；somewhere
around
\between大约
，……左右。和
about
意思相同。
【链接中考】
(江苏省无锡市)
I
can’t
find
my
watch,
but
it
must
be
_______
in
this
room.
A.
everywhere
B.
nowhere
C.
anywhere
D.
somewhere
【答案】D
◆2.
nobody
nobody是代词，意为“没有人,
无人,
谁也不”。
There
is
nobody
there.
那里没有人。
『辨析活用』
no
one,
nobody与none
⑴
no
one=nobody，两者均只能指人，不能指物；用作主语时，谓语动词一般用单数。例如：No
one
[Nobody]
likes
it.
没人喜欢它。
⑵
none
既可指人也可指物，其后通常接of短语；用作主语时，若指不可数名词，谓语只能用单数，若指可数名词，则谓语可用单数(较正式)也可用复数(用于非正式文体，但更符合惯用法)。例如：
None
of
the
food
was
left.
一点食物都没留下。
None
of
the
books
is
[are]
interesting.
没有一本书有趣。
⑶
none
往往暗示有一定的范围(这种范围通常就表现在其后的
of
短语上)，而
no
one
或
nobody
则不暗示这种范围。
例如：
A:
Did
any
of
your
friends
come
to
see
you
你的朋友当中有谁来看过你吗
B:
None.
一个也没来。
A:
Did
anyone
come
to
see
you
有人来看过你吗
B:
No
one
[Nobody].
谁也没来(from
www.)。
◇none
有时暗示一种数量，即指数量上“一个也没有”，而
no
one
或
nobody
则往往表示一种全面否定，即指“谁都没有”，所以在回答
how
many
或
how
much
的提问时，通常用
none，而在回答
who
的提问时，通常用
no
one
或
nobody。例如：
①—
How
many
English
books
have
you
read
你读过多少本英文书
—
None.
一本也没读。
②—
Who
went
to
see
the
film
谁去看电影了
—
No
one
[Nobody].
谁也没去。
【链接中考】
(湖南长沙)
1.
—
Who
helped
you
clean
the
classroom
yesterday
—
______.
I
cleaned
it
all
by
myself.
A.
Somebody
B.
Nobody
C.
Everybody
【答案】B
（江苏省苏州市）
2.
—
Wow!
You’ve
got
so
many
skirts.
—
But
_______
of
them
are
in
fashion
now.
A.
all
B.
both
C.
neither
D.
none
【答案】D
（湖北省武汉市）
3.
—
How
many
students
are
there
in
the
classroom
—
________.
They
are
all
in
the
lab.
A.
Some
B.
None
C.
All
D.
Neither
【答案】B
◆3.
all
all修饰名词主语时，可放在主语或行为动词之前，但要放在be动词之后。当be动词是句中最后一个词时，all要放在动词之前。例如：
All
the
boys
study
well
The
boys
all
study
well
孩子们都学习得很好。
—
Are
you
young
pioneers
你们是少先队员吗？
—
Yes,
we
all
are.
是的，我们都是少先队员。
『辨析活用』all和both
表示“全体”，可用all和both，但all表示三个或三个以上的人或物的“全体”，而both则表示两个人或物的“全体”。例如：
All
the
five
students
are
from
the
USA.五个学生都来自美国。
Both
the
two
girls
are
pretty.两个女孩都长得漂亮。
『常用搭配』
⑴
all
of
实足（后面如果加代词，代词前面不需要修饰词）例如：
All
of
them
like
disco
dance.
他们都喜欢迪斯科舞。
⑵
all与not连用通常表示“部分否定”。例如：
All
my
friends
cannot
swim.
我所有的朋友并不都会游泳。
I
don’t
know
all
of
them.
我并不都认识他们。
⑶
at
all作“完全，根本”解，多用于否定句，条件句。如用于肯定句，疑问句。可作“真的，确实”解。例如：
If
it
were
not
for
the
sun,
we
could
not
live
at
all.
如果没有太阳，我们根本不能生存。
⑷
all
over到处，全部
He’s
wet
all
over.他浑身湿透。
⑸
all
alone独自
I’m
all
alone
here
at
present.目前我单独一人在这里。
【链接中考】
（河南省）
To
help
Tommy
learn
better,
his
parents
have
done
they
could:
cards,
tapes,
special
learning
centers,
in
short,
everything
they
can
think
of.
A.
both
B.
all
C.
none
D.
neither
【答案】B
◆4.
join
join意为“加入某一种组织，成为其中一员”，join后面还可接表示人的名词或代词，表示加入到某人或某些人的行列中去。例如：
My
uncle
joined
the
party
in
1998.我叔叔是1998年入党的。
『辨析活用』
◇join
in表示“加入，参与”某种活动，in之后可接名词或动词-ing形式，表示“参加某人的活动”，可以说join
sb.
in
(doing)
sth.。例如：
He
joined
them
in
the
work.他同他们一起工作。
Will
you
join
us
in
playing
basketball 你跟我们一起打篮球好吗？
◇take
part
in指参加会议或群众性活动，重在说明句子主语参加该项活动并在其中发挥作用。例如：
The
teacher
took
part
in
our
discussion
yesterday.昨天老师参加了我们的讨论。
(2010福建三明市)
—
I’m
afraid
English
is
too
hard
for
me.
—
_______,
and
you
will
improve
it!
A.
Join
the
English
club
B.
Go
to
the
concert
one
C.
Stay
up
last
【答案】A
◆5.
ago
ago副词，意为“以前”，主要用于一般过去时。例如：
He
met
her
three
days
ago.
他三天前碰到过她。
『辨析活用』ago和before
ago和before都可用作副词与时间段连用，表示“……之前”，但它们的用法有所不同。
“时间段+ago”，表示从说话时刻算起的若干时间以前，常用于一般过去时；“时间段+
before”，表示从过去某时起若干时间以前，与过去完成时连用。例如：
He
was
here
an
hour
ago.
他一小时前还在这里的。
I
have
never
seen
him
before.
我以前从未见过他。
◇before可作介词，后接时间点；也可作连词，引导时间状语从句。而ago不能用作介词和连词。例如：
He
will
be
back
before
five
o’clock.
他会在五点钟以前回来。
I’ll
ring
you
up
before
I
leave
home.
我离家以前将给你打电话。
【链接中考】
（青海省，宁夏）
1.
—
Have
you
read
this
book？
—
Yes.
I
______
it
two
weeks
ago.
A.
am
reading
B.
have
read
C.
will
read
D.
read
【答案】D
（2010广西南宁）
2.
Mr.
Brown
knew
nothing
about
the
good
news
______
his
wife
told
it
to
him.
A.
before
B.
after
C.
since
D.
if
【答案】A
常考短语
◆1.
pick
up
pick
up表示“拾起”，“拿起”，“捡起”等意思。pick
up是由“动词+副词”构成的短语，后面接代词作宾语时要把代词放在动词和副词之间。例如：
I
would
have
picked
it
up
if
I
had
noticed
it.
我如果看见的话,
我早就把它拣起来了。
(山东省烟台市)
The
ticket
is
on
the
floor,
please
_______.
A.
pick
up
it　　　B.
look
for　　
C.
pick
it
up　　　D.
look
it
up
【答案】C
经典句型
◆1.
How
does
Tony
get
to
school
how作疑问副词,
引起问句（表示方法，手段，状态），意为“如何,
怎样”。例如：
How
does
he
go
to
school
他是怎样去上学的？
回答时常用一下两种形式：
　　⑴“by＋doing”可以表示方法、手段或原因，此时by的介词短语多用作状语。
　　By
working
hard
I
made
great
progress
this
term.
通过刻苦努力，我在本学期取得了巨大的进步。
⑵“by＋名词”也可以用来表达方式或手段，尤其用于表示运输或取道的方式。
I
go
to
work
by
bike
every
day.
我每天骑自行车上班。
【链接中考】
（湖北省襄樊市）
—
______
do
you
study
for
a
test

—
I
study
by
working
with
a
group
.
A.
Where
B.
How
C.
When
D.
Why
【答案】B
◆2.
—
Why
didn’t
they
want
them
—
Because
they
wanted
…
在回答why的问句时，应该用because来回答。例如：
—
Why
didn’t
you
go
to
see
the
film 你为什么没去看电影？
—
Because
I
have
seen
it.因为我看过了。
【链接中考】
（湖北省荆州市）
—
Why
didn’t
Betty
come
to
school
yesterday
—
_______
she
was
ill.
A.
But
B.
Though
C.
If
D.
Because
【答案】D
◆3.
How
long
did
it
take
to
get
there
take动词，意为“花费……”，常用it作形式主语，宾语大多是时间。常用句型为：It
takes(sb)
some
time
to
do
sth.。例如：
Just
a
minute,
it
won’t
take
me
long
to
change.
等一下,我很快就可以换好衣服。
『辨析活用』spend,
take,
pay和cost
　　⑴
spend作“花费”讲，既可用作“花钱”，也可用作“花时间”。人作主语。用在表示“为某事而花钱”时，后接介词on。即：spend
some
money
on
sth.
　　She
spent
five
dollars
on
the
dictionary.她买那本词典花了五美元
表示“花时间做某事”时，可接on＋名词或in＋动词ing。形式，in可省去。即spend
some
time
on
sth.或spend
some
time
(in)
doing
sth.
I
spend
an
hour
(in)
reading
every
day.
我每天花一小时读书。
⑵
take用来指“花费”，只能表达“花费时间”，而不能表达“花费金钱”。主语通常是事物。
It
took
the
workers
two
years
build
the
bridge.
工人花了两年时间才建成这座桥。
⑶
pay指“某人买某物（或为某事）付多少钱（给某人）”，常与for连用。常见结构分别为：pay
sb.
some
money或pay
money
for
sth.
I
paid
￥350
for
that
new
bike.
我花了三百五十元买了那辆新自行车。
⑷
cost指花钱，主语是事或物。其常见结构是
sth.
costs
sb.
some
money。
The
dictionary
cost
me
50
yuan.
这本字典花了我50元钱。
【链接中考】
（福州市）
1.
—
What
a
nice
model
ship!
—
Thank
you.
It
______
me
three
days
to
make
it.
A.
paid
B.
spent
C.
took
D.
wasted
【答案】C
（四川达州）
2.
—
Your
watch
is
so
beautiful.
It
must
be
expensive.
—
Not
at
all.
I
only
￥20
on
it.
A.
cost
B.
spent
C.
paid
D.
took
【答案】B
（甘肃省兰州市）
3.
How
much
does
the
ticket
______
from
Shanghai
to
Beijing
A.
cost
B.
took
C.
spend
D.
pay
【答案】A
二、知识全练
第一部分
基础知识运用
一、词汇。（共20分，每小题1分）
A.根据句意及所给首字母，在空格上填写正确的单词。
1.
The
story
is
______(枯燥的).
Please
tell
us
an
interesting
one.
2.
Our
______(家乡)
is
becoming
more
and
more
beautiful.
3.
Two
days
later,
they
went
on
their
______(旅行).
4.
Does
your
grandfather
lives
on
the
______(第二)
floor
5.
He
was
born
in
______(十一月)
9,
1992.
B.根据句意及所给汉语，在空格上填写正确的单词。
6.
The
coat
may
be
expensive
but
looks
c______.
7.
It
was
b______
to
sit
there
without
anything
to
do.
8.
Can
you
show
me
the
w______
to
the
Post
Office
9.
We
must
look
for
s______
to
live.
10.Do
you
know
how
an
a______
flies
in
a
spacecraft
C.根据句意，用所给单词的适当形式填空。
11.Keep
the
sun
behind
you
when
you
take
________(photo).
12.
Would
you
be
interested
in
______(sightsee)
13.
Of
all
the
students,
I
ran
______(far).
14.—
She
looks
______(happy).
What’s
wrong
with
her
—
Oh,
she
lost
her
keys.
15.
The
spaceship
landed
______(safe).
The
three
astronauts
went
out
of
it.
二、选择填空（共15分，每小题1分）。
1.
Don’t
talk
to
Tom
like
that.
He
is
only
an
______
boy.
A.
eleven
year-old
B.
eleven
year
old
C.
eleven-years-old
D.
eleven-year-old
2.
—
How
does
Tony
go
to
school
every
day
—
He
lives
the
_______
from
the
school,
so
he
goes
by
bus.
A.
farthest
B.
longest
C.
nearest
D.
shortest
3.
Which
of
the
four
buildings
is
in
USA
A
B
C
D
4.
—When
did
Hong
Kong
return
to
our
motherland
—
_____
July
1st,
1997.
A.
On
B.
In
C.
At
D.
For
5.
Mr.
White
______
Beijing
on
Monday
morning.
A.
arrived
at
B.
reached
C.
got
D.
arrive
6.
The
moon
light
is
coming
in
the
window.
A.
across
B.
through
C.
over
D.
by
7.
—
When
did
your
brother
come
back
—
About
half
an
hour
______.
A.
after
B.
later
C.
ago
D.
in
8.
—
Do
you
think
Jim
will
pass
the
Chinese
exam
—
Sure.
He
______
a
lot
of
time
on
it.
A.
took
B.
cost
C.
paid
D.
spent
9.
My
sister
decided
to
______
an
actor
when
she
finished
school.
A.
do
B.
be
C.
want
D.
play
10.
The
children
planted
more
trees
and
flowers
after
they
______
Greener
China.
A.
joined
B.
took
part
in
C.
became
D.
were
11.—
______
are
you
going
to
spend
your
holiday
—
Los
Angeles.
A.
Who
B.
Whose
C.
When
D.
Where
12.—
What
do
you
______
TV
play
—
They’re
too
boring.
A.
think
of
B.
talk
about
C.
talk
with
D.
think
over
13.—
Did
you
travel
by
car
—
______.
We
didn’t
have
a
car.
A.
Yes,
we
did
B.
No,
we
didn’t
C.
No,
we
did
D.
Yes,
we
didn’t
14.—
______
will
you
stay
in
Shenzhen
for
your
holiday
—
For
about
two
weeks.
A.
How
often
B.
How
long
C.
How
soon
D.
What
time
15.—
______
is
the
most
expensive
way
to
travel
—
By
plane.
A.
How
B.
When
C.
What
D.
Where
三、按要求改写下列各句，每空一词。（共5分，每小题1分）。
1.
He
had
lunch
at
school
every
day
last
year.(改为否定句)
He
______
______
lunch
at
school
every
day
last
year.
2.
Tina
went
to
the
mountain
on
vacation.(改为一般疑问句)
______
Tina
______
to
the
mountain
on
vacation
3.
We
went
to
summer
camp
last
Sunday.(对划线部分提问)
　_____
_____
you
_____
last
Sunday
4.
Mr.
Green
has
worked
in
Beijing
for
about
two
years.
(对划线部分提问)
____
____
____
Mr.
Green
_____
in
Beijing
5.
They
went
to
do
some
shopping
yesterday
afternoon.(改为同义句)
They
_____
_____
yesterday
afternoon
四、根据汉语完成下列句子，每空一词。（共10分，每小题2分）。
1.你在巴黎过得愉快吗？
Did
you
have
______
______
______
in
Paris
2.非常感谢你邀请我参加你的晚会。
　Thanks
______
______
for
asking
me
to
your
party.
3.我们一直在为考试做准备。
　We
are
______
______
______
the
exam.
4.谢谢你，不过我必须复习迎考。
That’s
very
nice
of
you,
but
I
have
to
______
______
an
exam.
5.我却不愿意和他去兜风。
I
don’t
want
to
______
______
______
______
with
him.
五、完成对话。（共10分，每小题1分）。
A.从对话后的选项中选出能填入空白处的最佳选项，其中两项为多余。
L:
It’s
Sunday
tomorrow.
(1)______
W:
Oh,
I’m
going
to
watch
a
football
match.
It’s
between
Korea
and
China.
L:
Wonderful!
I
really
hope
we’ll
win
this
time.
(2)______
W:
At
3
o’clock
in
the
afternoon.
I
have
two
tickets
here.
I
can
let
you
have
one.
(3)______
L:
Of
course
I
do.
But
I
can’t.
We
are
going
to
have
a
basketball
match
tomorrow
afternoon.
W:
What
a
pity!
(4)______
L:
A
team
from
No.2
Middle
School.
W:
(5)______
L:
In
our
school.
W:
Good
luck
to
you
and
your
team
then!
L:
Thank
you.
See
you
later.
W:
See
you.
A.
Would
you
like
to
go
with
me B.
Who
are
you
going
to
play
against C.
You
want
to
go,
don’t
you D.
Where
are
you
going
to
play E.
What
do
you
think F.
What
time
is
it
going
to
be G.
What
are
you
going
to
do
B.在下面对话的空白处填入适当的句子，使对话意思完整、通顺。
A:
Hello!
May
I
speak
to
Toby
B:
(6)____________________
A:
Hi,
Toby!
This
is
Tina
speaking.
B:
What’s
wrong
A:
I
called
you
yesterday,
but
there
was
no
reply.
(7)___________________
B:
I
with
my
parents
went
to
the
aquarium.
A:
Really
(8)_________________________
B:
It
was
great.
We
saw
the
dolphins
show.
They’re
very
wonderful.
A:
(9)_______________________
B:
By
the
way,
why
did
you
call
me
A:
Oh,
tomorrow
is
my
birthday.
(10)____________________
B:
Yes,
I’d
low
to.
Thanks
a
lot
第二部分
综合能力提升
六、完形填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
Thousands
of
years
ago,
human
didn’t
live
in
towns.
Sometimes
they
would
live
in
caves
or
build
camps
in
the
forest.
Only
about
thirty
people
1
in
each
camp.
The
men
would
go
hunting
while
the
women
and
children
2
food
from
the
trees
around
the
camp.
All
the
food
was
shared(分享)
between
3
in
the
group.
Every
few
weeks
they
moved
to
another
place
to
find
more
food.
It
was
a
simple
life,
but
people
had
to
be
4
.
They
had
to
make
everything
that
they
needed,
and
they
had
to
know
a
lot
about
plants
and
animals.
Now
most
people
live
in
towns
and
cities,
and
they
work
in
offices
and
factories.
Life
is
5
than
in
the
old
days.
There
are
fewer
dangers,
6
there
is
less
excitement(刺激).
Some
people
go
7
excitement－sailing
around
the
world,
climbing
mountains,
or
exploring
caves.
Most
people
look
forward
to
the
8
,
a
time
when
they
can
enjoy
a
change
from
their
normal
life.
For
some
this
means
going
camping.
But
camping
today
is
9
from
camping
in
the
past.
Gas
cookers,
readymade
food
and
air-beds
mean
people’s
camp
is
much
more
10
than
they
did
in
the
old
times.
1.
A.
lived
B.
talked
C.
came
D.
danced
2.
A.
planted
B.
collected
C.
watched
D.
bought
3.
A.
nobody
B.
anyone
C.
everyone
D.
no
one
4.
A.
polite
B.
kind
C.
careful
D.
clever
5.
A.
worse
B.
faster
C.
easier
D.
harder
6.
A.
but
B.
and
C.
so
D.
as
7.
A.
waiting
for
B.
looking
for
C.
turning
on
D.
putting
on
8.
A.
dreams
B.
gifts
C.
meals
D.
holidays
9.
A.
away
B.
different
C.
free
D.
far
10.
A.
slow
B.
terrible
C.
comfortable
D.
hopeful
七、阅读理解（共10分，每小题1分）。
A
1.
May
is
______.
A.
a
Chinese
B.
a
Singaporean
C.
a
Japanese
D.
an
Australian
2.
Lily’s
personality
is
______
than
May’s.
A.
tougher
B.
shyer
C.
more
confident
D.
outgoing
3.
Which
of
the
follow
is
RIGHT
A.
Mary
and
Ana
are
in
Canada
now.
B.
Mary
and
Ana
first
met
at
the
age
of
12.
C.
Lily
and
May
have
the
same
personalities.
D.
Mary
and
Ana
study
in
the
same
college
now.
4.
When
Ben
is
late,
Fanny
usually
______.
A.
takes
care
of
him
B.
gets
sick
C.
gets
angry
D.
becomes
pleased
5.
What
is
mentioned(提及)
in
Kate’s
description(描述)
A.
Moving
to
the
USA
with
parents.
B.
Enjoying
talking
about
funny
things.
C.
Studying
in
the
same
school.
D.
She
looks
very
shy.
B
Welcome
to
Hotel
EiffelPhone
Number:07979-70078010Website:Buses
to
the
hotelBus
705,
Bus
12,
Bus
47
Usage:◆Keep
the
card
close
to
the
response
zone
on
the
door
until
the
green
light
is
on.
Then
open
the
door.Notice:◆Take
the
card
with
you.
It
will
be
a
help
if
you
get
lost.◆If
the
card
is
lost
during
your
stay
in
the
hotel,
please
call
our
Service
Center.◆Give
the
card
back
to
the
Service
Center
when
you
cheek
out.
6.
Mr.
Zhang
lives
in
______.
A.
Hotel
Eiffel
B.
Hotel
Concorde
C.
Hotel
Mapol
D.
Hotel
Napoleon
7.
The
hotel
is
______.
A.
on
King
Street
near
a
hank
B.
next
to
a
museum
C.
near
a
train
station
D.
on
George
Street
8.
______
buses
can
reach
the
hotel.
A.
Two
B.
Three
C.
Four
D.
Five
9.
If
Mr.
Zhang
gets
lost,
he
can
______.
A.
take
Bus
507
to
the
hotel
B.
wait
until
the
light
is
green
C.
go
back
to
the
hotel
to
search
the
Internet
D.
call
the
hotel
at
the
phone
number
on
the
card
10.
Which
of
the
following
is
true
A.
Open
the
door
when
the
red
light
is
on.
B.
The
card
can
be
used
to
open
the
door.
C.
The
card
can
be
used
for
shopping.
D.
Mr.
Zhang
can
keep
the
card
when
he
checks
out.
八、书面表达（15分）
请按照下面6幅图的内容提示，写一篇题为“Changes
in
Our
Hometown”的英语短文。
（词数：80左右，不包括已经给出的单词）
Past
Present
Changes
in
Our
Hometown
Over
the
past
twenty
years，great
changes
have
taken
place
in
our
hometown.
In
the
past,
_______________________________________________________________________________
_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
第三部分
课标新题探究
九、短文填空（共10分，每小题1分）。
从下面方框中选出10个单词，用它们的适当形式填入短文空格内，使短文意思正确、通顺（每词限用一次）。
London,
Paris,
two,
building,
new,
water,
tower,
heart,
river,
big,
kilometer,
bridge
The
river
Seine
塞纳河
The
Seine
runs
through
the
center
of
1
,
passing
10
of
the
20
districts(区).
The
river
is
776
2
long,
France’s
3
longest
river.
The
Seine
has
always
been
the
4
and
soul
of
Paris.
The
old
5
,
the
riverboats,
the
gardens,
and
the
32
6
are
one
of
the
best
natural
scenes
of
the
world.
The
oldest
bridge
was
built
in
1578.
The
7
one
was
finished
in
the
summer
of
1996.
From
the
8
,
visitors
can
see
the
Cathedral
of
Notre-Dame,
the
Louvre
(卢浮宫),
and
the
Eiffel
9
.
The
northern
side
of
the
10
is
called
the
Right
Bank
and
the
southern
side
the
Left
Bank.
The
Banks
were
added
to
the
UNESCO’s
list
of
World
Heritage
Sites
(联合国教科文组织的世界遗产名单)
in
1991.
1.____________
2.___________
3.____________
4.____________
5.____________
6.____________
7.___________
8.____________
9.____________
10.___________
十、任务阅读（共10分，每小题1分）。
School
librarians
neededOur
school
library
is
still
open
during
the
summer
holidays.
We
need
two
helpers
to
come
into
school
three
hours
a
day,
five
days
a
week
to
help
us.
The
job
will
last
for
tour
weeks.◆able
to
read
simple
English
and
Chinese◆Confident
when
using
the
library
computer
systemPlease
note
that
there
is
no
pay
for
this
job.
However,
the
librarians
who
work
for
us
will
receive
book
vouchers(代金券)
worth
$
500.For
more
information,
please
see
Mrs.
pang
in
the
library
on
the
second
floor,
any
lunchtime.
根据短文内容，回答下列问题。
1.
How
many
helpers
does
the
school
library
need
during
the
summer
holidays
_____________________________________________________________
2.
What
languages
are
the
helpers
able
to
understand
_____________________________________________________________
3.
Is
there
any
pay
for
the
job
_____________________________________________________________
4.
Where
can
you
get
more
information
if
you
want
the
job
_____________________________________________________________
5.
When
does
Mrs.
Pang
give
more
information
_____________________________________________________________
【答案】
八、One
possible
version:
Changes
in
Our
Hometown
Over
the
past
twenty
years,
great
changes
have
taken
place
in
our
hometown.
In
the
past,
the
houses
in
our
hometown
were
very
poor.
The
water
in
the
rivers
was
very
dirty.
People
used
to
walk
or
ride
bicycles
to
go
to
work.
But
now,
many
people
in
our
hometown
have
moved
into
tall
buildings
(there
are
many
tall
buildings
here
and
there).
The
rivers
are
clean
and
people
can
swim
in
them.
People
can
take
buses
or
drive
their
own
cars
to
go
to
work.
九、1.Paris
2.kilometers
3.second
4.heart
5.buildings
6.bridges
7.newest
8.water
9.Tower
10.river
十、1.Two.
2.Eglish
and
Chinese.
3.No.
4.In
the
library
on
the
second
floor.
5.Any
lunchtime.
Lily,
Singapore
May,
a
girl
from
Taiwan,
is
the
most
confident
girl
that
I
have
ever
met.
She
looks
tough(强悍)。I
lack(缺少)
confidence
and
I
am
quite
shy.
We
have
very
different
personalities(个性)。This
is
why
we
are
such
good
friends.
Mary,
Canada
My
best
friend
is
Ana.
We
spent
a
lot
of
time
together
until
we
were
12
years
old
in
Canada.
Then
I
moved
to
America
with
my
family.
When
I
went
to
college
in
New
York
I
saw
Ana
in
my
class
.We
can
study
together
again.
Ben,
Australia
My
best
friend
is
fanny.
I
got
sick
with
flu
and
she
came
to
take
care
of
me.
She
is
also
very
bright,
although
sometimes
she
gets
angry.
She
yells(大声嚎叫)
at
me
for
always
being
late.
Kate,
Japan
I
love
to
spend
time
with
Dick.
We
share
the
same
sense
of
humor,
enjoy
talking
about
the
funny
things
we
did
when
were
children,
and
tell
jokes.
PAGE
17